PATENT ABSTRACT
An automated benefit administration system and methods of use and doing business. The full system includes a wide range of features including application of business rules to enrollment, eligibility, and maintenance data input, making of business decisions based on the specific data entered, and issuing of notices based on business rule discrepancies including notices to third parties when deemed appropriate. The full system also is secure while providing remote access, including through the Internet, limits access based on user hierarchy, allows user customization of various features including communications vehicles (e-mail, letter correspondence, or facsimile) and of the format of certain communications, provides automatic enrollment in Cobra without re-entry of beneficiary data, accomplishes various types of financial reconciliation, accommodates differing organizational structures and groupings of entities, provides business rule over-ride capability for certain users, and provides robust information about carriers and their services.

PATENT DESCRIPTION
CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS 
       [0001]    This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/006,278, filed Dec. 6, 2004, entitled “Benefits Administration System and Methods of Use and Doing Business,” the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/006,278 claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 60/526,961, filed Dec. 5, 2003, entitled “Benefit Administration System and Methods of Use and Doing Business,” the disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference. 
     
    
       [0002]    The following document is a copyrighted text. All copyrights are reserved as allowed by law. 
       BACKGROUND 
       [0003]    The present invention relates to benefits administration systems and methods of use and doing business. The present invention also relates to automated systems for administering benefits. 
         [0004]    In business and industry, benefits plans are common. They often include health care, savings or retirement plan, insurance, and other funding or services for employees. Administration of benefits has long presented a substantial challenge for business and industry. 
         [0005]    One prior art automated system designed for administration of benefits has been known as the “Phoenix” system. The Phoenix system automated certain benefits administration tasks and included features such as:
       a. enrollment of beneficiaries through a limited-access, private computer network such as an business&#39;s internal computer network;   b. automated but limited application of certain basic business rules to inform the user, at the time of entry on-screen only, of certain limited missing information such as a beneficiary&#39;s address, birthdate dependents, or benefits plan choice;   c. automated reconciliation of payments provided they exactly match the amount invoiced to the customer;   d. limited automation of physical letter generation such as generation of a welcome letter to a new customer setting forth little more than the effective date of initiation of plan coverage for the customer;   e. automated maintenance of certain limited carrier data, including certain carrier rates and rating areas;   f. limited automation of Cobra enrollment by re-keying data for the Cobra enrollment into the system;   g. limited automation of open enrollment and re-qualification by automated sending out of notices and issuance of failure to re-qualify reports, allowing manual entry of termination if desired by the administrator;   h. automated termination and issuance of termination notice to the carrier upon-first termination of a customer and thus well prior to conclusion of the re-instatement option period; and   i. limited periodic reconciling of payments actually received in-house by receipt at the system administrator&#39;s mailroom, routing to the finance department for entry into the system; if the payments matched exactly the amount of their respective invoices, the finance department would initiate a program through that would reconcile the cash received against the invoice; non-matching payments would require substantial manual involvement in the reconciliation process   j. The Phoenix system included numerous limitations and issues, however, including:   k. limited carrier data such as not including data (only zip codes and rates);   l. lack of automated creation of a Cobra record from information already in the system for a given beneficiary;   m. with regard to issuance of notices for enrollment or re-qualification, lacked ability select sub-groups (e.g., groups under 5 employees) for issuance of notices only to them, and also lacked automatic termination of groups that do not re-qualify;   n. providing notice of termination of a group to a carrier prior to expiration of a re-qualification period for the group including Cobra members of the group;   o. lack of automatic changing of employee status upon change of employee coverage (e.g., by changing from employee-only coverage to employee and spouse coverage), along with lack of automated corrected billing as a result of the change;   p. lack of automated reconciliation of cash upon closing of a batch of inputted premium checks, and automatic reconciling of premium notices with payments provided by multiple payments (e.g., multiple checks providing payment for a particular premium amount);   q. limited application of business rules to ensure correct data entry and limiting of enrollment as allowed by the rules, and relatedly, no ability to issue notices other than on-screen notices of certain limited types of information that may be missing;   r. limited ability to generate required notices, and limited or no ability to send notices through differing media (e-mail, mail, fax);   s. no ability to allow system access through remote or separate networks, such as via the Internet;   t. no ability to reconcile payments that do not exactly match invoice amounts, and no ability to issue notices based on matching discrepancies; and   u. limited data handling capacity, requiring periodic purge data to run the system.       
 
       BRIEF SUMMARY OF CERTAIN ASPECTS OF THE INVENTION 
       [0027]    In summary, the present invention relates to an automated benefit administration system and methods of use and doing business. In certain embodiments, a full system includes a wide range of features including application of business rules to enrollment, eligibility, and maintenance data input, making of business decisions based on the specific data entered, and issuing of notices based on business rule discrepancies including notices to third parties when deemed appropriate. The full system also is secure while providing remote access, including through the Internet, limits access based on user hierarchy, allows user customization of various features including communications vehicles (e-mail, letter correspondence, or facsimile) and of the format of certain communications, provides automatic enrollment in COBRA without re-entry of beneficiary data, accomplishes various types of financial reconciliation, accommodates differing organizational structures and groupings of entities, provides business rule over-ride capability for certain users, and provides robust information about carriers and their services. 
         [0028]    There are many other novel aspects and aspects of embodiments of the present invention. They will become apparent as the specification proceeds. In this regard, it is to be understood that the scope of the invention is not be determined by whether given subject matter addresses all or particular issues in the prior art noted above or provides all or particular features identified in this brief summary. 
     
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
         [0029]    FIGS. A- 1  to A- 3  are diagrams illustrating aspects of architectures in which embodiments of the present invention may be implemented. 
           [0030]    FIGS. H- 1 A and H- 1 B show a flowchart illustrating an example process of creating a master record for a carrier, FIGS. H- 2  to H- 9  illustrate example screens used in carrier record functions in embodiments of the present invention, and FIG. H- 10  shows an associated screen flow. 
           [0031]    FIGS. H- 11 A, H- 11 B and H- 11 C show a flowchart illustrating an example process of creating a plan, FIGS. H- 12  to H- 14  illustrate example screens used in plan creation functions in embodiments of the present invention, and FIG. H- 15  shows an associated screen flow. 
           [0032]    FIGS. H- 16  to H- 19  are flowcharts illustrating example processes for admin fee, agent fee, additional fee and rate differential, FIGS. H- 20  to H- 31  illustrate example screens used in fee and rate functions in embodiments of the present invention, and FIG. H- 32  shows an associated screen flow. 
           [0033]    FIG. H- 33  is a flowchart illustrating example zip processes, FIGS. H- 34  to H- 35  illustrate example screens used in zip functions in embodiments of the present invention, and FIG. H- 36  shows an associated screen flow. 
           [0034]    FIGS. I- 1  and I- 2  are flowcharts illustrating example COBRA processes, FIGS. I- 3  to I- 11  illustrate example screens used in COBRA functions in embodiments of the present invention, and FIG. I- 12  shows an associated screen flow. 
           [0035]    FIGS. I- 13  to I- 23  show screen flows for screens used in change management in embodiments of the present invention. 
           [0036]    FIG. I- 24  is a flowchart illustrating example requalification and open enrollment processes, 
           [0037]    FIGS. I- 25  to I- 30  illustrate example screens used in requalification and open enrollment functions in embodiments of the present invention, and FIGS. I- 31  to I- 33  show associated screen flows. 
           [0038]    FIG. I- 34  is a flowchart illustrating example termination processes, FIGS. I- 35  to I- 59  illustrate example screens used in termination and reinstatement functions in embodiments of the present invention, and FIG. I- 60  show an associated screen flow. 
           [0039]    FIGS. I- 61  to I- 64  illustrate example screens used in appeals and grievances functions in embodiments of the present invention, and FIG. I- 65  show an associated screen flow. 
           [0040]    FIGS. I- 66  to I- 71  illustrate example screens used in association masters functions in embodiments of the present invention, and FIG. I- 72  show an associated screen flow. 
           [0041]    FIGS. I- 73  to I- 76  illustrate example screens used in carrier issues functions in embodiments of the present invention, and FIG. I- 77  show an associated screen flow. 
           [0042]    FIGS. J- 1  to J- 8  illustrate example screens used in billing, cash receipt, cash reconciliation and risk adjustment functions in embodiments of the present invention. 
           [0043]    FIGS. P- 1  to P- 12  are flowcharts illustrating example security mechanism processes, and 
           [0044]    FIGS. P- 13  to P- 38  illustrate example screens used in security mechanism functions in embodiments of the present invention. 
       
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION 
       [0045]    Certain embodiments of the benefits administration system may (i) apply rules to enrollment, eligibility, and/or group maintenance data input, preferably all such input, and (ii) make business rule decisions based on the specific data entered, preferably including automatic actions related to correct business rules as well as issuance of notices for business rule discrepancies. These capabilities can, in certain embodiments, include business rule over-rides based on user authority level. 
         [0046]    For example, in the insurance industry, an enrollment application is required for enrollment into any insurance plan. Enrollment rules may pertain to the input of data from this application into the benefits administration system. An example of an enrollment rule may include inputting a Social Security number (SSN) that has been assigned to another member previously. In certain embodiments, the benefits administration system can produce a notification of a duplicate SSN and may not allow the completion of the member&#39;s enrollment utilizing the duplicate SSN. 
         [0047]    Another example of an enrollment business rule is the entry of information for a new member who requests family health coverage but does not list any dependents on the new member&#39;s enrollment application in the system. In certain embodiments, the business rules within and automatically applied by benefits administration system can require the data entry of one spouse and at least one child in order to comply with family coverage. Without this dependent information, the system may refrain from allowing finalization of the enrollment. In certain embodiments, the system can then automatically designate the member&#39;s application as pending and generate one or more notices (such as letters) advising of the need for, or requesting, the missing information. 
         [0048]    Eligibility rules may pertain to the specific business rules set up by the insurance companies. For example, to be eligible for a certain type of insurance, an employer group may require at least two employees; or in order for an employee to be eligible, the employee may have to work at least thirty hours per week. In certain embodiments, the benefits administration system may implement these types of specific rules. 
         [0049]    For example, if a user seeks to enter an employer group with only one employee, in certain embodiments the system can thus refuse to finalize the enrollment unless another employee&#39;s information is entered. As another example, if user enters hours—work—per week for an employee less than the business rule of 30 hours, in certain embodiments, the system will not allow finalization of the enrollment. In certain embodiments, the system may accommodate exceptions such as when a user with a predetermined authority level, such as a manager, desires to over-ride the eligibility business rule. In certain embodiments, the system can allow the exception based on pre-arranged authority levels within the system. 
         [0050]    Group maintenance may pertain to enrollment/eligibility activities that occur after the finalization of a group&#39;s enrollment. One example may be the addition a newly hired employee to the employer group&#39;s plan. In certain embodiments, once the new employee application is received and data is entered, the system may apply one or more business rules for the waiting period for the new hire within the group within which the new hire is hired. Based on this comparison, the system may either assign a correct effective date or deny the enrollment because the employee has not properly satisfied the waiting period. In additional embodiments, if the employee is enrolled, the system may automatically issue an enrollment letter; or if denied, the system may automatically issue a denial letter. 
         [0051]    Yet another group maintenance example may be the receipt of monthly insurance premium payments. In certain embodiments, the system may automatically issue an invoice outlining activity affecting the premium for a given period of time, such as the past month. Such activity may include adding a newly hired employee or disenrolling a terminated employee. In certain embodiments, the system may implement business rules to provide automatic reconciliation of the premium to the amount of an invoice. 
         [0052]    In certain embodiments, the system may also be flexible enough to take into consideration activity that occurred after the creation of the invoice in reconciling the premium. For example, the monthly invoice to a given customer may total a particular amount. By the due date of the invoice, the employer may have sent notification of an employee disenrollment. The employer may have only sent a payment that deducts the premium for the disenrolled employee. In certain embodiments, the system can automatically reconcile the received payment against the invoice amount and the termination credit for the disenrolled employee. 
         [0053]    In certain embodiments, the benefits administration system may implement varying authority levels for data entry and system operation. For example, the system may provide that (i) a data entry position may have authority to enter data but not to finalize enrollment even if all business rules are met; (ii) yet another position may have authority to finalize enrollment if all business rules have been satisfied; (iii) a supervisor may have authority to finalize enrollment with, as possible examples, minor premium shortages or non-eligibility-related missing enrollment information; (iv) managers may have authority to finalize enrollments with significant premium shortages or non-eligibility issues; and (v) a system administrator may have authority to over-ride any business rule. 
         [0054]    Certain embodiments may also provide remote access through disparate networks, such as, for example, through the Internet, for enrollment, eligibility, or group maintenance data input. In certain embodiments, the system may then make business rule decisions based on the specific data entered. In certain embodiments, the system also may automatically perform actions related to the business rules. In certain embodiments, the system also may automatically issue notices, including on-line notice in certain embodiments, for business rule discrepancies. In certain embodiments, the system may include business rule over-rides based on the authority level of user. 
         [0055]    In certain embodiments, the system can allow an external business customer to process enrollment, eligibility, or group maintenance via the Internet. For example, in the insurance industry, an enrollment application typically is required for enrollment into an insurance plan. In certain embodiments, the benefits administration system may allow this application to be entered remotely through a, preferably secure, Web site. 
         [0056]    For example, an employer may request enrollment in a health insurance plan. In certain embodiments, the employer then may access the Web site provided by the system and enter the employer&#39;s current employees&#39; demographic and health carrier information. The employer also may pay the first month&#39;s premium on-line through the Web site. 
         [0057]    Preferably, the system prompts the on-line user for information. While the data is being entertained, in certain embodiments the system may compare the data to the business rules associated with each field. Once the input is completed properly, in certain embodiments the system may present an enrollment summary sheet summarizing enrollment information for the on-line user. For example, in certain embodiments implementing the a wage and tax form requirement for new group enrollments, the system may present the on-line user with the completed form and instructions to return the form to, for example, the insurance company for further processing. In certain embodiments, once the insurer approves enrollment, the system may automatically e-mail or otherwise forward an enrollment acceptance form to the user. 
         [0058]    In certain embodiments, business rules remain identical whether for in-network or remote on-line transactions such as, for example, through the Internet. 
         [0059]    Group maintenance may involve enrollment/eligibility activity occurring after the finalization of a group&#39;s enrollment. For example, if an employer or designated contact person is attempting to enroll a newly hired employee on-line, the employee is hired to work twenty hours per week, and the business rule set up for this particular group is that all employee&#39;s must work forty hours per week, in certain embodiments the system may dis-allow the finalization of the enrollment. In certain embodiments, the system may automatically issue a notice informing the group of the non-enrollment and, preferably, the reason(s) for the non-enrollment. 
         [0060]    Another group maintenance activity can be employee or dependent disenrollments. In certain embodiments, the employer or designated person may access the appropriate group information on-line and enter the requested termination date. If the requested termination date complies with the business rule, in certain embodiments the system may immediately process the termination, preferably including the sending of a termination notice and COBRA information to the disenrolled employee, adjusting the applicable premium invoice, and notifying the appropriate insurance carrier. If the requested termination date is not within the pertinent business rules, in certain embodiments the system may calculate the termination date and display the date to the on-line user. If the user were to accept this date, in certain embodiments the system may complete the termination and, preferably, issue a notification to the user, such as by e-mail. If the user were to decline the system&#39;s proposed termination date, in certain embodiments the system may place the requested employee termination on hold and, preferably automatically, issue a notice of the situation to an appropriate representative. 
         [0061]    In certain embodiments, the system may limit the capability to over-ride business rules to in-house personnel (e.g., the personnel of the entity that administers the system). 
         [0062]    In certain embodiments, the system can provide a security application or process in order to control access to the system. In certain embodiments, the security framework includes a security information database as well as an administrator login capability. In certain embodiments, the system can allow the administrator to create users, modules, groups, applications, and assign user roles and access control lists (ACLs), etc. Preferably, the system significantly restricts access to the core administrative system. 
         [0063]    In certain embodiments, the system generates an ACL for each user at the time the user logs into the system. Access to any resource in the core administrative system may be determined by the ACL, and the determination may be stored in, e.g., a user profile object, which may be stored into the session. A user can include a person working in any of the departments in a company, Internet users, or persons accessing an in-house system from an external location. In certain embodiments, individual user permissions take precedence over group permissions. In certain embodiments, even if the group permission is less restrictive than the user permission, the user permission overrides the group permission. 
         [0064]    For example, the agent/broker of a large association group may want to allow the members of the association to enroll through the Internet but to also provide for agent/broker review of applications prior to actual enrollment. In certain embodiments, the system, through its security system, can allow such members to enroll through the Internet (with the application being processed through the enrollment/eligibility business rules), then route the completed application to the agent/broker (versus directly into the system after passing all the business rules), in order to allow the agent/broker to review the application. In certain embodiments, upon completion of such review and approval by the agent/broker, the system can automatically finalize the enrollment. 
         [0065]    In certain embodiments, the benefits administration system may also provide the automatic generation of documents and other communications, customizable to the desires of the users. In this regard, the system may provide a flexible mail merge system for handling external business correspondence. In certain embodiments, the merge templates are basically RTF files with placeholders for dynamic data to be merged into them. In certain embodiments, the output is either a RTF file or a PostScript or a PDF document. 
         [0066]    In certain embodiments, the system can also maintain a log of mail merge letters generated. The log information may include the template identification, a timestamp, the triggering application, and identification of the user generating the letter and to whom the letter is addressed (i.e., which group or member or agent). In certain embodiments, the templates are readily available, and the system may accommodate a virtually unlimited number of templates. 
         [0067]    For example, when the agent/broker provides final approval for association member enrollment, in certain embodiments the system may issue enrollment approval and related correspondence. In certain embodiments, such correspondence or other documentation may be customized through the system to issue on the agent/broker&#39;s letterhead. 
         [0068]    In certain embodiments, the system may provide for customizable work groups. Workgroups may define the broad categorization of a group of agents, internal working personnel, external working personnel, and mailing groups. In certain embodiments, the workgroup customization process includes creating a hierarchy of one or more parent entities and defining other workgroups under the parent(s). 
         [0069]    In this event, a parent may be the highest in the hierarchy of a workgroup. Examples of parent work groups may include agent work groups or internal work groups. Examples of workgroups under the parent group may include groups of agents of differing authority levels within a given agent work group. In certain embodiments, further sub-groups or child groups may be established within the system. An example may include may include agents in a given geographical area or a customer group that has been enrolled in the system. In certain embodiments, the system includes the ability to exchange workgroup members or duplicate workgroup members in whole or in part. 
         [0070]    In certain embodiments, the benefits administration system provides automatic but flexible account reconciliation. Cash reconciliation can provide a process of reconciling the cash receipts to individual invoices and reconciling the amount paid by the group. In certain embodiments, the system may provide a rule for reconciliation such as, for example:
       a. determine if negative cash is available and reconcile it with the positive cash (e.g., for NSF checks); and   b. identify the oldest unreconciled invoice and reconcile it with the oldest cash.   c. The reconciliation process may include automatic review of all invoices that have not been reconciled for a specific group and reconciling the invoice that has the earliest date with the cash received. It also may match the cash receipt with the invoice amount.   d. In certain embodiments, the reconciliation process can be started automatically when a cash receipt batch is closed to reconcile cash received with invoices.   e. Other functions that may be automatically performed           cash reconciliation may include one or more of the following:   f. Billed amounts and cash receipt: this reconciliation process may reconcile an invoice that has not yet been reconciled for a specific group, determine if the invoice is the earliest unreconciled invoice for the specific group, and reconcile the invoice with the cash received from the group/member;   g. Cash to negative cash: this process may reconcile negative cash with the positive cash received from the group. This may arise from receipt of a NSF (Non-Sufficient Funds) check after the applicable group&#39;s invoice has been reconciled. Upon receipt of notification of the NSF check, the NSF cash receipt entry may be created in the system. Upon receipt of a replacement check for the NSF check, the NSF check may be automatically reconciled with the replacement check provided the amount of the replacement check is the same as the amount of the NSF check.       
 
         [0078]    Adjustments to cash: this process may include reconciling a cash receipt with the adjustment that may be available in the next invoice. For example, if the group has received the invoice for the next month and an employee has been terminated during the month but after the generation of invoice, the generated invoice may not identify this adjustment for the termed employees. The applicable group may deduct the adjustments for the terminated employee and forward the cash that does not match the original invoice. In certain embodiments, the system can automatically identify the discrepancy and adjust the cash receipt for the invoice with the termination adjustment taken in to account. In certain embodiments, the next invoice may identify the cash receipt and the adjustment for employee termination. 
         [0079]    Adjustment to billed amounts: this process can identify previously billed invoices for the group provide adjustment as needed to the next invoice. 
         [0080]    Billed amount to itself if no payment is due: this process can identify if the group has been terminated after the invoice for the group has been created. In certain embodiments, the system automatically creates an invoice for the terminated group and adjusts the amount due based on the previous invoice. In certain embodiments, the system issues a final invoice for the terminated group showing net amount due, if any, or refunded. 
         [0081]    Adjustment to adjustment: this process may reconcile invoice adjustments against each other. For example, if a payment late fee accrues but is later waived, in certain embodiments the system may automatically adjust (eliminate) the late fee. Another may involve reinstatement of an employer group termination and associated charging of a reinstatement fee. If such a fee were to then be waived, in certain embodiments the system may automatically reconcile the waived fee. 
         [0082]    Certain embodiments of the benefits administration system provide a substantially improved ability to handle much larger data sets and to handle data more efficiently. In addition, certain embodiments utilize an independent platform and portable programming language such as Java. Preferably, the system components are built using object oriented programming concepts. Preferably, these object-oriented components can be reused in other applications with similar requirements or extended further with additional features when and wherever required. Preferably, the system is developed using scalable J2EE standards. 
         [0083]    In certain embodiments, the system may allow a given user to work with the system in differing roles or capacities. For example, a manager may seek to perform the role of data entry as well as that of a manager or authorizing entity. In certain embodiments, the system allows modification or addition of user roles as desired. In certain embodiments, the CAS (Core Administration System) system is, however, preconfigured for a basic set of predefined roles. 
         [0084]    In certain embodiments, the benefits administration may further provide one or more of the following aspects:
       a. selective issuance of notices to sub-groups meeting certain criteria;   b. automated creation of a Cobra record from information in the system for a given beneficiary;   c. automatic issuance of notice to a member prior to termination of the re-qualification period;   d. automatic revision of employee status upon change of employee coverage;   e. automatic issuance of notices when data is not entered correctly or completely, including issuance of other than on-screen notices to one or more system administrators or other entity;   f. ability of a user to customize how the user may be provide notices or correspondence, such as by e-mail, mail, or facsimile; and   g. enhanced carrier data maintenance within the system.       
 
         [0092]    The system may be utilized by a benefits provider as part of it business and operation. Alternatively, the system may be utilized by a service provider, such as for or in connection with remuneration provided to the service provider by customers. For example, user fees may be provided by the users of the system, such as benefits providers or employers. 
         [0093]    The system may also be utilized by an employer or group of employers, and their employees, to provide automated benefits administration for the employer or group of employers. 
         [0094]    In certain embodiments, all features identified above may be provided by the system. The system may thereby provide an automated benefits administration and method of use of the system and doing business in conjunction with it. 
         [0095]    There are many other novel aspects and aspects of embodiments of the present invention. They will become apparent as the specification proceeds. In this regard, it is to be understood that the scope of the invention is not be determined by whether given subject matter addresses all or particular issues in the prior art noted above or provides all or particular features identified in this brief summary. 
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     BPI—Software Architecture Document 
     Architectural Design Specification Document 
     Document Id: BPI CAS ADS 
     Version: &lt;1.0&gt; 
     1. Introduction 
       [0096]    The Software Architecture Document will provide an overview of the entire “Software Architecture” that will be used to develop Web Interface Module for BPI. 
       1.1. Purpose 
       [0097]    This document provides a comprehensive architectural overview of the system, using a number of different architectural views to depict different aspects of the system. It is intended to capture and convey the significant architectural decisions that have been made on the system. 
       1.2. Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations 
       [0098]    Some of the common acronyms used in this document are as follows: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Abbreviations 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 EJB 
                 Enterprise Java Beans 
               
               
                   
                 HTML 
                 Hypertext Markup Language 
               
               
                   
                 J2EE 
                 Java 2 Enterprise Edition 
               
               
                   
                 JMS 
                 Java Messaging Services 
               
               
                   
                 JNDI 
                 Java Naming and Directory Interface 
               
               
                   
                 JSP 
                 Java Server Pages 
               
               
                   
                 MVC 
                 Model View Controller 
               
               
                   
                 W3C 
                 World Wide Web Consortium 
               
               
                   
                 XML 
                 Extensible Markup Language 
               
               
                   
                 BPI 
                 Benefit Partners Inc 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       1.3. Overview 
       [0099]    This Software Architecture Document, at high level, will contain:
       a. Architectural representation of proposed system   b. Architectural goals   c. Software requirement   d. Software selection for the proposed system   e. Standards and methodologies that will be adopted for the proposed system       
 
       2. Architectural Goals 
       [0105]    These guidelines will lay a foundation for the design and implementation strategy, selection of development tools, application software, and testing tools. The basic goals of the architectural design are discussed below. 
         [0106]    2.1. Portability 
         [0107]    Java is a platform independent and portable language. Applications developed in Java are proven to be portable across popular platforms. 
         [0108]    2.2. Distribution 
         [0109]    The J2EE Standards will be adopted to develop the new application. J2EE standards demonstrate consistency of distributed applications that access various data sources: 
         [0110]    2.3. Reusability 
         [0111]    The components will be built using Object Oriented concepts. These object-oriented components can be reused in other applications with similar requirements or extended further with additional features when and wherever required. 
         [0112]    2.4. Scalability 
         [0113]    Applications developed using the J2EE Standards are proven to be scalable. Therefore, the system will be built in conformance with the J2EE Standards. 
         [0114]    2.5. Performance 
         [0115]    Identifying the latencies within the system and outside the system boundaries enables us to increase the performance of the application. Since most of the threading issues that lower the performance of an application are well handled within the Websphere application server, Websphere server&#39;s features and resources will be effectively utilized to achieve performance. 
       3. Architectural Representation of the Proposed System 
       [0116]    The System will be developed based on the J2EE specification and follow the N-tier MVC architecture. 
         [0117]    A tier is a logical partition of the separation of concerns in the system. Each tier is assigned its unique responsibility in the system. 
         [0118]    J2EE specifications are multi tiered consisting of the Client Tier, Middle Tier (Presentation Layer, Business Layer, and Integration Layer), and the Data source. The J2EE architecture diagram is described below. (See FIG. A- 1 ) 
         [0119]    3.1. Client Tier 
         [0120]    This tier represents all devices or system clients accessing the system or the application. In this case, the client would be a web browser or other application. 
         [0121]    3.2. Middle Tier 
         [0122]    The middle tier can be classified into multiple logical layers depending upon the business requirements and programming model. Three basic classifications are discussed below. 
         [0123]    3.2.1. Presentation Layer 
         [0124]    This tier encapsulates all presentation logic required to service the clients that access the system. The presentation tier intercepts the client requests, provides single sign-on, session management and accesses business services, constructs the response, and delivers the response to the client. Servlets, JSP, HTML reside in this tier. 
         [0125]    3.2.2. Business Layer 
         [0126]    This tier provides the business services required by the application clients. The tier contains the business data and business logic. All business processing for the application is centralized into this tier. The enterprise bean components are the choice for implementing the business objects in the business tier. 
         [0127]    3.2.3. Integration Layer 
         [0128]    This tier is responsible for communicating with external resources and systems, such as data stores and legacy applications. The business tier is coupled with the integration tier whenever the business objects require data or services that reside in the resource tier. The components in this tier can use JDBC, J2EE connector technology, or some proprietary middleware to work with the resource tier. 
         [0129]    3.3. Data Source 
         [0130]    This is the tier that contains the database and external resources such as legacy systems, business-to-business (B2B) systems, and services, such as, credit card authorization and EFT. 
         [0131]    3.4. Framework 
         [0132]    The following figure depicts the interaction model of a typical Model View Controller or the JSP Model 2 Architecture that is adopted in the Framework. (See FIG. A- 2 ) 
         [0133]    Here, the servlet acts as the controller and is in charge of processing the request and creating any objects of the beans used by the JSP. It also redirects, to the respective JSP, based on the Browser&#39;s request. There will be very minimal logic present in the JSP regarding the presentation. All the database access and program business logic will be processed within the bean. 
         [0134]    There will be different beans for data source access (database, enterprise systems, queue, XML, etc.), error handling, access logging, and module wise application business logic processing. This clearly separates the presentation from the content and enables easy maintenance and scalability. 
         [0135]    This model is the widely used and accepted model for application development in Java. This model is also adopted by Apache Stnits framework for Java application development. 
       4. Software Selection for the Proposed System 
       [0136]    This section provides an insight on the software selection for the various tiers depicted in this document. 
         [0137]    4.1. Software Selection 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Software Name and Version 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Ooerating System 
                 Server/Client - Win NT/Win2000 
               
               
                 Browser 
                 IE 5.5 and above 
               
               
                 Client Side Scriotmc 
                 HTML 4.0, Java Script 1.2 
               
               
                 Server Side 
                 JSP 1.1, Java Servlets 2.2, JDK 1.3 
               
               
                 Programming 
               
               
                 Database Server 
                 DB2 UBD Version V 7.3 
               
               
                 Web Server 
                 IBM HTTP Server V 1.3.19 
               
               
                 Application Server 
                 Websphere Application Server Advanced 
               
               
                   
                 Edition Version 4.0 
               
               
                 Report Server 
                 Seagate Crystal Reports 8.5 
               
               
                 Office Tools 
                 Microsoft Office 2000 (select Word 2000, 
               
               
                   
                 Excel 2000 and Outlook 2000 and Access 
               
               
                   
                 2000), Post Script Printer, Adobe Acrobat 5.0 
               
               
                 Servlet, Bean 
                 Visual Age 4.0 
               
               
                 Development 
               
               
                 HTML, JSP, XML, etc. 
                 Dream Weaver 4.0 
               
               
                 Testing 
                 JTest 4.5 
               
               
                 Data Flow and Class 
                 UML Studio 
               
               
                 Design 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0138]    4.2. API Versions 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 API Name 
                 Version 
                 Remarks 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 J2EE 
                 Specification 1.2 
                 Supported by Websphere 4.0 
               
               
                   
                 EJB 
                 Specification 1.2 
                 Supported by Websphere 4.0 
               
               
                   
                 JDK 
                 JDK 1.2.2 
                 Supported by Websphere 4.0 
               
               
                   
                 Servlet 
                 Servlet 2.2 
                 Supported by Websphere 4.0 
               
               
                   
                 JSP 
                 JSP 1.1 
                 Supported by Websphere 4.0 
               
               
                   
                 HTTP 
                 HTTP/1.1 
                 Stable W3C Specification 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       5. Standards and Methodologies 
       [0139]    The standards and methodologies that will be followed for the application development are discussed below. 
         [0140]    5.1. Design Document 
         [0141]    Detailed design document will be prepared based on the scope of the application prior to the development. This document will contain the details on graphic user interface, navigation, class diagrams, data dictionary, field validation criteria, and program logic. 
         [0142]    5.2. Bean Classification 
         [0143]    The types of Java beans that will be used to perform different business logics will be decided during the design stage. The bean types will be classified based on the complexity of the business logic and the scalability. 
         [0144]    5.3. Coding 
         [0145]    A separate document will be prepared outlining the coding standards that will be adopted in the application development. The document will contain details on program naming conventions to be used while coding. All programs developed will follow this standard. 
         [0146]    5.4. Testing 
         [0147]    Test plan and test case documents will be prepared for unit and integration testing of the application. The test cases will be used to test the application modules and integration. JTest will be used for testing code construction (white-box testing), code functionality (black-box testing), and code integrity (regression testing). 
         [0148]    5.5. Error Handling 
         [0149]    All error messages and error codes for the application will be stored in the database. Run time errors will be logged to text files that will be generated periodically by the system. Input validations will occur in both the client tier and the middle tier. The input validation error messages captured in the client tier will be displayed using JavaScript alerts. The input validation error messages captured in the middle tier will be displayed in HTML format, on the same page on which the error has occurred, in a different color. 
         [0150]    5.6. Page Design 
         [0151]    A Page Design Guidelines document will be created by Mascon, and approved by BPI, prior to the development. All pages in the application will conform to the standards depicted in this document. This document will contain the specifications for fonts, layouts, images, and other relevant details. 
         [0152]    5.7. Parameterization 
         [0153]    Custom JSP tag libraries will be created for all initial values and parameters used in the application. JSP tag libraries define declarative, modular functionality that can be reused by any JSP page. Tag libraries reduce the necessity to embed large amounts of Java code in JSP pages by moving the functionality provided by the tags into tag implementation classes. In doing so, tag libraries make authoring JSP pages easier and modular. 
       6. System Architecture and Hardware Selection 
       [0154]    This section provides the details of the system architecture with nodes, terminals and their placement within the respective zones. 
         [0155]    6.1. Physical Architecture (See FIG. A- 3 ) 
         [0156]    6.2. Hardware Selection 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Current 
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Server 
                 Base 
                 Configuration 
                 Software/Hardware 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Database Server 
                 Intel Pentium 
                 Intel XEO 
                 1. Windows 2000 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Processor, 2 
                 Processor 
                 Advanced Server 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CPU, 
                 1 CPU 
                 2. IE 5.5 and above 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HD 104 GB, 2 GB 
                 HDD 34 GB 
                 3. IBM DB2 UDB 
               
               
                   
                   
                 RAM, Raid 5 
                 2 GB RAM 
                 version 7.2.x 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 CPU 2.4 Ghz. 
               
               
                 2 
                 Application 
                 Intel Pentium 
                 Intel XEO 
                 1. Windows 2000 
               
               
                   
                 Server - 
                 Processor, CPU 
                 Processor 
                 Advanced Server 
               
               
                   
                 Intranet 
                 1, HD 18 GB, 2 GB 
                 1 CPU 
                 2. IE 5.5 and above 
               
               
                   
                   
                 RAM 
                 HDD 200 GB 
                 3. Websphere 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 2 GB RAM 
                 Application Server 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 CPU 2.4 Ghz. 
                 Advanced Edition 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Version 4.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 4. IBM DB2 UDB 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 version 7.2.x (For 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 WAS Repository) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 5. IBM HTTP Server 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 1.3.19 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 6. Microsoft Office 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 2000 (select Word 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 2000, Excel 2000 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 and Outlook 2000 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 and Access 2000), 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Post Script Printer, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Adobe Acrobat 5.0 
               
               
                 3 
                 Application 
                 Intel Pentium 
                 Not Available 
                 1. Windows 2000 
               
               
                   
                 Server - 
                 Processor, CPU 
                   
                 Advanced Server 
               
               
                   
                 Internet 
                 1, HD 18 GB, 2 GB 
                   
                 2. IE 5.5 and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 RAM 
                   
                 Netscape 4.7 and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 above 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 3. Websphere 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Application Server 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Advanced Edition 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Version 4.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 4. IBM DB2 UDB 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 version 7.2.x (For 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 WAS Repository) 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 5. Microsoft Office 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 2000 (select Word 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 2000, Excel 2000 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 and Outlook 2000 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 and Access 2000), 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Post Script Printer, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Adobe Acrobat 5.0 
               
               
                 4 
                 Report Server - 
                 Intel Pentium 
                 Intel Processor 
                 1. Windows 2000 
               
               
                   
                 Crystal Reports 
                 Processor, CPU 
                 1 CPU 
                 Advanced Server 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1, HD 18 GB, 2 GB 
                 HDD 17 GB 
                 2. IE 5.5 and above 
               
               
                   
                   
                 RAM 
                 2.3 GB RAM 
                 3. Seagate Crystal 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 CPU 1266 Mhz. 
                 Reports 8.5 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 4. Microsoft Office 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 2000 (select Word 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 2000, Excel 2000 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 and Outlook 2000 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 and Access 2000), 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Post Script Printer, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Adobe Acrobat 5.0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 5. lIS for Crystal 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 reports 
               
               
                 5 
                 Web Server - 
                 Intel Pentium 
                 Not Available 
                 1. Windows 2000 
               
               
                   
                 Internet 
                 Processor, CPU 
                   
                 Advanced Server 
               
               
                   
                   
                 1, HD 18 GB, 2 GB 
                   
                 2. IE 5.5 and above 
               
               
                   
                   
                 RAM 
                   
                 3. IBM HTTP Server 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 1.3.19 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 4. Microsoft Office 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 2000 (select Word 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 2000, Excel 2000 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 and Outlook 2000 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 and Access 2000), 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Post Script Printer, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                   
                 Adobe Acrobat 5.0 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       7. Browser Client Application Limitations and Work Around Solutions 
       [0157]    The limitations of the Web Browser (thin client) based application, when compared to thick clients, are as follows:
       a. Input field masking, such as automatic date formatting and phone number formatting, are not easily handled in this environment. The thin client user interface is not as easy and robust as the thick client user interface. A work around must be designed to force the user to enter values in the required format.   b. Due to the limitations of different browsers, a common methodology will be adopted that will work for all indicated browsers. This narrows down the user interface implementation features in a browser.   c. Because of the lower level on interactivity, some actions that are presented entirely on one screen in the thick client may span multiple screens. Since each screen presentation involves a round trip to the server, this will result in slightly slower screen response when compared to the single screen approach. This can be minimized with some re-design of the user interface workflow, but overall, thin clients require more “clicks” than thick clients.   d. Hot-keys validation scripts are cumbersome and take longer to download. Thus, hot-key functionality will be limited.       
 
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Process Specification 
     BPI_CAS_FSD_CM — 01 
     1. Introduction 
       [0162]    1.1. Purpose 
         [0163]    This purpose of this document is to identify the process associated with the business use case Create Carrier Master. 
         [0164]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference
       Business Use Specification       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_CM_001 
                 Create Carrier Master 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0166]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [0167]    2.1. Background 
         [0168]    Create Carrier Master is user for creation of master record for the carrier which includes the general information about the carrier, Department Contact Information, Mode of Communications Line of Coverage, plan type and the benefit level offered by the carrier and the benefit description. 
         [0169]    2.2. Process Description &amp; Flow 
         [0170]    This process describes the Use Case “Create Carrier Master”. This document is the amendment of BPI_CAS_FSD_CM — 01 (Version 1.1). 
         [0171]    2.2.1. Create Carrier Master
       The flow of the process is as described below.   a. Input the general information about the carrier.   b. Input the Department Contact Information   c. Validate if the department contact information has the right data type.   d. If yes add the information to a temporary storage.   e. If not re enter the information correctly and add again.   f. Continue adding further department contact information.   g. If yes follow steps from b) to e)   h. Edit or delete the Department Contact Information.   i. On edit remove the data from temporary storage and populate the department contact information data to the fields and change the data. Continue from c) to e).   j. On delete remove the data from the temporary storage.   k. Can continue from step b) onwards or go to step l)   l. If not then check if the data entered for the general carrier information is correct or erroneous.   m. If erroneous re enter the correct data.   n. If Correct then save the data to the repository.   o. System auto generates a unique identification number for the carrier.   p. Choose the Line of coverage   q. For the line of coverage choose the system show the Plan type.   r. Choose the Plan Type   s. For the plan type choose the system show the benefit level   t. Choose the benefit level and enter the benefit level name for the specific carrier and add.   u. The Line of coverage, plan type, Benefit Level and the name is populated in and shown.   v. Check if the data entered is correct or erroneous.   w. If erroneous then edit or delete the benefit level name.   x. Else continue adding the next line of coverage   y. If the process is completed save the data.   z. The data is saved into the repository and unique identification number is generated for the all the benefit level offered by the specific carrier a CarrierName_PlanType_BenefitLevel_UniqueID       
 
         [0199]    2.2.2. Process Flow Diagrams
       (See FIG. H- 1 )       
 
       3. User Interface 
       [0201]    3.1. User Interface Screens 
         [0202]    3.1.1. Screen ID&#39;s 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Corresponding HTML File 
               
               
                 Screen ID (SID) 
                 Screen Name 
                 Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 carrier.general 
                 Carrier General Info 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/master/ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CarrierInfo.jsp 
               
               
                 carrier.search 
                 Carrier Search 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/master/ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CarrierSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 carrier.view 
                 Carrier General Info 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/master/ 
               
               
                   
                 View 
                 CarrierGeneralInfo.jsp 
               
               
                 carrier.product 
                 Carrier Product Info 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/master/ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 CarrierProduct.jsp 
               
               
                 carrier.prodsearch 
                 Search Product 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/master/ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ProductSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 carrier.prodinfo 
                 Carrier Product Info 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/master/ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ProductView.jsp 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0203]    3.1.2. User Interface ID: Create Carrier Master 
         [0204]    3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Create Carrier Master
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 001 — 001)   (See FIG. H- 2 )       
 
         [0207]    3.1.2.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give the heading for the screen being 
               
               
                 Create 
                   
                 Create Carrier 
                 navigated 
               
               
                 Carrier 
                   
                 Master 
               
               
                 Master 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Sub Header 
                 Proved Content Area Text 
               
               
                 Carrier 
                   
                 Carrier 
               
               
                 General 
                   
                 General 
               
               
                 Information 
                   
                 Information 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Sub Header 
                 Text for the Company Address 
               
               
                 Address 
                   
                 Address 
               
               
                 Company 
                 Text 
                 Company 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                 Name 
               
               
                 Company 
                 Entry Field 
                 Company 
                 Entry Field for Company name 
               
               
                 Name (Entry 
                   
                 Name (Entry 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
               
               
                 Address 
                 Text 
                 Address 
                 Text for the Address 
               
               
                 Address (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 Address (Entry 
                 Entry Field for Address 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
               
               
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Text 
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Text for Suite/Apt # 
               
               
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Entry Field 
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Entry Field for Suite/Apt # 
               
               
                 (Entry Field) 
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
               
               
                 City 
                 Text 
                 City 
                 Text for City 
               
               
                 City (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 City (Entry 
                 Entry Field for City 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
               
               
                 State 
                 Text 
                 State 
                 Text for state 
               
               
                 State (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 State (Entry 
                 Entry Field for State 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Text 
                 ZIP 
                 Text for ZIP 
               
               
                 ZIP (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 ZIP (Entry 
                 Entry Field for ZIP 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Sub Header 
                 Text for the sub heading 
               
               
                 Contact 
                   
                 Contact 
               
               
                 Department 
                   
                 Department 
               
               
                 Department 
                 Drop Down 
                 Department 
                 List all the departments for the carrier for 
               
               
                   
                 List 
                   
                 contact information 
               
               
                 Contact Name 
                 Text 
                 Contact Name 
                 Text for Contact name 
               
               
                 Salutation 
                 Text 
                 Salutation 
                 Text for Salutation 
               
               
                 First Name 
                 Text 
                 First Name 
                 Text for First name 
               
               
                 Middle name 
                 Text 
                 Middle name 
                 Text for middle name 
               
               
                 Last name 
                 Text 
                 Last name 
                 Text for last name 
               
               
                 Suffix 
                 Text 
                 Suffix 
                 Text for Suffix 
               
               
                 Title 
                 Text 
                 Title 
                 Text for title 
               
               
                 Salutation 
                 Entry Field 
                 Salutation 
                 Entry Field for Salutation 
               
               
                 First Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 First Name 
                 Entry field for first name 
               
               
                 Middle name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Middle name 
                 Entry field for middle name 
               
               
                 Last name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Last name 
                 Entry field for last name 
               
               
                 Suffix 
                 Entry Field 
                 Suffix 
                 Entry Field for Suffix 
               
               
                 Title 
                 Entry Field 
                 Title 
                 Entry Field for title 
               
               
                 Address 
                 Text 
                 Address 
                 Text for the Address 
               
               
                 Address (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 Address (Entry 
                 Entry Field for Address 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
               
               
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Text 
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Entry Field for Suite/Apt # 
               
               
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Entry Field 
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Entry Field for Suite/Apt # 
               
               
                 (Entry Field) 
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
               
               
                 City 
                 Text 
                 City 
                 Text for City 
               
               
                 City (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 City (Entry 
                 Entry Field for City 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
               
               
                 State 
                 Text 
                 State 
                 Text for state 
               
               
                 State (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 State (Entry 
                 Entry Field for State 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Text 
                 ZIP 
                 Text for ZIP 
               
               
                 ZIP (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 ZIP (Entry 
                 Entry Field for ZIP 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
               
               
                 Mode of 
                 Drop Down 
                 Mode of 
                 List various of contact preferred 
               
               
                 Communication 
                 List 
                 Communication 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Text 
                 Phone 
                 Text for phone 
               
               
                 FAX 
                 Text 
                 FAX 
                 Text for FAX 
               
               
                 Email 
                 Text 
                 Email 
                 Text for email 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Entry Field 
                 Phone 
                 Entry Field for Phone number 
               
               
                 FAX 
                 Entry Field 
                 FAX 
                 Entry field for FAX 
               
               
                 Email 
                 Entry Field 
                 Email 
                 Entry field for email 
               
               
                 ADD 
                 Button 
                 ADD 
                 To add the above details on to the html table 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 after validation check 
               
               
                   
                 Submit 
               
               
                   
                 button) 
               
               
                 Table 
                 HTML 
                 Table 
                 Table for adding up the contact information 
               
               
                   
                 Table 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Button 
                 Delete 
                 To delete the contact information checked for 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 deletion 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Check All 
                 Text Link 
                 Check All 
                 To check all the check boxes in the table 
               
               
                 Clear All 
                 Text Link 
                 Clear All 
                 To un check all the check boxes checked in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the table 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Check box 
                 Delete 
                 To check the items for deletion 
               
               
                 Edit 
                 Button 
                 Edit 
                 To edit the contact information against the 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 row selected for edition 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Department 
                 Text 
                 Department 
                 Shows the name of the department added. 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                 Name 
                 For example finance, marketing etc. 
               
               
                 Last Name 
                 Text 
                 Last Name 
                 Name of the contact person 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Text 
                 Phone 
                 Phone of the contact person 
               
               
                 FAX 
                 Text 
                 FAX 
                 FAX of the contact person 
               
               
                 Email 
                 Text 
                 Email 
                 Email address of the contact person 
               
               
                 SAVE 
                 Button 
                 SAVE 
                 Save all the above information to the 
               
               
                   
                 HTML 
                   
                 repository) 
               
               
                   
                 Submit 
               
               
                   
                 button) 
               
               
                 CANCEL 
                 Button 
                 CANCEL 
                 To reset the entries made in all the fields 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 reset 
               
               
                   
                 button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0208]    3.1.2.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 1. 
                 Company Name 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 (Entry Field 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 2. 
                 Address (Entry 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 Field) 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 3. 
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 4. 
                 Suite/Apt # (Entry 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 Field) 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 5. 
                 City 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 6. 
                 City (Entry Field) 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 7. 
                 State 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 8. 
                 State (Entry Field) 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 9. 
                 ZIP (Entry Field) 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 10. 
                 Department 
                 Should list various departments like 
                 If none of the option is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Finance, Sales, Administration, 
                 selected. Then should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Technical, Miscellaneous etc from the 
                 show an Error Dialog Box 
               
               
                   
                   
                 repository. 
                 With message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 The First option should be 
                 “Department Name - Is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Choose One. Subsequent options 
                 required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should be listed alphabetically. 
               
               
                 11. 
                 Salutation 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 12. 
                 First Name 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 13. 
                 Middle name 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 14. 
                 Last name 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 15. 
                 Suffix 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 16. 
                 Title 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 17. 
                 Address (Entry 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 Field) 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 18. 
                 Suite/Apt # (Entry 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 Field) 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 19. 
                 City (Entry Field) 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 20. 
                 State (Entry Field) 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 21. 
                 ZIP (Entry Field) 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 22. 
                 Mode of 
                 Should list various types of Mode of 
                 If none of the option is 
               
               
                   
                 Communication 
                 Communications like Phone, FAX, 
                 selected. Then should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 email, USPS etc. from the repository. 
                 show an Error Dialog Box 
               
               
                   
                   
                 The First option should be 
                 With message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Choose One. Subsequent options 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should be listed alphabetically. 
               
               
                 23. 
                 Phone 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 24. 
                 Email 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 25. 
                 FAX 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 26. 
                 ADD 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 Error Dialog Box Text: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the “ADD” 
                 “Department Name - Is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button or Mouse Click. 
                 required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if the Contact Department is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected. If choose one default 
               
               
                   
                   
                 option is only selected throw a Java 
               
               
                   
                   
                 script error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if the Mode of Communication 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is selected. If choose one default 
               
               
                   
                   
                 option is only selected throw a Java 
               
               
                   
                   
                 script error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if the value entered for the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 fields for the Department contact 
               
               
                   
                   
                 information are correct. If not throw 
               
               
                   
                   
                 error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: Populates the HTML Table 
               
               
                   
                   
                 with the data on each column as 
               
               
                   
                   
                 relevant with the data entered in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 entry field. 
               
               
                 27. 
                 Table 
                 Should have column header and each 
               
               
                   
                   
                 subsequent row should be identified 
               
               
                   
                   
                 by alternate color combinations, i.e. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 First row should have color ‘x’ and the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 next row should have color ‘y’. The 
               
               
                   
                   
                 next row should have color ‘x’ again 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and so on. The size of any text inside 
               
               
                   
                   
                 any cell should be wrapped if the text 
               
               
                   
                   
                 becomes too long. 
               
               
                 28. 
                 Delete 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 Error Message: “Please 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the “Delete” 
                 choose the row or rows to be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button or on Mouse Click. 
                 deleted.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Delete Button should work on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 multiple deletes based on the check 
               
               
                   
                   
                 box or boxes selected. If the user 
               
               
                   
                   
                 clicks on the delete button without 
               
               
                   
                   
                 checking any of the delete check box 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should throw error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: Deletes the row or rows 
               
               
                   
                   
                 from the HTML Table (temporary 
               
               
                   
                   
                 storage) 
               
               
                 29. 
                 Check All 
                 On clicking the “Check All” link 
                 On clicking the “Check All” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should check all the check boxes in 
                 link should check all the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the HTML table. 
                 check boxes in the HTML 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 30. 
                 Clear All 
                 On clicking the “Clear All” link 
                 On clicking the “Clear All” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should uncheck all the checked check 
                 link should uncheck all the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 boxes in the HTML table. 
                 checked check boxes in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 HTML table. 
               
               
                 31. 
                 Delete 
                 Check box option with default 
                 Check box option with 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “unchecked” 
                 default “unchecked” 
               
               
                 32. 
                 Edit 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 Should function with Enter 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the “edit” button 
                 Key Cursor Positioned on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 or on Mouse Click. 
                 the “Edit” button or on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On clicking the edit button the row 
                 Mouse Click. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 edited should be removed from the 
                 On clicking the edit button 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HTML table and the data should be 
                 the row edited should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 populated back on the editable entry 
                 removed from the HTML 
               
               
                   
                   
                 fields. 
                 table and the data should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 populated back on the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 editable entry fields. 
               
               
                 33. 
                 Department Name 
                 Display the data in a text 
               
               
                 34. 
                 Name 
                 Display the data in a text 
               
               
                 35. 
                 Phone 
                 Display the data in a text 
               
               
                 36. 
                 Email 
                 Display the data in a text 
               
               
                 37. 
                 FAX 
                 Display the data in a text 
               
               
                 38. 
                 SAVE 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 Error Dialog Box Text: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the “SAVE” 
                 “The value entered for ‘FIELD 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button or on Mouse Click. 
                 NAME’ is incorrect. Please 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On saving the data the data gets saved 
                 enter the correct value.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to the database. 
                 Note: The field name should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Validation Check: For the entire 
                 be picked up dynamically 
               
               
                   
                   
                 field on the carrier general 
                 for the each field that is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 information. 
                 erroneous. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if the data entered for the 
                 For general script 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Carrier General Information is 
                 validations for common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 correct. 
                 functionality refer 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If not throw error message. 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if there is data populated on the 
                 System Error: Common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Department Contact information 
                 Text shall be followed for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 field. If yes show a dialog box with 
                 the System Error. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 message “Would you like to Add the 
                 Dialog Box Text: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 department contact information 
               
               
                   
                   
                 before saving” Yes/No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If yes allow the user to add the data. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If no save the data without adding the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Department contact information to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the HTML Table. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On Successful saving the flow should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 automatically be navigated to the next 
               
               
                   
                   
                 screen. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_002) 
               
               
                 39. 
                 Cancel 
                 Cancel Button should clear all the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 content filled on the entry fields. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0211]    3.1.3. User Interface ID: Create Product 
         [0212]    3.1.3.1. Screen Name: Create Product
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 001 — 002)   (See FIG. H- 3 )       
 
         [0215]    3.1.3.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give the heading for the screen being 
               
               
                 Carrier 
                   
                 Carrier 
                 navigated 
               
               
                 Offered Plan 
                   
                 Offered Plan 
               
               
                 Trans Id 
                 Text 
                 Trans Id 
                 Text for Trans Id 
               
               
                 Trans Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Trans Id 
                 To Enter the Trans Id 
               
               
                 Plan Name 
                 Text 
                 Plan Name 
                 Text for Plan Name 
               
               
                 Plan Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Plan Name 
                 To Enter Plan Name 
               
               
                 Carrier Name 
                 Text 
                 Carrier Name 
                 Text for Carrier Name 
               
               
                 Carrier Name 
                 Drop Down 
                 Carrier Name 
                 Lists various Carrier Names 
               
               
                   
                 List 
               
               
                 Line of 
                 Text 
                 Line of 
                 Text for Line of Coverage 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                   
                 Coverage 
               
               
                 Line of 
                 Drop Down 
                 Line of 
                 Lists various line of coverage offered. 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                 List 
                 Coverage 
                 Example Medical, Dental, Vision, CAM etc. 
               
               
                 Plan Type 
                 Text 
                 Plan Type 
                 Text for plan type 
               
               
                 Plan Type 
                 Drop Down 
                 Plan Type 
                 List the Plan Type available for the line of 
               
               
                   
                 List 
                   
                 coverage selected. Example HMO, PPO, PSO 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 etc. 
               
               
                 Add 
                 Button 
                 Add 
                 To add the Benefit Level Name to the HTML 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Table 
                 HTML 
                 Table 
                 For adding and displaying all the names of the 
               
               
                   
                 table 
                   
                 benefit level offered by the carrier 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Button 
                 Delete 
                 To delete single or multiple rows of the 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 benefit level checked 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Check All 
                 Text Link 
                 Check All 
                 To check all the check boxes in the table 
               
               
                 Clear All 
                 Text Link 
                 Clear All 
                 To un check all the check boxes checked in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the table 
               
               
                 Enrolment 
                 Button 
                 Enrolment 
                 To Navigate to Enrolment Transmission 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Screen 
               
               
                 Premium 
                 Button 
                 Premium 
                 To Navigate to Premium Transmission 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Screen 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Check box 
                 Delete 
                 To check the items for deletion 
               
               
                 Edit 
                 Button 
                 Edit 
                 To edit the benefit level against the row 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 selected for edition 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 SAVE 
                 Button 
                 SAVE 
                 Save all the above information to the 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 repository 
               
               
                   
                 Submit 
               
               
                   
                 button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset the entries made in all the fields 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 reset 
               
               
                   
                 button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0216]    3.1.3.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 1. 
                 Trans Id 
                 This name should be brought from the 
                 Plan Id is required 
               
               
                   
                   
                 previous screen 
                 PlanId accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_001. 
                 alphanumeric values only 
               
               
                 2. 
                 Line of Coverage 
                 Should list various types of Line of 
                 Note: The Screen 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Coverage from the database. 
                 should not be refreshed 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Default Line of Coverage should be 
                 when choosing different 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Choose One 
                 Line of Coverage. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Subsequent line of coverage should 
                 Line of Coverage is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be listed alphabetically. 
                 required 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On choosing the line of coverage 
               
               
                   
                   
                 corresponding Plan Type should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 listed. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On choosing different Line of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Coverage the Plan Type List should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be refreshed and new set of plan type 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should be listed for the new line of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 coverage selected. 
               
               
                 3. 
                 Plan Type 
                 Should list various types of Plan Type 
                 Note: The Screen 
               
               
                   
                   
                 from the database. 
                 should not be refreshed 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Plan Type should be Listed 
                 when choosing different 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alphabetically 
                 Plan Type. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On choosing the Plan Type 
                 Plan Type is required 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Corresponding Benefit Level Should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be listed. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On choosing different Plan Type the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Benefit Level List should be refreshed 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and new set of Benefit Level should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be listed of the new Plan Type 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected. 
               
               
                 4. 
                 Carrier Name 
                 Should be entered 
                 Carrier Name is required 
               
               
                 5. 
                 Plan Name 
                 Should be entered 
                 Plan Name is required 
               
               
                 6. 
                 Add 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 Error Dialog Box Text: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the “ADD” 
                 “The name entered for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button or Mouse Click. 
                 alternate Benefit Level 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if alternate Benefit Level name 
                 Name is incorrect. Please 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is valid. 
                 enter the correct name.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If not throw error message. 
                 “The is no name entered 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if there is no duplicate entry 
                 for Benefit Level Name. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 for the Combination of Line of 
                 Please enter the name.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Coverage, Plan Type and Benefit 
                 Error Dialog Box Text: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 level selected. 
                 “The Benefit Level Name 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If Duplicate Show Error Message 
                 for the combination of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if there is blank field if so 
                 Line of Coverage, Plan 
               
               
                   
                   
                 throw error message 
                 type and Benefit Level is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: The items selected with the 
                 already entered. Please 
               
               
                   
                   
                 benefit level name are added to the 
                 select other 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HTML table below (temporary) 
                 combination.” 
               
               
                 7. 
                 Table 
                 Should have column header and each 
               
               
                   
                   
                 subsequent row should be identified 
               
               
                   
                   
                 by alternate color combinations. i.e. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 First row should have color ‘x’ and the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 next row should have color ‘y’. The 
               
               
                   
                   
                 next row should have color ‘x’ again 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and so on. The size of any text inside 
               
               
                   
                   
                 any cell should be wrapped if the text 
               
               
                   
                   
                 becomes too long. 
               
               
                 8. 
                 Delete 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 Error Message: “Please 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the “Delete” 
                 choose the row or rows to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button or on Mouse Click. 
                 be deleted.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Delete Button should work on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 multiple deletes based on the check 
               
               
                   
                   
                 box or boxes selected. If the user 
               
               
                   
                   
                 clicks on the delete button without 
               
               
                   
                   
                 checking any of the delete check box 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should throw error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: Deletes the row or rows 
               
               
                   
                   
                 from the HTML table (temporary 
               
               
                   
                   
                 storage) 
               
               
                 9. 
                 Check All 
                 On clicking the “Check All” Link all 
                 On clicking the “Check 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the rows with the check box option 
                 All” Link all the rows 
               
               
                   
                   
                 are checked. 
                 with the check box option 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 are checked. 
               
               
                 10. 
                 Clear All 
                 On clicking the “Clear All” Link all 
                 On clicking the “Clear 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the rows with the check box option 
                 All” Link all the rows 
               
               
                   
                   
                 checked are unchecked. 
                 with the check box option 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 checked are unchecked. 
               
               
                 11. 
                 Delete 
                 Check box option with default 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “unchecked” 
               
               
                 12. 
                 Edit 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 Note: All edits that are 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the “Edit” 
                 done on the data from the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button or on Mouse Click. 
                 repository or database, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On clicking the edit button the row 
                 history of the changes 
               
               
                   
                   
                 edited should be removed from the 
                 made must be available. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table and the data should be populated 
               
               
                   
                   
                 back on the editable entry field. 
               
               
                 13. 
                 SAVE 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 Common Text shall be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the “SAVE” 
                 followed for the System 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button or on Mouse Click. 
                 Error. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Validation Check: 
                 Dialog box: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if there is any data entered in 
                 “Would you like to Add 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the alternate Benefit Level Name 
                 the Alternate Benefit 
               
               
                   
                   
                 field. 
                 Level name before 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If yes show a dialog box with 
                 saving” Yes/No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 message “Would you like to Add the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Alternate Benefit Level name before 
               
               
                   
                   
                 saving” Yes/No 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If yes allow the user to add the data. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If no save the data without adding the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Alternate Benefit Level Name to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HTML Table. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On saving the data the data gets saved 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to the database. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On Successful saving the flow should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be automatically be navigated back to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the previous screen. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_001) 
               
               
                 14. 
                 Cancel 
                 Cancel Button should clear all the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 content filled on the entry fields 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0219]    3.1.4. User Interface ID: Search Carrier Master 
         [0220]    3.1.4.1. Screen Name: Search Carrier Master
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 001 — 003)   (See FIG. H- 4 )       
 
         [0223]    3.1.4.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0224]    3.1.4.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1. 
                 Carrier name 
                 Default option on the list is 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Choose One 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Lists all the active carrier in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alphabetical order 
               
               
                 2. 
                 View 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 Error Dialog Box Text: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the “View” 
                 “Please choose a carrier 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button or on Mouse Click. 
                 to view information” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On clicking the View Button if no 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Carrier name is selected then throw an 
               
               
                   
                   
                 error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Else Success should navigate to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 view page 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_006 with 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the data pertaining to the carrier 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected. 
               
               
                 3. 
                 Edit 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 Error Dialog Box Text: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the “Edit” 
                 “Please choose a carrier 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button or on Mouse Click. 
                 to Edit information” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On clicking the Edit Button if no 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Carrier name is choose then throw an 
               
               
                   
                   
                 error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Else Success should navigate to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Edit pages 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_004 with 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the data pertaining to the carrier 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0227]    3.1.5. User Interface ID: Modify Carrier Master 
         [0228]    3.1.5.1. Screen Name: Modify Carrier Master
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 001 — 004)   (See FIG. H- 5 )       
 
         [0231]    3.1.5.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give the heading for the screen being 
               
               
                 Edit Carrier 
                   
                 Edit Carrier 
                 navigated 
               
               
                 Master 
                   
                 Master 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Sub Header 
                 Provide Content Area Text 
               
               
                 Carrier General 
                   
                 Carrier General 
               
               
                 Information 
                   
                 Information 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Sub Header 
                 Text for the Company Address 
               
               
                 Address 
                   
                 Address 
               
               
                 Company 
                 Text 
                 Company 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                 Name 
               
               
                 Company 
                 Entry Field 
                 Company 
                 Entry Field for Company name with data 
               
               
                 Name (Entry 
                   
                 Name (Entry 
                 filled and editable 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
               
               
                 Address 
                 Text 
                 Address 
                 Text for the Address 
               
               
                 Address (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 Address (Entry 
                 Entry Field for Address with data filled and 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
                 editable 
               
               
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Text 
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Text for Suite # 
               
               
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Entry Field 
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Entry Field for Suite/Apt # with data filled 
               
               
                 (Entry Field) 
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
                 and editable 
               
               
                 City 
                 Text 
                 City 
                 Text for City 
               
               
                 City (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 City (Entry 
                 Entry Field for City with data filled and 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
                 editable 
               
               
                 State 
                 Text 
                 State 
                 Text for state 
               
               
                 State (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 State (Entry 
                 Entry Field for State with data filled and 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
                 editable 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Text 
                 ZIP 
                 Text for ZIP 
               
               
                 ZIP (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 ZIP (Entry 
                 Entry Field for ZIP with data filled and 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
                 editable 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Sub Header 
                 Text for the sub heading 
               
               
                 Contact 
                   
                 Contact 
               
               
                 Department 
                   
                 Department 
               
               
                 Department 
                 Drop Down 
                 Department 
                 List all the departments for the carrier for 
               
               
                   
                 List 
                   
                 contact information 
               
               
                 Contact Name 
                 Text 
                 Contact Name 
                 Text for Contact name 
               
               
                 Salutation 
                 Text 
                 Salutation 
                 Text for salutation 
               
               
                 First Name 
                 Text 
                 First Name 
                 Text for First name 
               
               
                 Middle name 
                 Text 
                 Middle name 
                 Text for middle name 
               
               
                 Last name 
                 Text 
                 Last name 
                 Text for last name 
               
               
                 Suffix 
                 Text 
                 Suffix 
                 Text for suffix 
               
               
                 Title 
                 Text 
                 Title 
                 Text for title 
               
               
                 Salutation 
                 Entry Field 
                 Salutation 
                 Entry Field for salutation 
               
               
                 First Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 First Name 
                 Entry field for first name 
               
               
                 Middle name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Middle name 
                 Entry field for middle name 
               
               
                 Last name 
                 Entry field 
                 Last name 
                 Entry field for last name 
               
               
                 Suffix 
                 Entry Field 
                 Suffix 
                 Entry Field for suffix 
               
               
                 Title 
                 Entry Field 
                 Title 
                 Entry Field for title 
               
               
                 Address 
                 Text 
                 Address 
                 Text for the Address 
               
               
                 Address (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 Address (Entry 
                 Entry Field for Address 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
               
               
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Text 
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Text for Suite # 
               
               
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Entry Field 
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Entry Field for Suite/Apt # 
               
               
                 (Entry Field) 
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
               
               
                 City 
                 Text 
                 City 
                 Text for City 
               
               
                 City (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 City (Entry 
                 Entry Field for City 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
               
               
                 State 
                 Text 
                 State 
                 Text for state 
               
               
                 State (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 State (Entry 
                 Entry Field for State 
               
               
                 Field) 
                   
                 Field) 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Text 
                 ZIP 
                 Text for ZIP 
               
               
                 ZIP (Entry 
                 Entry Field 
                 ZIP 
                 Entry Field for ZIP 
               
               
                 Field) 
               
               
                 Mode of 
                 Drop Down 
                 Mode of 
                 List various modes of contact preferred 
               
               
                 Communication 
                 List 
                 Communication 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Text 
                 Phone 
                 Text for phone 
               
               
                 FAX 
                 Text 
                 FAX 
                 Text for FAX 
               
               
                 Email 
                 Text 
                 Email 
                 Text for email 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Entry Field 
                 Phone 
                 Entry Field for Phone number 
               
               
                 Email 
                 Entry Field 
                 Email 
                 Entry field for email address 
               
               
                 FAX 
                 Entry Field 
                 FAX 
                 Entry field for FAX 
               
               
                 ADD 
                 Button 
                 ADD 
                 To add the above details on the HTML table 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 below 
               
               
                   
                 Submit 
               
               
                   
                 button) 
               
               
                 Table 
                 HTML 
                 Table 
                 Table for adding up the contact information. 
               
               
                   
                 Table 
                   
                 The table also contains all the contact 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 information already available in a multiple 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 rows. 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Button 
                 Delete 
                 To delete the contact information 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Check All 
                 Text Link 
                 Check All 
                 To check all the check boxes in the table 
               
               
                 Clear All 
                 Text Link 
                 Clear All 
                 To un check all the check boxes checked in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the table 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Check box 
                 Delete 
                 To check the items for deletion 
               
               
                 Edit 
                 Button 
                 Edit 
                 To edit the contact information against the 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 row selected for edition 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Department 
                 Text 
                 Department 
                 Shows the name of the department added. For 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                 Name 
                 example finance, marketing etc. 
               
               
                 Last Name 
                 Text 
                 Last Name 
                 Last Name of the contact person 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Text 
                 Phone 
                 Phone of the contact person 
               
               
                 Email 
                 Text 
                 Email 
                 Email address of the contact person 
               
               
                 FAX 
                 Text 
                 FAX 
                 Fax of the contact person 
               
               
                 SAVE 
                 Button 
                 SAVE 
                 Save all the above information to the 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 repository 
               
               
                   
                 Submit 
               
               
                   
                 button) 
               
               
                 CANCEL 
                 Button 
                 CANCEL 
                 Cancels the current operations and sets to the 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 value as before saving 
               
               
                   
                 Reset 
               
               
                   
                 button) 
               
               
                 EDIT 
                 Button 
                 EDIT 
                 Navigates to the next screen without saving 
               
               
                 CARRIER 
                 (HTML 
                 CARRIER 
                 the data. The purpose is if the editing needs to 
               
               
                 OFFERED 
                 Submit 
                 OFFERED 
                 be done for the next screen 
               
               
                 PLAN 
                 button) 
                 PLAN 
                 (BPI_SCREEN_005) 
               
               
                 New 
                 Button 
                 New 
                 To create a new page as first time. 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0232]    3.1.6. User Interface ID: Modify Carrier Product 
         [0233]    3.1.6.1. Screen Name: Modify Carrier Product
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 001 — 005)   (See FIG. H- 6 )       
 
         [0236]    3.1.6.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0237]    3.1.6.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 1. 
                 Carrier name 
                 This name should be brought from the 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 previous screen 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_004. 
               
               
                 2. 
                 Line of Coverage 
                 Should list various types of Line of 
                 Note: The Screen should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Coverage from the database. 
                 not be refreshed when 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Default Line of Coverage should be 
                 choosing different line of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Choose One 
                 coverage. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Subsequent line of coverage should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 listed alphabetically. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On choosing the line of coverage 
               
               
                   
                   
                 corresponding Plan Type should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 listed. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On choosing different Line of Coverage 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Plan Type List should be refreshed and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 new set of plan type should be listed for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the new line of coverage selected. 
               
               
                 3. 
                 Plan Type 
                 Should list various types of Plan Type 
                 Note: The Screen should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 from the database. 
                 not be refreshed when 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Plan Type should be Listed 
                 choosing different Plan 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alphabetically 
                 Type. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On choosing the Plan Type 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Corresponding Benefit Level Should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 listed. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On choosing different Plan Type the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Benefit Level List should be refreshed 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and new set of Benefit Level should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 listed of the new Plan Type selected. 
               
               
                 4. 
                 Benefit Level 
                 Should list various types of Benefit Level 
               
               
                   
                   
                 from the database. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Benefit Level should be listed 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alphabetically. 
               
               
                 5. 
                 Benefit Level Name 
                 The field is used for filling Benefit Level 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Name 
               
               
                 6. 
                 Alternate name 
                 The field is used for entering Alternate 
                 Error Dialog Box Text: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Benefit Level Name 
                 “The value entered for 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Alternate Benefit Level 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Name is incorrect. Please 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 enter the correct value.” 
               
               
                 7. 
                 Add 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 Error Dialog Box Text: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “ADD” button or 
                 “The value entered for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 Benefit Level Name is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if Alternate Benefit Level name is 
                 incorrect. Please enter the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 valid. 
                 correct value.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If not throw error message. 
                 Embedded Error 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if there is no duplicate entry for 
                 Message: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the Combination of Line of Coverage, 
                 Show this message on space 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Plan Type and Benefit Level selected. If 
                 above the HTML table with 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Duplicate Show Error Message 
                 RED color. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: The items selected with the 
                 “The Benefit Level Name 
               
               
                   
                   
                 benefit level name are added to the 
                 for the combination of Line 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HTML table below (temporary) 
                 of Coverage, Plan type and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Benefit Level is already 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 available. Please select 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 other benefit level.” 
               
               
                 8. 
                 Table 
                 Should have column header and each 
               
               
                   
                   
                 subsequent row should be identified by 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alternate color combinations. i.e. First 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘x’ and the next 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘y’. The next row 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The 
               
               
                   
                   
                 size of any text inside any cell should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 wrapped if the text becomes too long. 
               
               
                 9. 
                 Delete 
                 Check box option with default 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “unchecked” 
               
               
                 10. 
                 Delete 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 Error Message: “Please 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Delete” button or on 
                 choose the row or rows to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 be deleted.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Delete Button should work on multiple 
               
               
                   
                   
                 deletes based on the check box or boxes 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected. If the user clicks on the delete 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button without checking any of the delete 
               
               
                   
                   
                 check box should throw error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Note: the delete action should only delete 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the single or multiple rows selected from 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the view inside the table. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 However the data must not be deleted 
               
               
                   
                   
                 from the database on saving. It should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 only inactivate the benefit level 
               
               
                   
                   
                 name/names selected for deletion. 
               
               
                 11. 
                 Edit 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 Repository Data should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Edit” button or on 
                 green in color and the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 Temporary data should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On clicking the edit button the row edited 
                 red in color. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should be removed from the table and the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 data should be populated back on the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 editable entry field. 
               
               
                 12. 
                 SAVE 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 System Error: Common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “SAVE” button or on 
                 Text shall be followed for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 the System Error. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Validation Check: 
                 Dialog box: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if there is any data entered in the 
                 “Would you like to Add the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Alternate Name field. 
                 Alternate Benefit Level 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If yes show a dialog box with message 
                 name before saving” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “Would you like to Add Alternate 
                 Yes/No. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Benefit Level name before saving” 
                 Note: For all the changes 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Yes/No. 
                 made history of changes 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If yes allow the user to add the data. 
                 should be available for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If no save the data without adding the 
                 viewing via reports for the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Benefit Level Name to the HTML Table. 
                 specific modules. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On saving the data the data gets saved to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the database. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On Successful saving the flow should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 automatically be navigated back to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Search Screen. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_003) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Note: Data must not be deleted from the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 database on saving. It should only 
               
               
                   
                   
                 inactivate the benefit level name/names 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected for deletion. 
               
               
                 13. 
                 Cancel 
                 To cancel the previous operation. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0240]    3.1.7. User Interface ID: View Carrier Master 
         [0241]    3.1.7.1. Screen Name: View Carrier Master
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 001 — 006)   (See FIG. H- 7 )       
 
         [0244]    3.1.7.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give the heading for the screen being 
               
               
                 View Carrier 
                   
                 View Carrier 
                 navigated 
               
               
                 Master 
                   
                 Master 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Sub Header 
                 Name for the sub header 
               
               
                 carrier general 
                   
                 carrier general 
               
               
                 Information 
                   
                 Information 
               
               
                 Carrier name 
                 Dynamic 
                 Carrier name 
                 Name of the carrier being viewed 
               
               
                   
                 Text 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Sub Header 
                 Name of the sub header 
               
               
                 Address 
                   
                 Address 
               
               
                 Company 
                 Text 
                 Company 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                 Name 
               
               
                 Company 
                 Text 
                 Company 
                 Text for Company name with data filled 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                 Name 
               
               
                 Address 
                 Text 
                 Address 
                 Text for the Address 
               
               
                 Address 
                 Entry Field 
                 Address 
                 Text for Address with data filled 
               
               
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Text 
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Text for Suite # 
               
               
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Text 
                 Suite/Apt # 
                 Test for Suite/Apt # with data filled 
               
               
                 City 
                 Text 
                 City 
                 Text for City 
               
               
                 City 
                 Text 
                 City 
                 Text for City with data filled 
               
               
                 State 
                 Text 
                 State 
                 Text for state 
               
               
                 State 
                 Text 
                 State 
                 Text for State with data filled 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Text 
                 ZIP 
                 Text for ZIP 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Text 
                 ZIP 
                 Text for ZIP with data filled 
               
               
                 Table 
                 HTML 
                 Table 
                 Table for populating the contact details 
               
               
                   
                 Table 
               
               
                 Department 
                 Text 
                 Department 
                 Shows the name of the department added. For 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                 Name 
                 example finance, marketing etc. 
               
               
                 Name 
                 Text 
                 Name 
                 Name of the contact person 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Text 
                 Phone 
                 Phone of the contact person 
               
               
                 Email 
                 Text 
                 Email 
                 Email address of the contact person 
               
               
                 FAX 
                 Text 
                 FAX 
                 Fax of the contact person 
               
               
                 Back 
                 HTML 
                 Back 
                 Submit Button to navigate to the start screen 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 HTML 
                 Delete 
                 Button to delete the particular record currently 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 viewed. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0245]    3.1.7.3. Front End Validations
       [xxx] None.       
 
         [0247]    3.1.8. User Interface ID: Search Product 
         [0248]    3.1.8.1. Screen Name: Search Product
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 001 — 007)   (See FIG. H- 8 )       
 
         [0251]    3.1.8.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Search Product 
                 Text 
                 Search 
                 To give the heading for the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Product 
                 screen being navigated 
               
               
                 Plan name 
                 Text 
                 Plan name 
                 Title for carrier name 
               
               
                 Plan name 
                 Drop Down 
                 Plan name 
                 List all the active carrier 
               
               
                   
                 List 
                   
                 names available in the system 
               
               
                 View 
                 HTML 
                 View 
                 Button to view the carrier 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 name selected 
               
               
                 Edit 
                 HTML 
                 Edit 
                 Button to edit the carrier 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 name selected 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0252]    3.1.8.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1. 
                 Carrier name 
                 Default option on the list is 
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Choose One 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Lists all the active carrier in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alphabetical order 
               
               
                 2. 
                 View 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 Error Dialog Box Text: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the “View” 
                 “Please choose a carrier 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button or on Mouse Click. 
                 to view information” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On clicking the View Button if no 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Carrier name is selected then throw an 
               
               
                   
                   
                 error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Else Success should navigate to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 view page 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_006 with 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the data pertaining to the carrier 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected. 
               
               
                 3. 
                 Edit 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 Error Dialog Box Text: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the “Edit” 
                 “Please choose a carrier 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button or on Mouse Click. 
                 to Edit information” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On clicking the Edit Button if no 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Carrier name is choose then throw an 
               
               
                   
                   
                 error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Else Success should navigate to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Edit pages 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_CM_001_004 with 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the data pertaining to the carrier 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0255]    3.1.9. User Interface 10: View Product Info 
         [0256]    3.1.9.1. Screen Name: View Product Info
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 001 — 008)   (See FIG. H- 9 )       
 
         [0259]    3.1.9.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give the heading for the screen being 
               
               
                 Carrier 
                   
                 Carrier 
                 navigated 
               
               
                 Product Info 
                   
                 Product Info 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Sub Header 
                 Name for the sub header 
               
               
                 Plan Info 
                   
                 Plan Info 
               
               
                 Plan Id 
                 Text 
                 Plan Id 
                 Provide Text 
               
               
                 Plan Id 
                 Dynamic 
                 Plan Id 
                 Name of the Plan Id being viewed 
               
               
                   
                 Text 
               
               
                 Plan Name 
                 Text 
                 Plan Name 
                 Provide Text 
               
               
                 Plan Name 
                 Dynamic 
                 Plan Name 
                 Name of the Plan Name being viewed 
               
               
                   
                 Text 
               
               
                 Carrier Name 
                 Text 
                 Carrier Name 
                 Provide Text 
               
               
                 Carrier Name 
                 Dynamic 
                 Carrier Name 
                 Name of the Carrier Name being viewed 
               
               
                   
                 Text 
               
               
                 Line of 
                 Text 
                 Line of 
                 Provide Text 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                   
                 Coverage 
               
               
                 Line of 
                 Text 
                 Line of 
                 Name of the Line Of Coverage Name being 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                   
                 Coverage 
                 viewed 
               
               
                 Plan Type 
                 Text 
                 Plan Type 
                 Provide Text 
               
               
                 Plan Type 
                 Dynamic 
                 Plan Type 
                 Name of the Plan Type being viewed 
               
               
                   
                 Text 
               
               
                 Carrier name 
                 Dynamic 
                 Carrier name 
                 Name of the carrier being viewed 
               
               
                   
                 Text 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Sub Header 
                 Name of the sub header 
               
               
                 Address 
                   
                 Address 
               
               
                 Table 
                 HTML 
                 Table 
                 Table for populating the plan offered 
               
               
                   
                 Table 
               
               
                 Benefit level 
                 Text 
                 Benefit level 
                 For showing the benefit level name 
               
               
                 name 
                   
                 name 
               
               
                 Product Name 
                 Text 
                 Product Name 
                 For showing the Product name 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 HTML 
                 Delete 
                 Button to delete the particular record currently 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 viewed. 
               
               
                 Back 
                 HTML 
                 Back 
                 To Navigate to Search Screen 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0260]    3.1.9.3. Front End Validations
       None.       
 
         [0262]    3.1.10. Screen Flow
       (See FIG. H- 10 )       
 
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Process Specification 
     BPI_CAS_FSD_CM — 02 
     1. Introduction 
       [0264]    1.1. Purpose 
         [0265]    This purpose of this document is to identify the process associated with the business use case Create Plan. This document is the amendment of 
         [0266]    BPI_CAS_FSD_CM — 02 (Version 1.0). 
         [0267]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_CM_002 
                 Create M Plan 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0268]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [0269]    2.1. Background 
         [0270]    This process identifies the functionality for creation of Line of Coverage, Plan Type and Benefit Level. 
         [0271]    This process is used to create various Line of Coverage, Plan type and benefit level offered by PacAdvantage. Line of coverage includes the coverage offered by PacAdvantage e.g. Medical, Dental, Vision, Chiropractic, Voluntary Medical etc. These classify broad range of all the line of coverage offered. 
         [0272]    Plan type includes plan type for specific line of coverage e.g. PPO, HMO, PSO etc. Benefit Level specifies the specific benefit level offered for the line of coverage and plan type e.g. Standard, Preferred, preferred plus etc. 
         [0273]    2.2. Process Description &amp; Flow 
         [0274]    2.2.1. Create Line of Coverage
       1. Input Line of Coverage name   2. Validate Line of Coverage name   3. If yes add the information to a temporary storage.   4. If not re enter the information correctly and add again.   5. Edit or delete Line of Coverage name   6. If erroneous re enter the correct data.   7. If Correct then save the data to the repository   8. System auto generates a unique identification number for Line of Coverage   Refer Process Flow Diagram       
 
         [0284]    2.2.2. Create Plan Type
       1. Input Plan Type name   2. Validate Plan Type name   3. If yes add the information to a temporary storage.   4. If not re enter the information correctly and add again.   5. Edit or delete Plan Type name   6. If erroneous re enter the correct data.   7. If Correct then save the data to the repository   8. System auto generates a unique identification number for Plan Type   Refer Process Flow Diagram       
 
         [0294]    2.2.3. Create Benefit Level
       1. Input Benefit Level name   2. Validate Benefit Level name   3. If yes add the information to a temporary storage.   4. If not re enter the information correctly and add again.   5. Edit or delete Benefit Level name   6. If erroneous re enter the correct data.   7. If Correct then save the data to the repository   8. System auto generates a unique identification number for Benefit Level   Refer Process Flow Diagram       
 
         [0304]    2.2.4. Process Flow Diagrams 
       (See FIG. H- 11 ) 
     3. User Interface 
       [0305]    3.1. User Interface Screens 
         [0306]    3.1.1. Screen ID&#39;s 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Screen ID 
                   
                   
               
               
                 (SID) 
                 Screen Name 
                 Corresponding HTML File Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 plan.loc 
                 Line of Coverage 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/mplan/LineOfCoverage.jsp 
               
               
                 plan.plan 
                 Plan Type 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/mplan/PlanType.jsp 
               
               
                 plan.ben 
                 Benefit Level 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/mplan/BenefitLevel.jsp 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0307]    3.1.2. User Interface ID: Create Line of Coverage 
         [0308]    3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Create Line of Coverage 
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 002 — 001) 
     (See FIG. H- 12 ) 
       [0309]    3.1.2.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give the heading for the 
               
               
                 Line of 
                   
                 Line of 
                 screen being navigated 
               
               
                 coverage 
                   
                 coverage 
               
               
                 Line of 
                 Text 
                 Line of 
                 Provide text 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                   
                 Coverage 
               
               
                 Loc Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Loc Name 
                 Entering line of coverage 
               
               
                 Add 
                 HTML 
                 Add 
                 Button for adding the Line of 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 coverage to the table below 
               
               
                 Table 
                 HTML table 
                 Table 
                 For adding and displaying all 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the names of the Line of 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Coverage 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Button 
                 Delete 
                 To delete the line of Coverage 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 checked 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Check All 
                 Text Link 
                 Check All 
                 To check all the check boxes 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 in the table 
               
               
                 Clear All 
                 Text Link 
                 Clear All 
                 To un check all the check 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 boxes checked in the table 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Check box 
                 Delete 
                 To check the items for 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 deletion 
               
               
                 Edit 
                 Button 
                 Edit 
                 To edit the Line of coverage 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 against the row selected 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                   
                 for edition 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button 
                 Save 
                 Save all the above information 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 to the repository 
               
               
                   
                 Submit 
               
               
                   
                 button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button 
                 Cancel 
                 To resent the entries made 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 in all the fields 
               
               
                   
                 reset button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0310]    3.1.2.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 1. 
                 Line of coverage 
                 This field is used for entering the line of 
                 “Line of Coverage - Is 
               
               
                   
                 Entry 
                 coverage. The Line of coverage should 
                 required.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be alphanumeric only. The special 
                 “Line of Coverage - 
               
               
                   
                   
                 character permitted is only space bar 
                 Accepts alphanumeric 
               
               
                   
                   
                 between the two words. And can have 
                 values only” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 max length 20. Blank line of coverage not 
               
               
                   
                   
                 allowed 
               
               
                 2. 
                 Add 
                 On Clicking add button or pressing enter 
                 On click of Add button 
               
               
                   
                   
                 key field with the cursor position on the 
                 checks for the above 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Add button, The data gets added to the 
                 mentioned validations + 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table. Validation checks are done to not 
                 “Line of Coverage - 
               
               
                   
                   
                 allow null value on the entry field and the 
                 Already exists.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 entry field should have only 
                 (Occurs on duplicate record 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alphanumeric values. Duplicate name for 
                 entry) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the line of coverage should not be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 allowed. 
               
               
                 3. 
                 Table 
                 Should have column header and each 
               
               
                   
                   
                 subsequent row should be identified by 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alternate color combinations. i.e. First 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘x’ and the next 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘y’. The next row 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The 
               
               
                   
                   
                 size of any text inside any cell should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 wrapped if the text becomes too long. 
               
               
                 4. 
                 Delete 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 “! Select record(s) for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Delete” button or on 
                 deletion” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 (If the operation is in Edit 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Delete Button should work on multiple 
                 Mode &amp; delete operation is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 deletes based on the check box or boxes 
                 invoked) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected. If the user clicks on the delete 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button without checking any of the delete 
               
               
                   
                   
                 check box should throw error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: Deletes the row or rows from 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the table (temporary storage) 
               
               
                 5. 
                 Check All 
                 On clicking the “Check All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 check all the check boxes in the HTML 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 6. 
                 Clear All 
                 On clicking the “Clear All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 uncheck all the checked check boxes in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the HTML table. 
               
               
                 7. 
                 Delete 
                 Check box option with default 
                 Delete Check box is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “unchecked” 
                 disabled and grayed out if 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the data in the corresponding 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 row/rows has child parent 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 relationship (I.e. it has 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 reference somewhere else in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the database.) 
               
               
                 8. 
                 Edit 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 “! Complete the update 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Edit” button or on 
                 process” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 (If the operation is already in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On clicking the edit button the row edited 
                 Edit Mode &amp; another Edit 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should be disabled and the data should be 
                 operation is invoked) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 populated back on the editable entry 
               
               
                   
                   
                 field. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Note: All data that are from the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 repository should be in green color. The 
               
               
                   
                   
                 data that is added and not saved should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 in red. The data selected for editing 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should be displayed in gray. The “Add” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button will be changed to “Update” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button. 
               
               
                 9. 
                 Save 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 For general script 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “SAVE” button or on 
                 validations for common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 functionality refer 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On saving the data the data gets saved to 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the database. 
                 System Error: Common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if there is data populated for 
                 Text shall be followed for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 editing. If yes show a dialog box with 
                 the System Error. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 message “Complete update Process.” 
                 “! Do any operation to save.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (Displayed when invoked 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 immediately after the screen 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 is loaded). 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “! Complete the update 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 process” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (Displayed when Save is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 invoked in edit Mode). 
               
               
                 10. 
                 Cancel 
                 Should reset all the entries to previous 
               
               
                   
                   
                 status before saving. i.e. the fields should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be blank. If any of the data has been 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected for editing, the same data should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 appear when cancel button is clicked. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0313]    3.1.3. User Interface ID: Create Plan Type 
         [0314]    3.1.3.1. Screen Name: Create Plan Type 
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 002 — 002) (See FIG. H- 13 ) 
       [0315]    3.1.3.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give the heading for the 
               
               
                 Plan Type 
                   
                 Plan Type 
                 screen being navigated 
               
               
                 Plan Type 
                 Text 
                 Plan Type 
                 Provide text 
               
               
                 Plan type 
                 Entry Field 
                 Plan type 
                 Entering Plan type 
               
               
                 Entry 
                   
                 Entry 
               
               
                 Add 
                 HTML 
                 Add 
                 Button for adding the Plan 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 Type to the table below 
               
               
                 Table 
                 HTML table 
                 Table 
                 For adding and displaying all 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the names of the Plan Type 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Button 
                 Delete 
                 To delete the Plan Type 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 checked 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Check All 
                 Text Link 
                 Check All 
                 To check all the check boxes 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 in the table 
               
               
                 Clear All 
                 Text Link 
                 Clear All 
                 To un check all the check 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 boxes checked in the table 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Check box 
                 Delete 
                 To check the items for 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 deletion 
               
               
                 Edit 
                 Button 
                 Edit 
                 To edit the Plan Type against 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 the row selected for edition 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 SAVE 
                 Button 
                 SAVE 
                 Save all the above information 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 to the repository 
               
               
                   
                 Submit 
               
               
                   
                 button) 
               
               
                 CANCEL 
                 Button 
                 CANCEL 
                 To reset the entries made 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 in all the fields 
               
               
                   
                 reset button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0316]    3.1.3.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 1. 
                 Plan type Entry 
                 This field is used for entering the Plan 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Type. The Plan Type should be 
                 “Plan Name - Is required.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alphanumeric only. The special character 
                 “Plan Name - Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                 permitted is only space bar between the 
                 alphanumeric values only” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 two words. And can have max length 
               
               
                   
                   
                 255. Blank line of coverage not allowed 
               
               
                 2. 
                 Add 
                 On Clicking add button or pressing enter 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 key field with the cursor position on the 
                 On click of Add button 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button, The data gets added to the table. 
                 checks for the above 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Validation checks are done to not allow 
                 mentioned validations + 
               
               
                   
                   
                 null value on the entry field and the entry 
                 “Plan Name - already 
               
               
                   
                   
                 field should have only alphanumeric 
                 exists.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 values. 
                 (Occurs on duplicate record 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 entry) 
               
               
                 3. 
                 Table 
                 Should have column header and each 
               
               
                   
                   
                 subsequent row should be identified by 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alternate color combinations. i.e. First 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘x’ and the next 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘y’. The next row 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The 
               
               
                   
                   
                 size of any text inside any cell should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 wrapped if the text becomes too long. 
               
               
                 4. 
                 Delete 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Delete” button or on 
                 “! Select record(s) for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 deletion” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Delete Button should work on multiple 
                 “! Complete the update 
               
               
                   
                   
                 deletes based on the check box or boxes 
                 process” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected. If the user clicks on the delete 
                 (If the operation is in Edit 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button without checking any of the delete 
                 Mode &amp; delete operation is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 check box should throw error message. 
                 invoked) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: Deletes the row or rows from 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the table temporarily 
               
               
                 5. 
                 Check All 
                 On clicking the “Check All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 check all the check boxes in the HTML 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 6. 
                 Clear All 
                 On clicking the “Clear All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 uncheck all the checked check boxes in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the HTML table. 
               
               
                 7. 
                 Delete 
                 Check box option with default 
                 Delete Check box is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “unchecked” 
                 disabled and grayed out if 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the data in the corresponding 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 row/rows has child parent 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 relationship (I.e. it has 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 reference somewhere else in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the database.) 
               
               
                 8. 
                 Edit 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 “! Complete the update 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Edit” button or on 
                 process” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 (If the operation is already in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On clicking the edit button the row edited 
                 Edit Mode &amp; another Edit 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should be disabled and the data should be 
                 operation is invoked) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 populated back on the editable entry 
               
               
                   
                   
                 field. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Note: All the data inside the table that are 
               
               
                   
                   
                 from the repository should be green in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 color. The temporary data should be red 
               
               
                   
                   
                 in color text. The data selected for editing 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should be displayed in gray. The “Add” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button will be changed to “Update” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button. 
               
               
                 9. 
                 Save 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 For general script 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “SAVE” button or on 
                 validations for common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 functionality refer 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On saving the data the data gets saved to 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the database. 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if there is data populated for 
                 System Error: Common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 editing. If yes show a dialog box with 
                 Text shall be followed for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 message “Complete update Process.” 
                 the System Error. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “! Do any operation to save.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (Displayed when invoked 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 immediately after the screen 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 is loaded). 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “! Complete the update 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 process” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (Displayed when Save is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 invoked in Edit Mode). 
               
               
                 10. 
                 Cancel 
                 Should reset to the previous status on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 clicking the cancel button. i.e. make all 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the entry field blank. If any of the data 
               
               
                   
                   
                 has been selected for editing, the same 
               
               
                   
                   
                 data should appear when cancel button is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 clicked. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0319]    3.1.4. User Interface ID: Create Benefit Level 
         [0320]    3.1.4.1. Screen Name: Create Benefit Level 
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 002 — 003) (See FIG. H- 14 ) 
       [0321]    3.1.4.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give the heading for the screen being 
               
               
                 Benefit Level 
                   
                 Benefit Level 
                 navigated 
               
               
                 Benefit Level 
                 Text 
                 Benefit Level 
                 Provide text 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                 Name 
               
               
                 Benefit Level 
                 Entry Field 
                 Benefit Level 
                 Entering the benefit level name 
               
               
                 Name Entry 
                   
                 Name Entry 
               
               
                 Add 
                 HTML 
                 Add 
                 Button for adding the Benefit Level to the table 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 below 
               
               
                 Table 
                 HTML table 
                 Table 
                 For adding and displaying all the names of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Benefit Level 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Button 
                 Delete 
                 To delete the Benefit Level checked 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Check All 
                 Text Link 
                 Check All 
                 To check all the check boxes in the table 
               
               
                 Clear All 
                 Text Link 
                 Clear All 
                 To un check all the check boxes checked in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 table 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Check box 
                 Delete 
                 To check the items for deletion 
               
               
                 Edit 
                 Button 
                 Edit 
                 To edit the Benefit Level against the row 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 selected for edition 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button 
                 Save 
                 Save all the above information to the repository 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Submit 
               
               
                   
                 button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset the entries made in all the fields 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 reset button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0322]    3.1.4.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 1. 
                 Benefit Level 
                 This field is used for entering the Benefit 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Level. The Benefit Level should be 
                 “Benefit Level - Is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alphanumeric only. The special character 
                 required.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 permitted is only space bar between the 
                 “Benefit Level - Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                 two words. And can have max length 
                 alphanumeric values only” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 255. Blank line of coverage not allowed 
               
               
                 2. 
                 Add 
                 On Clicking add button or pressing enter 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 key field with the cursor position on the 
                 On click of Add button 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button, The data gets added to the table. 
                 checks for the above 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Validation checks are done to not allow 
                 mentioned validations + 
               
               
                   
                   
                 null value on the entry field and the entry 
                 “Benefit Level - already 
               
               
                   
                   
                 field should have only alpha values. 
                 exists.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Should check for duplicate entries 
                 (Occurs on duplicate record 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 entry) 
               
               
                 3. 
                 Table 
                 Should have column header and each 
               
               
                   
                   
                 subsequent row should be identified by 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alternate color combinations. i.e. First 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘x’ and the next 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘y’. The next row 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The 
               
               
                   
                   
                 size of any text inside any cell should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 wrapped if the text becomes too long. 
               
               
                 4. 
                 Delete 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Delete” button or on 
                 “! Select the record(s) for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 deletion” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Delete Button should work on multiple 
                 “! Complete the update 
               
               
                   
                   
                 deletes based on the check box or boxes 
                 process” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected. If the user clicks on the delete 
                 (If the operation is in Edit 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button without checking any of the delete 
                 Mode &amp; delete operation is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 check box should throw error message. 
                 invoked) 
               
               
                 5. 
                 Check All 
                 On clicking the “Check All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 check all the check boxes in the HTML 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 6. 
                 Clear All 
                 On clicking the “Clear All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 uncheck all the checked check boxes in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the HTML table. 
               
               
                 7. 
                 Delete 
                 Check box option with default 
                 Delete Check box is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “unchecked” 
                 disabled and grayed out if 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the data in the corresponding 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 row/rows has child parent 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 relationship (I.e. it has 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 reference somewhere else in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the database.) 
               
               
                 8. 
                 Edit 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 “! Complete the update 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Edit” button or on 
                 process” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 (If the operation is already in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On clicking the edit button the row edited 
                 Edit Mode &amp; another Edit 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should be removed from the table and the 
                 operation is invoked) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 data should be populated back on the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 editable entry field. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If the data is from the repository show it 
               
               
                   
                   
                 in green color text. If it is temporary data 
               
               
                   
                   
                 just added show it in red color text. The 
               
               
                   
                   
                 data selected for editing should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 displayed in gray. The “Add” button will 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be changed to “Update” button. 
               
               
                 9. 
                 Save 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 For general script 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “SAVE” button or on 
                 validations for common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. On saving the data the data 
                 functionality refer 
               
               
                   
                   
                 gets saved to the database. 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if there is data populated for 
                 System Error: Common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 editing. If yes show a dialog box with 
                 Text shall be followed for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 message “Complete update Process.” 
                 the System Error. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “! Do any operation to save.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (Displayed when invoked 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 immediately after the screen 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 is loaded). 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “! Complete the update 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 process” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (Displayed when Save is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 invoked in Edit Mode). 
               
               
                 10. 
                 Cancel 
                 Should reset to the previous status on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 clicking the cancel button. If any of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 data has been selected for editing, the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 same data should appear when cancel 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button is clicked. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0325]    3.1.5. Screen Flow
       The flow of the process is as described below. (See FIG. H- 15 )       
 
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Process Specification 
     BPI_CAS_FSD_CM — 03 
     1. Introduction 
       [0327]    1.1. Purpose 
         [0328]    This purpose of this document is to identify the process associated with the business use case Create Rate Master. This document is the amendment of BPI_CAS_FSD_CM — 03 (Version 1.1). 
         [0329]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_CM_003 
                 Create Rate Master 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0330]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [0331]    2.1. Background
       This process describes the Use Case “Rate Master”.   Rate Master is used to upload all the rates for the products (Benefits) provided by individual health insurance provider (Carrier). The individual rate files are provided by PacAdvantage with the rate for all the products offered by all the carriers in a specific file format. This Process for loading the rates would be covered in the Document Reference No: BPI_CAS_FSD_EC   The rates are normally classified as blended rates and raw rates.   Raw rates would include only the premium rates for the products offered.   Blended rate would include the sum total of the entire raw rate, admin fees, agent commission additional fees and Differential Fees. The rate classification would define the formula for calculating the blended rate for the product under offering. Using the administrative screens the classification of rates for arriving to these calculations is provided.   Admin Fees: Further Admin fees can be of two types % of the premium or a fixed flat $ amount.   Agent Commission: Agent commission can be a % of premium or a flat $ amount per member or a flat $ amount per group size.   Additional Fees: Additional Fees can be a % premium or flat $ amount for the carrier.   Differential Fees The amount type for Differential Rate should include Flat $ amount as Flat $ amount per member and also Flat $ amount per Group. When the Flat $ amount is per group it should be able to specify group size.   The state is divided into several service areas based on the number of counties and their population. In the state of California there are presently 6 service areas. The Rate is based on the service area where the employees are residing. Also there are cases when the ZIP code has two or more Service Areas. Under these conditions the ZIP code should be attached to those services areas from where the rates are to be picked.       
 
         [0342]    2.2. Process Description &amp; Flow 
         [0343]    2.2.1. Admin Fee
       The flow of the process is as described below.   1. Input the rate type information.   2. Validate if the rate type information has the right data type.   3. If Correct then save the data to the repository.   4. Search admin fee records.   5. Select a record in modify mode   6. Edit the rate type information.   7. Validate if the rate type information has the right data type.   8. If Correct then save the data to the repository.   9. Search admin fee records.   10. Select a record in view/delete mode   11. View the selected admin fee   12. Delete the selected admin fee from the repository.   Refer Process Flow Diagram  FIG. 1 .       
 
         [0358]    2.2.2. Agent Fee
       The flow of the process is as described below.   1. Input the rate type information.   2. Validate if the rate type information has the right data type.   3. If Correct then save the data to the repository.   4. Search agent fee records.   5. Select a record in modify mode   6. Edit the rate type information.   7. Validate if the rate type information has the right data type.   8. If Correct then save the data to the repository.   9. Search agent fee records.   10. Select a record in view/delete mode   11. View the selected agent fee.   12. Delete the selected agent fee from the repository.       
 
       Refer Process Flow Diagram FIG. 2. 
       [0372]    2.2.3. Additional Fee
       The flow of the process is as described below.   1. Input the rate type information.   2. Validate if the rate type information has the right data type.   3. If Correct then save the data to the repository.   4. Search additional fee records.   5. Select a record in modify mode   6. Edit the rate type information.   7. Validate if the rate type information has the right data type.   8. If Correct then save the data to the repository.   9. Search additional fee records.   10. Select a record in view/delete mode   11. View the selected additional fee.   12. Delete the selected additional fee from the repository.   Refer Process Flow Diagram  FIG. 3 .       
 
         [0387]    2.2.4. Rate Differential
       The flow of the process is as described below.   1. Input the rate type information.   2. Validate if the rate type information has the right data type.   3. If Correct then save the data to the repository.   4. Search rate differential records.   5. Select a record in modify mode   6. Edit the rate type information.   7. Validate if the rate type information has the right data type.   8. If Correct then save the data to the repository.   9. Search rate differential records.   10. Select a record in view/delete mode   11. View the selected rate differential.   12. Delete the selected rate differential from the repository.   Refer Process Flow Diagram  FIG. 4 .       
 
         [0402]    2.2.5. Process Flow Diagrams
       (See FIG. H- 16 )   (See FIG. H- 17 )   (See FIG. H- 18 )   (See FIG. H- 19 )       
 
       3. User Interface 
       [0407]    3.1. User Interface Screens 
         [0408]    3.1.1. Screen ID&#39;s 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Corresponding HTML File 
               
               
                 Screen ID (SID) 
                 Screen Name 
                 Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 rate.admin 
                 Admin Fees 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdminFee.jsp 
               
               
                 rate.admin.search 
                 Search Admin Fees 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdminFeeSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 rate.admin.view 
                 View Admin Fees 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdminFeeView.jsp 
               
               
                 rate.admin.confirm 
                 Confirm Admin Fees 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdminFeeConfirm.jsp 
               
               
                 rate.agent 
                 Agent Commission 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AgentFee.jsp 
               
               
                 rate.agent.search 
                 Search Agent 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AgentFeeSearch.jsp 
               
               
                   
                 Commission 
               
               
                 rate.agent.view 
                 View Agent 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AgentFeeView.jsp 
               
               
                   
                 Commission 
               
               
                 rate.agent.confirm 
                 Confirm Agent 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AgentFeeConfirm.jsp 
               
               
                   
                 Commission 
               
               
                 rate.add 
                 Additional Fees 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdditionalFee.jsp 
               
               
                 rate.add.search 
                 Search Additional Fees 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdditionalFeeSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 rate.add.view 
                 View Additional Fees 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdditionalFeeView.jsp 
               
               
                 rate.add.confirm 
                 Confirm Additional Fees 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/AdditionalFeeConfirm.jsp 
               
               
                 rate.ratediff 
                 Differential Fees 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/DifferentialRate.jsp 
               
               
                 rate.ratediff.search 
                 Search Differential Fees 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/DifferentialRateSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 rate.ratediff.view 
                 View Differential Fees 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/DifferentialRateView.jsp 
               
               
                 rate.ratediff.confirm 
                 Confirm Differential 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/rates/DifferentialRateConfirm.jsp 
               
               
                   
                 Fees 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0409]    3.1.2. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Admin Fees 
         [0410]    3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Admin Fees 
       (BPI-CAS_SCR_CM — 003 — 001) (See FIG. H- 20 ) 
       [0411]    3.1.2.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give heading for the screen being navigated 
               
               
                 rate 
                   
                 rate 
               
               
                 Classification 
                   
                 Classification 
               
               
                 for Admin 
                   
                 for Admin 
               
               
                 Fees 
                   
                 Fees 
               
               
                 Rate Type 
                 Radio 
                 Rate Type 
                 To Select a rate type (Whether Blended or Non 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Blended) 
               
               
                 Rate Type 
                 Radio 
                 Rate Type 
                 To Select a rate type (Whether Enroll or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Renew) 
               
               
                 Group Type 
                 Drop Down 
                 Group Type 
                 List all the Group Type Available in the system 
               
               
                   
                 List 
               
               
                 Association ID 
                 Drop Down 
                 Association 
                 List all the Association Type Available in the 
               
               
                   
                 List 
                 ID 
                 system 
               
               
                 Member Type 
                 Radio 
                 Member Type 
                 To Select a Member type (Whether Individual 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 or Association) 
               
               
                 Percentage 
                 Entry Field 
                 Percentage 
                 Entry field for entering % premium 
               
               
                 Premium 
                   
                 Premium 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Effective Date 
                 To choose the date required, by calendar or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 entering it 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Entry Field 
                 Amount 
                 Entry field for entering Amount in $ 
               
               
                 Medical 
                 Entry Field 
                 Medical 
                 Entry field for entering the Medical Fee in $ 
               
               
                 Dental 
                 Entry Field 
                 Dental 
                 Entry field for entering the Dental Fee in $ 
               
               
                 Vision 
                 Entry Field 
                 Vision 
                 Entry field for entering the Vision Fee in % 
               
               
                 CAM 
                 Entry Field 
                 CAM 
                 Entry field for entering the CAM Fee in % 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button 
                 Save 
                 Save all the above information to the repository 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Submit 
               
               
                   
                 button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset the entries made in all the fields 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 reset 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0412]    3.1.2.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 1. 
                 Rate Type 
                 Rate Type should be selected for Adding 
                 “Rate Type - Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Admin Fees (Either one of Blended Rate 
               
               
                   
                   
                 or Non Blended Rate) and (Either one of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Enroll or Renew). 
               
               
                 2. 
                 Group Type 
                 Should list all the Group Type within the 
                 “Group Type - Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 system 
               
               
                   
                   
                 The first option should be - 
               
               
                   
                   
                 -- Choose One --. Subsequent Group 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Types should be listed in alphabetical 
               
               
                   
                   
                 order 
               
               
                 3. 
                 Association Id 
                 Should list all the Association Id within 
                 “Association Id - Is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the system. The first option should be - 
                 required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 -- Choose One --. Subsequent Group 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Types should be listed in alphabetical 
               
               
                 4. 
                 Member Type 
                 Member Type should be selected for 
                 “Member Type - Is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Adding Admin Fees if Group Type is 
                 required. Select either 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Guaranteed Association. 
                 Individual Member or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Association Group” 
               
               
                 5. 
                 Percentage 
                 Percentage Premium should be entered if 
                 “Percentage Premium - Is 
               
               
                   
                 Premium 
                 the rate type is Blended 
                 Required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Percentage Premium - 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Accepts numeric value only 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (0 to 100)” 
               
               
                 6. 
                 Effective Date 
                 Effective Date should be selected from 
                 “Effective Date - Is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Calendar or entered For valid Date 
                 required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Format Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
                 “Effective Date - Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the format in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 MM/DD/YYYY” 
               
               
                 7. 
                 Amount 
                 Amount should be entered if the rate type 
                 “Amount - Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is Non Blended 
                 “Amount - Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 currency format only 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (###.##)” 
               
               
                 8. 
                 Medical 
                 Medical should be entered if the rate type 
                 “Medical - Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is Non Blended 
                 “Medical - Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 currency format only 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (###.##)” 
               
               
                 9. 
                 Dental 
                 Medical should be entered if the rate type 
                 “Dental - Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is Non Blended 
                 “Dental - Accepts currency 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 format only (###.##)” 
               
               
                 10. 
                 Vision 
                 Medical should be entered if the rate type 
                 “Vision - Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is Non Blended 
                 “Vision - Accepts numeric 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 value only (0 to 100)” 
               
               
                 11. 
                 CAM 
                 Medical should be entered if the rate type 
                 “CAM - Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is Non Blended 
                 “CAM - Accepts numeric 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 value only (0 to 100)” 
               
               
                 12. 
                 Save 
                 Should function with Entry Key Cursor 
                 For general script 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “SAVE” button or on 
                 validations for common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 functionality refer 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On saving the data the data gets saved to 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the database. 
                 System Error: Common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Should there be any validation error on 
                 Text shall be followed for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 any of the fields. Should show the script 
                 the System Error. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 error and place the cursor on the specific 
                 “! Do any operation to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 entry field. 
                 save.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if the entries are not duplicate. 
                 (Displayed when invoked 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On Successful saving the flow should 
                 immediately after the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 reside in the same screen. 
                 screen is loaded). 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Exception: If the data selected for edition 
                 “! Complete the update 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is from the repository retain its previous 
                 process.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 state. I.e. the data should be visible in the 
                 (Displayed when Save is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table after saving. 
                 invoked in Edit Mode). 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Also show different text color for the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 data added (temporary) and the data 
               
               
                   
                   
                 picked from the repository. 
               
               
                 13. 
                 Cancel 
                 Should reset to the previous state on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 clicking the cancel button 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0415]    3.1.3. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Search Admin Fees 
         [0416]    3.1.3.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Search Admin Fees 
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 003 — 002) (See FIG. H- 21 ) 
       [0417]    3.1.3.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give heading for the screen being navigated 
               
               
                 rate 
                   
                 rate 
               
               
                 Classification 
                   
                 Classification 
               
               
                 for Admin 
                   
                 for Admin 
               
               
                 Fees 
                   
                 Fees 
               
               
                 Rate Type 
                 Radio 
                 Rate Type 
                 To Select a rate type (Whether Blended or Non 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Blended) 
               
               
                 Rate Type 
                 Radio 
                 Rate Type 
                 To Select a rate type (Whether Enroll or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Renew) 
               
               
                 Group Type 
                 Drop Down 
                 Group Type 
                 List all the Group Type Available in the system 
               
               
                   
                 List 
               
               
                 Association ID 
                 Drop Down 
                 Association 
                 List all the Association Type Available in the 
               
               
                   
                 List 
                 ID 
                 system 
               
               
                 Percentage 
                 Entry Field 
                 Percentage 
                 Entry field for entering % premium 
               
               
                 Premium 
                   
                 Premium 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Effective Date 
                 To choose the date required, by calendar or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 entering it 
               
               
                 Search 
                 HTML 
                 Search 
                 Button to search the data based on inputs and 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 displays the results in HTML table below 
               
               
                 Table 
                 HTML table 
                 Table 
                 Shows the all the data in the column format 
               
               
                 View/Delete 
                 Button 
                 View/Delete 
                 Button to view the selected record data 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Check Index 
                 Radio 
                 Check Index 
                 To check the items for modify, view and 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 deletion 
               
               
                 Edit 
                 Button 
                 Edit 
                 To edit the data against the row selected for 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 edition 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset the entries made in all the fields 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0418]    3.1.3.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Effective Date 
                 Effective Date should be selected from 
                 “Effective Date - Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Calendar or entered 
                 the format in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 For valid Date Format Refer 
                 MM/DD/YYYY” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
               
               
                 2 
                 Search 
                 Should function with Entry Key Cursor 
                 On click of Search button 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Search” button or 
                 checks for the above 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 mentioned validations 
               
               
                   
                   
                 All the entries are valid. It fetches the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 records from repository based on inputs 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and displays the records in the table 
               
               
                   
                   
                 below. Else throws error dialog box. 
               
               
                 3 
                 Table 
                 Should have column header and each 
               
               
                   
                   
                 subsequent row should be identified by 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alternate color combinations. I.e. first 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘x’ and the next 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘y’. The next row 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The 
               
               
                   
                   
                 size of the text inside any cell should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 wrapped if the text becomes too long. 
               
               
                 4 
                 View/Delete 
                 Should function with Entry Key Cursor 
                 “! Select any one of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “View/Delete” button 
                 record” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 or on Mouse Click. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If the user clicks on the view button 
               
               
                   
                   
                 without checking any of the view radio 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button should throw error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: View the current row from the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 5 
                 Modify 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Modify” button or on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On clicking the modify button the row is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 edited and the data should be populated. 
               
               
                 6 
                 Cancel 
                 Should reset to the previous state on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 clicking the cancel button 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0421]    3.1.4. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—View Admin Fees 
         [0422]    3.1.4.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—View Admin Fees 
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 003 — 003) (See FIG. H- 22 ) 
       [0423]    3.1.4.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give heading for the 
               
               
                 rate 
                   
                 rate 
                 screen being navigated 
               
               
                 Classification 
                   
                 Classification 
               
               
                 for Admin 
                   
                 for Admin 
               
               
                 Fees 
                   
                 Fees 
               
               
                 Rate Type 
                 Text Field 
                 Rate Type 
                 Displays Blended or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Non Blended rates 
               
               
                 Enroll 
                 Text Field 
                 Enroll 
                 Displays Enroll or Renew 
               
               
                 Renew 
                   
                 Renew 
               
               
                 Group Type 
                 Text Field 
                 Group Type 
                 Displays Group Type 
               
               
                 Association ID 
                 Text Field 
                 Association 
                 Displays Association Type 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ID 
               
               
                 Percentage 
                 Text Field 
                 Percentage 
                 Displays % premium 
               
               
                 Premium 
                   
                 Premium 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Text Field 
                 Effective Date 
                 Displays Effective date 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Text Field 
                 Amount 
                 Displays Amount in $ 
               
               
                 Medical 
                 Text Field 
                 Medical 
                 Displays Medical Fee in $ 
               
               
                 Dental 
                 Text Field 
                 Dental 
                 Displays Dental Fee in $ 
               
               
                 Vision 
                 Text Field 
                 Vision 
                 Displays Vision Fee in % 
               
               
                 CAM 
                 Text Field 
                 CAM 
                 Displays CAM Fee in % 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Button 
                 Delete 
                 To delete the data 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 New Admin 
                 Button 
                 New Admin 
                 Go to New Admin fee 
               
               
                 fees 
                 (HTML 
                 fees 
                 screen 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0424]    3.1.4.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Delete 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 “Do you want 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the 
                 to delete the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “Delete” button or on 
                 selected record?” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If the user clicks on the delete 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button throw message box. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: Deletes the row from 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the data base 
               
               
                 2 
                 New Admin 
                 Should go to the admin fees 
               
               
                   
                 Fees 
                 screen clicking the New 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Admin Fees button 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0427]    3.1.5. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Agent Commission 
         [0428]    3.1.5.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Agent Commission 
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 003 — 004) (See FIG. H- 23 ) 
       [0429]    3.1.5.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give heading for the screen being navigated 
               
               
                 rate 
                   
                 rate 
               
               
                 Classification 
                   
                 Classification 
               
               
                 for Agent Fees 
                   
                 for Agent Fees 
               
               
                 Rate Type 
                 Radio 
                 Rate Type 
                 To Select a rate type (Whether Blended or Non 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Blended) 
               
               
                 Rate Type 
                 Radio 
                 Rate Type 
                 To Select a rate type (Whether Enroll or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Renew) 
               
               
                 Enrolled 
                 Check Box 
                 Enrolled 
                 To be checked if enrolled before 1997. 
               
               
                 before 1997 
                   
                 before 1997 
               
               
                 Group Type 
                 Drop Down 
                 Group Type 
                 List all the Group Type Available in the system 
               
               
                   
                 List 
               
               
                 Association ID 
                 Drop Down 
                 Association 
                 List all the Association Type Available in the 
               
               
                   
                 List 
                 ID 
                 system 
               
               
                 Member Type 
                 Radio 
                 Member Type 
                 To Select a Member type (Whether Individual 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 or Association) 
               
               
                 Percentage 
                 Entry Field 
                 Percentage 
                 Entry field for entering % premium 
               
               
                 Premium 
                   
                 Premium 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Effective Date 
                 To choose the date required by calendar or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 entering 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Entry Field 
                 Group Size 
                 Entry field for entering group size Upper limit. 
               
               
                 Lower Limit 
                   
                 Lower Limit 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Entry Field 
                 Amount 
                 Entry field for entering Amount in $ 
               
               
                 Medical 
                 Entry Field 
                 Medical 
                 Entry field for entering the Medical Fee in $ 
               
               
                 Dental 
                 Entry Field 
                 Dental 
                 Entry field for entering the Dental Fee in $ 
               
               
                 Vision 
                 Entry Field 
                 Vision 
                 Entry field for entering the Vision Fee in % 
               
               
                 CAM 
                 Entry Field 
                 CAM 
                 Entry field for entering the CAM Fee in % 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button 
                 Save 
                 Save all the above information to the repository 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset the entries made in all the fields 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0430]    3.1.5.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 · 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 1. 
                 Rate Type 
                 Rate Type should be selected for Adding 
                 “Rate Type - Is Required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Agent Fees (Either one of Blended or 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Non Blended Rate and Either one of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Enroll or Renew) 
               
               
                 2. 
                 Enrolled before 
                 Should be selected if enrolled before 
               
               
                   
                 1997 
                 1997. 
               
               
                 3. 
                 Group Type 
                 Should list all the Group Type within the 
                 “Group Type - Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 system 
               
               
                   
                   
                 The first option should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 -- Choose One --. Subsequent Group 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Types should be listed in alphabetical 
               
               
                   
                   
                 order 
               
               
                 4. 
                 Association Id 
                 Should list all the Association Id within 
                 “Association Id - Is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the system. The first option should be 
                 required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 -- Choose One --. Subsequent Group 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Types should be listed in alphabetical 
               
               
                 5. 
                 Member Type 
                 Member Type should be selected for 
                 “Member Type - Is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Adding Agent Fees if Group Type is 
                 required. Select Individual 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Guaranteed Association. 
                 Member or Association 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Group.” 
               
               
                 6. 
                 Percentage 
                 Percentage Premium should be entered if 
                 “Percentage Premium”- 
               
               
                   
                 Premium 
                 the rate type is Blended 
                 Is required 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Percentage Premium in - 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Accepts numeric values 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 only (0 to 100)” 
               
               
                 7. 
                 Effective Date 
                 Effective Date should be selected from 
                 “Effective Date - Is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Calendar or entered 
                 required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 For valid Date Format Refer 
                 “Effective Date - Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
                 the format in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 MM/DD/YYYY” 
               
               
                 8. 
                 Group Size Lower 
                 Group Size Lower Limit should be 
                 “Group Size Lower Limit - 
               
               
                   
                 Limit 
                 entered if the rate type is Non Blended 
                 Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Group Size Lower limit - 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Accepts numeric values 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 only (1-999)” 
               
               
                 9. 
                 Group Size Upper 
                 Group Size Upper Limit should be 
                 “Group Size Upper Limit - 
               
               
                   
                 Limit 
                 entered if the rate type is Non Blended 
                 Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Group Size Upper Limit - 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Accepts numeric values 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 only (1-999)” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Kindly enter Group Size 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Upper limit greater than 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Lower Limit” 
               
               
                 10. 
                 Amount 
                 Amount should be entered if the rate type 
                 “Amount - Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is Non Blended 
                 “Amount - Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 currency format only 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (###.##)_” 
               
               
                 11. 
                 Medical 
                 Medical should be entered if the rate type 
                 “Medical - Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is Non Blended 
                 “Medical - Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 currency format only 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (###.##)” 
               
               
                 12. 
                 Dental 
                 Medical should be entered if the rate type 
                 “Dental - Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is Non Blended 
                 “Dental - Accepts currency 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 format only (###.##)” 
               
               
                 13. 
                 Vision 
                 Medical should be entered if the rate type 
                 “Vision - Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is Non Blended 
                 “Vision - Accepts numeric 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 value only (0 to 100)” 
               
               
                 14. 
                 CAM 
                 Medical should be entered if the rate type 
                 “CAM - Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is Non Blended 
                 “CAM - Accepts numeric 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 value only (0 to 100)” 
               
               
                 15. 
                 Save 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 For general script 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “SAVE” button or on 
                 validations for common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 functionality refer 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On saving the data the data gets saved to 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the database. 
                 System Error: Common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Should there be any validation error on 
                 Text shall be followed for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 any of the fields. Should show the script 
                 the System Error. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 error and place the cursor on the specific 
                 “! Do any operation to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 entry field. 
                 save.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if the entries are not duplicate. 
                 (Displayed when invoked 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On Successful saving the flow should 
                 immediately after the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 reside in the same screen. 
                 screen is loaded). 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Exception: If the data selected for edition 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is from the repository retain its previous 
               
               
                   
                   
                 state. I.e. the data should be visible in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table after saving. 
               
               
                 16. 
                 Cancel 
                 Should reset to the previous state on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 clicking the cancel button 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0433]    3.1.6. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Search Agent Commission 
         [0434]    3.1.6.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Search Agent Commission 
       (BPI-CAS_SCR_CM — 003 — 005) (See FIG. H- 24 ) 
       [0435]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give heading for the screen being navigated 
               
               
                 rate 
                   
                 rate 
               
               
                 Classification 
                   
                 Classification 
               
               
                 for Agent Fees 
                   
                 for Agent Fees 
               
               
                 Rate Type 
                 Radio 
                 Rate Type 
                 To Select a rate type (Whether Blended or Non 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Blended) 
               
               
                 Enroll/ 
                 Radio 
                 Enroll/ 
                 To Select a rate type (Whether Enroll or 
               
               
                 Renew 
                   
                 Renew 
                 Renew) 
               
               
                 Group Type 
                 Drop Down 
                 Group Type 
                 List all the Group Type Available in the system 
               
               
                   
                 List 
               
               
                 Association ID 
                 Drop Down 
                 Association 
                 List all the Association Type Available in the 
               
               
                   
                 List 
                 ID 
                 system 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Effective Date 
                 To choose the date required by calendar or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 entering 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Entry Field 
                 Group Size 
                 Entry field for entering Group size Lower limit. 
               
               
                 Lower Limit 
                   
                 Lower Limit 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Entry Field 
                 Group Size 
                 Entry field for entering Group size Upper limit. 
               
               
                 Upper Limit 
                   
                 Upper Limit 
               
               
                 Search 
                 HTML 
                 Search 
                 Button to search the data based on inputs and 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 displays the results in HTML table below 
               
               
                 Table 
                 HTML table 
                 Table 
                 Shows the all the data in the column format 
               
               
                 View/Delete 
                 Button 
                 View/Delete 
                 Button to view the selected record data 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Check Index 
                 Radio 
                 Check Index 
                 To check the items for modify, view and 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 deletion 
               
               
                 Modify 
                 Button 
                 Modify 
                 To edit the data against the row selected for 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 edition 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset the entries made in all the fields 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0436]    3.1.6.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 · 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Effective Date 
                 Effective Date should be selected from 
                 “Effective Date - Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Calendar or entered 
                 the format in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 For valid Date Format Refer 
                 MM/DD/YYYY” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
               
               
                 2 
                 Group Size Lower 
                 Group Size Lower Limit should be 
                 “Group Size Lower limit - 
               
               
                   
                 Limit 
                 entered if the rate type is Non Blended 
                 Accepts numeric values 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 only (1-999)” 
               
               
                 3 
                 Group Size Upper 
                 Group Size Upper Limit should be 
                 “Group Size Upper Limit - 
               
               
                   
                 Limit 
                 entered if the rate type is Non Blended 
                 Accepts numeric values 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 only (1-999)” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Kindly enter Group Size 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Upper limit greater than 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Lower Limit” 
               
               
                 4 
                 Search 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 On click of Search button 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Search” button or 
                 checks for the above 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 mentioned validations 
               
               
                   
                   
                 All the entries are valid. It fetches the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 records from repository based on inputs 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and displays the records in the table 
               
               
                   
                   
                 below. Else throws error dialog box. 
               
               
                 5 
                 Table 
                 Should have column header and each 
               
               
                   
                   
                 subsequent row should be identified by 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alternate color combinations. I.e. first 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘x’ and the next 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘y’. The next row 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The 
               
               
                   
                   
                 size of the text inside any cell should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 wrapped if the text becomes too long. 
               
               
                 6 
                 View/Delete 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 “! Select any one of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “View/Delete” button 
                 record” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 or on Mouse Click. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If the user clicks on the view button 
               
               
                   
                   
                 without checking any of the view radio 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button should throw error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: View the current row from the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 7 
                 Modify 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 “! Select any one of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Modify” button or on 
                 record” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On clicking the modify button the row is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 edited and the data should be populated. 
               
               
                 8 
                 Cancel 
                 Should reset to the previous state on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 clicking the cancel button 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0439]    3.1.7. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—View Agent Commission 
         [0440]    3.1.7.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—View Agent Commission 
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 003 — 006) (See FIG. H- 25 ) 
       [0441]    3.1.7.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give heading for the screen being navigated 
               
               
                 rate 
                   
                 rate 
               
               
                 Classification 
                   
                 Classification 
               
               
                 for Agent Fees 
                   
                 for Agent Fees 
               
               
                 Rate Type 
                 Text Field 
                 Rate Type 
                 To Display rate type (Whether Blended or Non 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Blended) 
               
               
                 Enroll Type 
                 Text Field 
                 Enroll Type 
                 To Display enroll type (Whether Enroll or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Renew) 
               
               
                 Enrolled 
                 Text Field 
                 Enrolled 
                 To Display enrolled before 1997 or not. 
               
               
                 before 1997 
                   
                 before 1997 
               
               
                 Group Type 
                 Text Field 
                 Group Type 
                 To Display Group Type 
               
               
                 Association ID 
                 Text Field 
                 Association 
                 To Display Association Type 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ID 
               
               
                 Member Type 
                 Text Field 
                 Member Type 
                 To Display member type (Individual or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Association) 
               
               
                 Percentage 
                 Text Field 
                 Percentage 
                 To Display % premium 
               
               
                 Premium 
                   
                 Premium 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Text Field 
                 Effective Date 
                 To Display Effective date 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Text Field 
                 Group Size 
                 To Display Group size Lower limit 
               
               
                 Lower Limit 
                   
                 Lower Limit 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Text Field 
                 Group Size 
                 To Display Group size Upper limit 
               
               
                 Upper Limit 
                   
                 Upper Limit 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Text Field 
                 Amount 
                 To Display Amount in $ 
               
               
                 Medical 
                 Text Field 
                 Medical 
                 To Display Medical Fee in $ 
               
               
                 Dental 
                 Text Field 
                 Dental 
                 To Display Dental Fee in $ 
               
               
                 Vision 
                 Text Field 
                 Vision 
                 To Display Vision Fee in % 
               
               
                 CAM 
                 Text Field 
                 CAM 
                 To Display CAM Fee in % 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Button 
                 Delete 
                 To delete the data 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 New Agent 
                 Button 
                 New Agent 
                 To go to New Agent fees screen 
               
               
                 Fees 
                 (HTML 
                 Fees 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0442]    3.1.7.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 · 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Delete 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 “Do you want 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the 
                 to delete the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “Delete” button or on 
                 selected record?” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If the user clicks on the delete 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button throw message box. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: Deletes the row from 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the data base 
               
               
                 2 
                 New Agent 
                 Should go to the agent fees 
               
               
                   
                 Fees 
                 screen clicking the New Agent 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Fees button 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0445]    3.1.8. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Additional Fees 
         [0446]    3.1.8.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Additional Fees 
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 003 — 007) (See FIG. H- 26 ) 
       [0447]    3.1.8.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give heading for the screen being navigated 
               
               
                 rate 
                   
                 rate 
               
               
                 Classification 
                   
                 Classification 
               
               
                 for Additional 
                   
                 for Additional 
               
               
                 Fees 
                   
                 Fees 
               
               
                 Cobra Type 
                 Radio 
                 Cobra Type 
                 To Select a Cobra Type (Whether Cal Cobra or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Federal Cobra) 
               
               
                 Additional Fee 
                 Entry Field 
                 Additional 
                 Entry field for entering % Additional Fees 
               
               
                 Percentage 
                   
                 Fee 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Percentage 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Effective Date 
                 To choose the date required by calendar or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 entering 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button 
                 Save 
                 Save all the above information to the repository 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset the entries made in all the fields 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0448]    3.1.8.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 · 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1. 
                 Cobra Type 
                 Cobra Type should be selected for 
                 “Kindly choose Cobra” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Adding Additional Fees 
               
               
                 2. 
                 Additional Fee 
                 Additional Fee Percentage should be 
                 “% Of Additional Fees - Is 
               
               
                   
                 Percentage 
                 entered. 
                 required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “% of Additional Fees - 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Accepts numeric value only 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (0 to 100) 
               
               
                 3. 
                 Effective Date 
                 Effective Date should be selected from 
                 “Effective Date - Is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Calendar or entered 
                 required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 For valid Date Format Refer 
                 “Effective Date - Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
                 the format in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 MM/DD/YYYY” 
               
               
                 4. 
                 Save 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 For general script 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “SAVE” button or on 
                 validations for common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 functionality refer 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On saving the data the data gets saved to 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the database. 
                 System Error: Common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Should there be any validation error on 
                 Text shall be followed for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 any of the fields. Should show the script 
                 the System Error. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 error and place the cursor on the specific 
                 “! Do any operation to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 entry field. 
                 save.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if the entries are not duplicate. 
                 (Displayed when invoked 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On Successful saving the flow should 
                 immediately after the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 reside in the same screen. 
                 screen is loaded). 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Exception: If the data selected for edition 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is from the repository retain its previous 
               
               
                   
                   
                 state. I.e. the data should be visible in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table after saving. 
               
               
                 5. 
                 Cancel 
                 Should reset to the previous state on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 clicking the cancel button 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0451]    3.1.9. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Search Additional Fees 
         [0452]    3.1.9.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Search Additional Fees 
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 003 — 008) (See FIG. H- 27 ) 
       [0453]    3.1.9.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give heading for the screen being navigated 
               
               
                 rate 
                   
                 rate 
               
               
                 Classification 
                   
                 Classification 
               
               
                 for Additional 
                   
                 for Additional 
               
               
                 Fees 
                   
                 Fees 
               
               
                 Cobra Type 
                 Radio 
                 Cobra Type 
                 To Select a Cobra Type (Whether Cal Cobra or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Federal Cobra) 
               
               
                 Additional Fee 
                 Entry Field 
                 Additional 
                 Entry field for entering % Additional Fees 
               
               
                 Percentage 
                   
                 Fee 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Percentage 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Effective Date 
                 To choose the date required by calendar or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 entering 
               
               
                 Search 
                 HTML 
                 Search 
                 Button to search the data based on inputs and 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 displays the results in HTML table below 
               
               
                 Table 
                 HTML 
                 Table 
                 Shows the all the data in the column format 
               
               
                   
                 Table 
               
               
                 View/Delete 
                 Button 
                 View/Delete 
                 Button to view the selected record data 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Check Index 
                 Radio 
                 Check Index 
                 To check the items for modify, view and 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 deletion 
               
               
                 Modify 
                 Button 
                 Modify 
                 To edit the data against the row selected for 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 edition 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset the entries made in all the fields 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0454]    3.1.9.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 · 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Additional Fee 
                 Additional Fee Percentage should be 
                 “% of Additional Fees - 
               
               
                   
                 Percentage 
                 entered. 
                 Accepts numeric value only 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (0 to 100)” 
               
               
                 2 
                 Effective Date 
                 Effective Date should be selected from 
                 “Effective Date - Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Calendar or entered 
                 the format in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 For valid Date Format Refer 
                 MM/DD/YYYY” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
               
               
                 3 
                 Search 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 On click of Search button 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Search” button or 
                 checks for the above 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 mentioned validations 
               
               
                   
                   
                 All the entries are valid. It fetches the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 records from repository based on inputs 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and displays the records in the table 
               
               
                   
                   
                 below. Else throws error dialog box. 
               
               
                 4 
                 Table 
                 Should have column header and each 
               
               
                   
                   
                 subsequent row should be identified by 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alternate color combinations. I.e. first 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘x’ and the next 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘y’. The next row 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The 
               
               
                   
                   
                 size of the text inside any cell should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 wrapped if the text becomes too long. 
               
               
                 5 
                 View/Delete 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 “! Select any one of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “View/Delete” button 
                 record” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 or on Mouse Click. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If the user clicks on the view button 
               
               
                   
                   
                 without checking any of the view radio 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button should throw error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: View the current row from the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 6 
                 Modify 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 “! Selected any one of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Modify” button or on 
                 record” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On clicking the modify button the row is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 edited and the data should be populated. 
               
               
                 7 
                 Cancel 
                 Should reset to the previous state on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 clicking the cancel button 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0457]    3.1.10. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—View Additional Fees 
         [0458]    3.1.10.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—View Additional Fees 
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 003 — 009) (See FIG. H- 28 ) 
       [0459]    3.1.10.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give heading for the screen being navigated 
               
               
                 rate 
                   
                 rate 
               
               
                 Classification 
                   
                 Classification 
               
               
                 for Additional 
                   
                 for Additional 
               
               
                 Fees 
                   
                 Fees 
               
               
                 Cobra Type 
                 Text Field 
                 Cobra Type 
                 To Display Cobra Type (Whether Cal Cobra or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Federal Cobra) 
               
               
                 Additional Fee 
                 Text Field 
                 Additional 
                 To Display % Additional Fes 
               
               
                 Percentage 
                   
                 Fee 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Percentage 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Text Field 
                 Effective Date 
                 To Display Effective date 
               
               
                 New 
                 HTML 
                 New 
                 Button to go to new Additional fees 
               
               
                 Additional 
                 Button 
                 Additional 
               
               
                 Fees 
                   
                 Fees 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Button 
                 Delete 
                 To delete the current additional fees data 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0460]    3.1.10.3. Front End Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 · 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Delete 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 “Do you want 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the 
                 to delete the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “Delete” button or on 
                 selected record?” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If the user clicks on the delete 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button throw message box. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: Deletes the row from 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the data base 
               
               
                 2 
                 New 
                 Should go to the additional fees 
               
               
                   
                 Additional 
                 screen clicking the New 
               
               
                   
                 Fees 
                 additional Fees button 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0461]    3.1.11. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Differential Fees 
         [0462]    3.1.11.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Differential Fees 
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 003 — 010) (See FIG. H- 29 ) 
       [0463]    3.1.11.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give heading for the screen being navigated 
               
               
                 rate 
                   
                 rate 
               
               
                 Classification 
                   
                 Classification 
               
               
                 for 
                   
                 for 
               
               
                 Differential 
                   
                 Differential 
               
               
                 Factor 
                   
                 Factor 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Entry Field 
                 Group Size 
                 Entry field for entering Group size Lower limit. 
               
               
                 Lower Limit 
                   
                 Lower Limit 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Entry Field 
                 Group Size 
                 Entry field for entering Group size Upper limit. 
               
               
                 Upper Limit 
                   
                 Upper Limit 
               
               
                 Differential 
                 Entry Field 
                 Differential 
                 Entry field for entering Differential Factor 
               
               
                 Factor 
                   
                 Factor 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Effective Date 
                 To choose the date required by calendar or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 entering 
               
               
                 Applicable For 
                 Radio 
                 Applicable 
                 To Select a Applicable For (Whether New 
               
               
                   
                   
                 For 
                 Business Only or New Business or Renewal) 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Radio 
                 Group Size 
                 To Select a Group Size Criteria (Whether 
               
               
                 Criteria 
                   
                 Criteria 
                 Eligible Employee or Enrolled Employee) 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button 
                 Save 
                 Save all the above information to the repository 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Submit 
               
               
                   
                 button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset the entries made in all the fields 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 reset 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0464]    3.1.11.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 • 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1. 
                 Group Size Lower 
                 Group Size Lower Limit should be 
                 “Group Size Lower Limit - 
               
               
                   
                 Limit 
                 entered. 
                 Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Group Size Lower limit - 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Accepts numeric values 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 only (1-999)” 
               
               
                 2. 
                 Group Size Upper 
                 Group Size Upper Limit should be 
                 “Group Size Upper Limit - 
               
               
                   
                 Limit 
                 entered. 
                 Is required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Group Size Upper Limit - 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Accepts numeric values 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 only (1-999)” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Kindly enter Group Size 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Upper limit greater than 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Lower Limit” 
               
               
                 3. 
                 Differential Factor 
                 Differential Factor should be entered. 
                 “Differential Factor - Is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Differential Factor - 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Accepts numeric values 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 only.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Differential Factor - 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Cannot be Zero” 
               
               
                 4. 
                 Effective Date 
                 Effective Date should be selected from 
                 “Effective Date - Is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Calendar or entered 
                 required” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 For valid Date Format Refer 
                 “Effective Date - Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
                 the format in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 MM/DD/YYYY” 
               
               
                 5. 
                 Save 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 For general script 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “SAVE” button or on 
                 validations for common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 functionality refer 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On saving the data the data gets saved to 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the database. 
                 System Error: Common 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Should there be any validation error on 
                 Text shall be followed for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 any of the fields. Should show the script 
                 the System Error. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 error and place the cursor on the specif 
                 “! Do any operation to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 entry field. 
                 save.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check if the entries are not duplicate. 
                 (Displayed when invoked 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On Successful saving the flow should 
                 immediately after the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 reside in the same screen. 
                 screen is loaded). 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0467]    3.1.12. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—Search Differential Fees 
         [0468]    3.1.12.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—Search Differential Fees 
       (BPI_CASE_SCR_CM — 003 — 011) (See FIG. H- 30 ) 
       [0469]    3.1.12.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give heading for the screen being navigated 
               
               
                 rate 
                   
                 rate 
               
               
                 Classification 
                   
                 Classification 
               
               
                 for 
                   
                 for 
               
               
                 Differential 
                   
                 Differential 
               
               
                 Factor 
                   
                 Factor 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Entry Field 
                 Group Size 
                 Entry field for entering Group size Lower limit. 
               
               
                 Lower Limit 
                   
                 Lower Limit 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Entry Field 
                 Group Size 
                 Entry field for entering Group size Upper limit. 
               
               
                 Upper Limit 
                   
                 Upper Limit 
               
               
                 Differential 
                 Entry Field 
                 Differential 
                 Entry field for entering Differential Factor 
               
               
                 Factor 
                   
                 Factor 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Effective Date 
                 To choose the date required by calendar or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 entering 
               
               
                 Applicable For 
                 Radio 
                 Applicable 
                 To Select a Applicable For (Whether New 
               
               
                   
                   
                 For 
                 Business Only or New Business or Renewal) 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Radio 
                 Group Size 
                 To Select a Group Size Criteria (Whether 
               
               
                 Criteria 
                   
                 Criteria 
                 Eligible Employee or Enrolled Employee) 
               
               
                 Search 
                 HTML 
                 Search 
                 Button to search the data based on inputs and 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 displays the results in HTML table below 
               
               
                 Table 
                 HTML table 
                 Table 
                 Shows the all the data in the column format 
               
               
                 View/Delete 
                 Button 
                 View/Delete 
                 Button to view the selected record data 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Check Index 
                 Radio 
                 Check Index 
                 To check the items for modify, view and 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 deletion 
               
               
                 Modify 
                 Button 
                 Modify 
                 To edit the data against the row selected for 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 edition 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset the entries made in all the fields 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0470]    3.1.12.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 • 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Group Size Lower 
                 Group Size Lower Limit should accept 
                 “Group Size Lower limit - 
               
               
                   
                 Limit 
                 numeric. 
                 Accepts numeric values 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 only (1-999) 
               
               
                 2 
                 Group Size Upper 
                 Group Size Upper Limit should accept 
                 “Group Size Upper Limit - 
               
               
                   
                 Limit 
                 numeric 
                 Accepts numeric values 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 only (1-999)” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Kindly enter Group Size 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Upper limit greater than 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Lower Limit” 
               
               
                 3 
                 Differential Factor 
                 Differential Factor should accept 
                 “Differential Factor - 
               
               
                   
                   
                 numeric.[[.]] 
                 Accepts numeric values 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 only.” 
               
               
                 4 
                 Effective Date 
                 Effective Date should be selected from 
                 “Effective Date -Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Calendar or entered 
                 the format in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 For valid Date Format Refer 
                 MM/DD/YYYY” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
               
               
                 5 
                 Search 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 On click of Search button 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Search” button or 
                 checks for the above 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 mentioned validations 
               
               
                   
                   
                 All the entries are valid. It fetches the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 records from repository based on inputs 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and displays the records in the table 
               
               
                   
                   
                 below. Else throws error dialog box. 
               
               
                 6 
                 Table 
                 Should have column header and each 
               
               
                   
                   
                 subsequent row should be identified by 
               
               
                   
                   
                 alternate color combinations. I.e. first 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘x’ and the next 
               
               
                   
                   
                 row should have color ‘y’. The next row 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The 
               
               
                   
                   
                 size of the text inside any cell should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 wrapped if the text becomes too long. 
               
               
                 7 
                 View/Delete 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 “! Select any one of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “View/Delete” button 
                 record” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 or on Mouse Click. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If the user clicks on the view button 
               
               
                   
                   
                 without checking any of the view radio 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button should throw error message. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: View the current row from the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 8 
                 Modify 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 “! Select any one of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Modify” button or on 
                 record” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 On clicking the modify button the row is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 edited and the data should be populated. 
               
               
                 9 
                 Cancel 
                 Should reset to the previous state on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 clicking the cancel button 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0473]    3.1.13. User Interface ID: Rate Classification—View Differential Fees 
         [0474]    3.1.13.1. Screen Name: Rate Classification—View Differential Fees 
       (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 003 — 0012)(See FIG. H- 31 ) 
       [0475]    3.1.13.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give heading for the screen being navigated 
               
               
                 rate 
                   
                 rate 
               
               
                 Classification 
                   
                 Classification 
               
               
                 for 
                   
                 for 
               
               
                 Differential 
                   
                 Differential 
               
               
                 Factor 
                   
                 Factor 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Text Field 
                 Group Size 
                 To Display Group size Lower limit. 
               
               
                 Lower Limit 
                   
                 Lower Limit 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Text Field 
                 Group Size 
                 To Display Group size Upper limit. 
               
               
                 Upper Limit 
                   
                 Upper Limit 
               
               
                 Differential 
                 Text Field 
                 Differential 
                 To Display Differential Factor 
               
               
                 Factor 
                   
                 Factor 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Text Field 
                 Effective Date 
                 To Display Effective date 
               
               
                 Applicable For 
                 Text Field 
                 Applicable 
                 To Display Applicable For (Whether New 
               
               
                   
                   
                 For 
                 Business Only or New Business or Renewal) 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Text Field 
                 Group Size 
                 To Display Group Size Criteria (Whether 
               
               
                 Criteria 
                   
                 Criteria 
                 Eligible Employee or Enrolled Employee) 
               
               
                 New 
                 Button 
                 New 
                 To go to Differential rate screen. 
               
               
                 Differential 
                 (HTML 
                 Differential 
               
               
                 Rate 
                 Button) 
                 Rate 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Button 
                 Delete 
                 To delete the current Differential fee 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0476]    3.1.13.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 • 
                 Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Delete 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 “Do you 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Positioned on the “Delete” button or on 
                 want to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 delete the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If the user clicks on the delete button 
                 selected 
               
               
                   
                   
                 throw message box. 
                 record?” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Success: Deletes the row from the data 
               
               
                   
                   
                 base 
               
               
                 2 
                 New 
                 Should go to the agent fees screen 
               
               
                   
                 Differential 
                 clicking the New Differential Fees button 
               
               
                   
                 Fees 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0479]    3.1.14. Screen Flow
       (See FIG. H- 32 )       
 
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Process Specification 
     1. Introduction 
       [0481]    1.1. Purpose 
         [0482]    This purpose of this document is to identify the process associated with the business use case Create ZIP. This document is the amendment of BPI_CAS_FSD_CM — 04(Version 1.0). 
         [0483]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_CM_003 
                 Create Rate Master 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0484]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [0485]    2.1. Background 
         [0486]    This process describes the Use Case “Create ZIP”. Standard ZIP is loaded into the system. Refer the document reference no. BPI_CAS_FSC_EC for process of loading ZIP Code. Also for the specific ZIP Codes the corresponding service areas are loaded. The state is divided into several service areas based on the number of counties and their population. In the state of California there are presently 6 service areas. The Rate is based on the service area where the employees are residing. 
         [0487]    2.2. Process Description &amp; Flow 
         [0488]    2.2.1. Zip Code Search
       The Screen described below has two features provided:   Zip code search feature is by which the user can search for zip based on any of the selection criteria. Search for zip is based on City name, County name or a Valid Zip code. When user enters the search value, search results are displayed on a table format.   There is also provision for canceling the search value. Numbers of records fetched are also displayed on the screen.   There is also a feature to print the records fetched. A separate page is invoked on clicking the printer icon. The print page has the fetched records with print button. Clicking on which will invoke the printer dialog.   User can view records in Normal as well as Expanded mode. Expanded mode can be invoked by clicking the gif in the table header.       
 
         [0494]    2.2.2. Zip Distance
       Zip Distance feature is by which user can get the distance of the zip codes entered. Zip distance is calculated based on the geographical distribution of the area by its latitudinal &amp; longitudinal position. The result is displayed in miles.   The user interface for Zip is provided below. The two screenshots is the same screen shown to describe these two features.       
 
         [0497]    2.2.3. Process Flow Diagrams 
       (See FIG. H- 33 ) 
     3. User Interface 
       [0498]    3.1. User Interface Screens 
         [0499]    3.1.1. Screen ID&#39;s 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Screen ID (SID) 
                 Screen Name 
                 Corresponding HTML File Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 zip.zipsearch 
                 Zip Search 
                 /bpi/cas/carrier/zip/ZipSearch.jsp 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0500]    3.1.2. User Interface ID: Zip Search 
         [0501]    3.1.2.1. Screen Name: Zip Search (BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 004 — 001) (See FIG. H- 34 )
       Zip Distance: BPI_CAS_SCR_CM — 004 — 002 (See FIG. H- 35 )       
 
         [0503]    3.1.2.2. Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Header 
                 Text 
                 Main Header 
                 To give heading for the screen being navigated 
               
               
                 Searching 
                   
                 Searching 
               
               
                 ZIPS 
                   
                 ZIPS 
               
               
                 City 
                 Text 
                 City 
                 Provide Text 
               
               
                 City 
                 Radio 
                 City 
                 To choose a city for search 
               
               
                 County 
                 Text 
                 County 
                 Provide Text 
               
               
                 County 
                 Radio 
                 County 
                 To choose a county for search 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Text 
                 ZIP 
                 Provide Text 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Radio 
                 ZIP 
                 To choose a zip for search 
               
               
                 Search Value 
                 Entry Field 
                 Search Value 
                 Entering the Zip search value 
               
               
                 Search 
                 HTML 
                 Search 
                 Button to be invoked for displaying the search 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 results based on the Entered text in Search 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Value. 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 HTML 
                 Cancel 
                 To clear the entered field. 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
               
               
                 ZIP 1 
                 Text 
                 ZIP 1 
                 Provide Text 
               
               
                 ZIP 1 
                 Entry Field 
                 ZIP 1 
                 Entering the Zip1 value 
               
               
                 ZIP 2 
                 Text 
                 ZIP 2 
                 Provide Text 
               
               
                 ZIP 2 
                 Entry Field 
                 ZIP 2 
                 Entering the Zip2 value 
               
               
                 Go 
                 HTML 
                 Go 
                 Button to be invoked for displaying the distance 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 between the two zip codes entered in miles. 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 HTML 
                 Cancel 
                 To clear the entered field. 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0504]    3.1.2.3. Front End Validations
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front-end screen validations along with the   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1. 
                 City 
                 Max length of the search field is set. 
                   
               
               
                 2. 
                 County 
                 Max length of the search field is set. 
               
               
                 3. 
                 Zip 
                 Max length of the search field is set. 
               
               
                 4. 
                 Search 
                 On click of the button, records are 
                 “Search Value - Is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 fetched from repository based on 
                 required.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selection criteria. 
                 “City - Accepts alphabetic 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 characters only.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “County - Accepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 alphabetic characters only.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “ZIP - Accepts exactly 5 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 digit numbers only.” 
               
               
                 5. 
                 Cancel 
                 On click of this button, entry field is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 cleared. 
               
               
                 6. 
                 Go 
                 On click of the button, distance between 
                 “Zip1 - Is required.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the two zip codes is displayed. 
                 “Zip2 - Is required.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “ZIP - Accepts exactly 5 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 digit numbers only.” 
               
               
                 7. 
                 Cancel 
                 On click of this button, entry field is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 cleared. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0507]    3.2. Screen Flow 
         [0508]    This section describes the screen flow for the group enrollment process. (See FIG. H- 36 ) 
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Process Specification 
     Cobra Enrollment 
     1. Introduction 
       [0509]    1.1 Purpose 
         [0510]    The purpose of this document is to describe the process of COBRA Enrollment. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process. 
         [0511]    1.2 Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_EN 
                 Enrollment 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_EN_OO2 
                 COBRA Enrollment 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_EN_OO1 
                 Group Enrollment 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0512]    1.3 Document Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Document ID 
                 Document Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN 
                 Functional Specification Document- 
               
               
                   
                 Enrollment 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_001 
                 Process Flow—New Business Enrollment 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_002 
                 Process Flow—Enrollment Changes/Add-On 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_003 
                 Process Flow—COBRA Enrollment/Changes 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_005 
                 Process Flow—Termination/Reinstatement 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0513]    1.4 Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2 Process Identification 
       [0514]    2.1 Background 
         [0515]    California State laws and federal laws govern COBRA Rules based on whether it is Cal COBRA or Federal COBRA. 
         [0516]    The decision whether the Group is a CAL COBRA or FEDERAL COBRA would be based on the Group size or the number of employee in the group. If the number of the employee were greater than or equal to 20 then it would be FEDERAL COBRA. If the group size were less than 20 employees then it would be Cal COBRA. This needs to be entered at the time of group enrollment. Based on applications received for group. 
         [0517]    2.2 Process Description 
         [0518]    The objective of the COBRA Enrollment is to:
       New Business COBRA Enrollment   Existing member converting to COBRA because of the qualifying rules.   Add on for COBRA members   Changes to COBRA members   Requalification and Open enrollment and Open enrollment for the COBRA members.       
 
         [0524]    2.3 Process Flow 
         [0525]    Process for COBRA is based on the type of COBRA enrollment
       New Business COBRA Enrollment   Existing members converting into COBRA after termination       
 
         [0528]    Process Flow for New Buiness COBRA Enrollment 
         [0529]    1) Search for the group and select the SEG Group or Alternate Group with whom the COBRA members are to be added. 
         [0530]    2) Specify if the Member is enrolling as COBRA member as an individual or with dependent 
         [0531]    3) If the member is enrolling with dependent then specify the number of dependent 
         [0532]    4) Enter member general information, which includes the personal information and address information. 
         [0533]    5) Add the dependent/dependents if the option selected is with dependent and enter the dependent/dependents information. 
         [0534]    6) Enter COBRA information for the member and dependents as applicable. 
         [0535]    7) Select the Line of coverage options for the member and dependent as applicable. 
         [0536]    8) List COBRA member summary and select the Benefit Level (Carrier Selection) based on the ZIP code and Service area provided. 
         [0537]    9) Show missing information for the COBRA enrollment. 
         [0538]    10) Enroll/Decline the COBRA enrollment (based on ACL). 
         [0539]    Process Flow for new Business COBRA (See FIG. I- 1 ) 
         [0540]    Process Flow for existing Member COBRA Enrollment 
         [0541]    1) Search for the group and employee who need to be converted into the COBRA members. 
         [0542]    2) Check the term status and reasons for the Employee/dependent. 
         [0543]    3) Process COBRA Eligibility checks. This checks the eligibility of the Employee if termed and the reasons for the term, which form the basic for the qualifying event. Of if the employee is not termed and the dependent/dependents are termed their reasons for terms and qualifying event. If none qualify then COBRA enrollment is declined based on ACL. If either qualifies then the COBRA enrollment information is shown with option to select line of coverage for the termed members. 
         [0544]    4) Identify the primary member based on the criteria.
       Employee is also termed and opts for COBRA then the employee becomes the primary member.   If spouse is termed with children and spouse opts for COBRA coverage then spouse becomes the primary member   If Children/child is termed and opts for COBRA coverage the oldest child becomes the primary member.       
 
         [0548]    5) Check if the Plan is available in the Primary members ZIP/Service area. If so then the member should select the same plan as was before. If not, pend and send quote for plans available and then allow the member to select the plan that is available in the new ZIP service area. 
         [0549]    6) Dependents should have the same plan as well. However they can waive any plan. (Refer the business rules for COBRA) 
         [0550]    7) Show Summary and missing information. 
         [0551]    8) Enroll/Decline member/members as COBRA group. 
         [0552]    Process Flow for Existing COBRA conversion (See FIG. I- 2 ) 
       3 User Interface 
       [0553]    3.1 User Interface Screens 
         [0554]    3.1.1 Screen ID&#39;s 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Screen ID (SID) 
                 Screen Name 
                 Corresponding HTML File Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. 
                 Group Search 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/groupsearch/GroupSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 search 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. 
                 Group Information 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/generalinfo/GeneralInfo.jsp 
               
               
                 general 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. 
                 Billing Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/billinginfo/BillingInfo.jsp 
               
               
                 billing 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. 
                 Coverage Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/coverageinfo/CoverageInfo.jsp 
               
               
                 coverage 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. 
                 Dependent Information 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/dependentinfo/DependentInfo.jsp 
               
               
                 dependent 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. 
                 CobraSearch 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/cobrasearch/CobraSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 searchcobra 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. 
                 Missing Information 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/missinginfo/MissingInfo.jsp 
               
               
                 missing 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. 
                 Group Inactivate 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/groupinactivate/GroupInactivate.jsp 
               
               
                 inactivate 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.new. 
                 Confirmation 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/new/confirmation/Confirmation.jsp 
               
               
                 confirmation 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. 
                 Employee Search 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/employeesearch/EmployeeSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 employeesearch 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. 
                 Member Process 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/memberprocess/MemberProcess.jsp 
               
               
                 memberprocess 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. 
                 Existing General 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/generalinfo/GeneralInfo.jsp 
               
               
                 general 
                 Information 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. 
                 Existing Billing Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/billinginfo/BillingInfo.jsp 
               
               
                 billing 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. 
                 Existing Coverage Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/coverageinfo/CoverageInfo.jsp 
               
               
                 coverage 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. 
                 Existing Dependent Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/dependentinfo/DependentInfo.jsp 
               
               
                 dependent 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. 
                 Existing Cobra Search 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/cobrasearch/CobraSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 searchcobra 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. 
                 Existing Missing Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/missinginfo/MissingInfo.jsp 
               
               
                 missing 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. 
                 Existing confirmation 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/confirmation/Confirmation.jsp 
               
               
                 confirmation 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobra.existing. 
                 Existing Inactivate 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobra/existing/groupinactivate/GroupInactivate.jsp 
               
               
                 inactivate 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0555]    3.1.2 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN — 002 — 001—Group Search 
         [0556]    3.1.2.1 Screen Name: Group Search (See FIG. I- 3 ) 
         [0557]    3.1.2.2 Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Group Id 
                 Text 
                 Group Id 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Group Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Group Id 
                 Enter the group Id for Search 
               
               
                 Group Name 
                 Text 
                 Group Name 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Group Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Group Name 
                 To enter group name for search 
               
               
                 Group Phone 
                 Text 
                 Group Phone 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Group phone 
                 Entry field 
                 Group phone 
                 Enter group phone number for search 
               
               
                 Search 
                 HTML 
                 Search 
                 Button for searching the Group 
               
               
                   
                 button 
               
               
                 Table 
                 HTML 
                 Table 
                 Table to display group information 
               
               
                   
                 Table 
               
               
                 Select Group 
                 Radio 
                 Select Group 
                 Button to select the group for Attaching the 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 COBRA members 
               
               
                 Single 
                 Radio 
                 Single 
                 To choose if the COBRA Member is enrolling 
               
               
                 Member 
                 Button 
                 Member 
                 as a single member 
               
               
                 Member With 
                 Radio 
                 Member With 
                 To choose if COBRA Member is enrolling as a 
               
               
                 dependent 
                 Button 
                 dependent 
                 member with dependent 
               
               
                 Dependent 
                 Entry Field 
                 Dependent 
                 Field to enter the number of dependent 
               
               
                 Member 
                   
                 Member 
                 members being added to the member as 
               
               
                 Count 
                   
                 Count 
                 COBRA 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0558]    3.1.2.3 Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Group ID 
                 Enter valid group ID only 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “Please enter valid group ID” 
               
               
                 Group Name 
                 Enter the group name 
                 None 
               
               
                 Group Phone 
                 Enter valid phone number for the group 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “Please enter valid phone number” 
               
               
                 Search 
                 On click of the search button should list 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 the groups or a single group based on the 
               
               
                   
                 search criteria. 
               
               
                 Select Group 
                 If the groups are multiple then the radio 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 button option to select the specific group 
                 “Please select a group with whom 
               
               
                   
                 should be provided. 
                 you would like to add COBRA 
               
               
                   
                 If the Group available is only one then it 
                 member” 
               
               
                   
                 should be selected by default. 
               
               
                 Select member Only 
                 There should be option either to select 
                 None 
               
               
                 or Member with 
                 single member or member with 
               
               
                 dependent 
                 dependent. 
               
               
                 Dependent Member 
                 If the option selected is member with 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                 Count 
                 dependent specify the number of 
                 “Please enter the number of 
               
               
                   
                 dependents. 
                 dependent as the option selected is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 member with dependent.” 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0559]    3.1.2.4 Help Menu
       New Business enrollment can bring in the members as COBRA. This screen is used for adding the COBRA members to the new business groups based on the selection of the group.       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Purpose 
                 Valid Values 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Search 
                 To search for the 
                 Should list single or multiple 
               
               
                   
                 Group 
                 groups based on the search 
               
               
                   
                   
                 criteria 
               
               
                 Single Member or 
                 This is to specify if 
                 None 
               
               
                 member with 
                 the member is 
               
               
                 dependent 
                 availing COBRA 
               
               
                   
                 benefits 
               
               
                   
                 individually or with 
               
               
                   
                 dependents 
               
               
                 Dependent Member 
                 Specify the count 
                 None 
               
               
                 Count 
                 of the dependent 
               
               
                   
                 members to be 
               
               
                   
                 enrolled with the 
               
               
                   
                 primary member as 
               
               
                   
                 COBRA. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0561]    3.1.3 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN — 002 — 002—Group Information 
         [0562]    3.1.3.1 Screen Name: Group Information (See FIG. I- 4 ) 
         [0563]    3.1.3.2 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Employer 
                 Text 
                 Employer 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Information 
                   
                 Information 
               
               
                 Date PM 
                 Text 
                 Date PM 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Date PM 
                 Entry field 
                 Date PM 
                 Provide entry for Date Postmarked 
               
               
                 Date Recd 
                 Text 
                 Date Recd 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Date Recd 
                 Entry field 
                 Date Recd 
                 Provide entry for Date Received 
               
               
                 Salutation 
                 Text 
                 Salutation 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Salutation 
                 Drop Down 
                 Salutation 
                 List the Salutation MR., MRS., MS. 
               
               
                   
                 List 
               
               
                 First name 
                 Text 
                 First name 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 First name 
                 Entry field 
                 First name 
                 Provide entry field for the First name 
               
               
                 Last name 
                 Text 
                 Last name 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Last Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Last Name 
                 Provide entry field for the Last name 
               
               
                 MI 
                 Text 
                 MI 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 MI 
                 Entry Field 
                 MI 
                 Enter the middle initial 
               
               
                 Suffix 
                 Text 
                 Suffix 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Suffix 
                 List 
                 Suffix 
                 List the suffix for selection 
               
               
                 Social 
                 Text 
                 Social Security 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Security 
                   
                 Number 
               
               
                 Number 
               
               
                 SSN 
                 Entry field 
                 SSN 
                 Enter the SSN number 
               
               
                 Unique ID 
                 Text 
                 Unique ID 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Unique ID 
                 Entry field 
                 Unique ID 
                 Show the unique ID generated 
               
               
                   
                 (Uneditable). 
               
               
                 Auto Generate 
                 HTML 
                 Auto Generate 
                 Button to generate Unique Id if SSN is not 
               
               
                   
                 button 
                   
                 provided 
               
               
                 Date of Birth 
                 Text 
                 Date of Birth 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Date of Birth 
                 Calendar 
                 Date of Birth 
                 Calendar to select the birth date. Should also 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 allow to enter date of birth as 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 MM/DD/YYYY 
               
               
                 Gender 
                 Text 
                 Gender 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Gender 
                 List 
                 Gender 
                 List whether Male or Female 
               
               
                 Physical Main 
                 Text 
                 Physical Main 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Address 
                   
                 Address 
               
               
                 Street Address 
                 Entry field 
                 Street Address 
                 Enter the street address 
               
               
                 Suite/Apts. 
                 Text 
                 Suite/Apts. 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Suite/Apts. 
                 Entry Field 
                 Suite/Apts. 
                 Enter the suite/apts. number 
               
               
                 City 
                 Text 
                 City 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 City 
                 Entry Field 
                 City 
                 Enter the city name 
               
               
                 State 
                 Text 
                 State 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 State 
                 Drop Down 
                 State 
                 List all the state in US 
               
               
                   
                 List 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Text 
                 ZIP 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Entry Field 
                 ZIP 
                 Enter zip code 
               
               
                 Service Area 
                 Text 
                 Service Area 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Service Area 
                 Entry Field 
                 Service Area 
                 Shows the Service Area based on the ZIP 
               
               
                   
                 (uneditable) 
                   
                 code typed 
               
               
                   
                 or list 
                   
                 Show list if the ZIP has multiple service area 
               
               
                 County 
                 Text 
                 County 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 County 
                 Entry Field 
                 County 
                 Display the county name based on the zip and 
               
               
                   
                 (uneditable) 
                   
                 service area selected 
               
               
                 Preferred 
                 Text 
                 Preferred mode 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 mode of 
                   
                 of 
               
               
                 correspondence 
                   
                 correspondence 
               
               
                 Mode of 
                 Drop Down 
                 Mode of 
                 List the mod of communication, USPS, FAX, 
               
               
                 correspondence 
                 List 
                 correspondence 
                 or email/web. Phone is not allowed. 
               
               
                 Phone number 
                 Text 
                 Phone number 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Entry Field 
                 Phone 
                 To enter phone number 
               
               
                 Home FAX 
                 Text 
                 Home FAX No. 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 No. 
               
               
                 FAX 
                 Entry Field 
                 FAX 
                 To enter FAX number 
               
               
                 Extension 
                 Entry Field 
                 Extension 
                 To enter extension number 
               
               
                 E-Mail 
                 Text 
                 E-Mail Address 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Address 
               
               
                 E-mail 
                 Entry field 
                 E-mail Address 
                 Enter email address 
               
               
                 Address 
               
               
                 Mailing 
                 Text 
                 Mailing 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Address 
                   
                 Address 
               
               
                 Street Address 
                 Text 
                 Street Address 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Street Address 
                 Text 
                 Street Address 
                 Enter the street address 
               
               
                 Suite/Apts./ 
                 Text 
                 Suite/Apts./ 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 PO Box # 
                   
                 PO Box # 
               
               
                 Suite/Apts./ 
                 Entry Field 
                 Suite/Apts./ 
                 Enter the suite/apts. number 
               
               
                 PO Box # 
                   
                 PO Box # 
               
               
                 City 
                 Text 
                 City 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 City 
                 Entry Field 
                 City 
                 Enter the city name 
               
               
                 State 
                 Text 
                 State 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 State 
                 Drop Down 
                 State 
                 List all the state in US 
               
               
                   
                 List 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Text 
                 ZIP 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Entry Field 
                 ZIP 
                 Enter zip code 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 HTML Reset 
                 Cancel 
                 To cancel the operation and reset for new 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 selection 
               
               
                 Continue 
                 HTML 
                 Continue 
                 To save the data gathered in this screen and 
               
               
                   
                 Submit 
                   
                 continue to the next screen 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_003 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0564]    3.1.3.3 Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Salutation 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 First Name 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Last name 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 MI 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Suffix 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Birth date 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 SSN 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Unique Id 
                 Unique 9 digit ID should be generated 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 if the SSN number is not provided. 
               
               
                   
                 This unique ID should not be repeated 
               
               
                   
                 for any employee. Also unique Id 
               
               
                   
                 should be generated on change mode. 
               
               
                   
                 Number should start with 999 999 
               
               
                   
                 000 and start descending e.g. 
               
               
                   
                 999 998 999 
               
               
                   
                 999 998 998 and so on 
               
               
                 Street Address 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Suite/Apts. 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 City 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 State 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Service Area 
                 Should pick up the service area based 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 on the Zip code number typed in the 
               
               
                   
                 above ZIP entry field from the 
               
               
                   
                 database 
               
               
                   
                 If there are multiple service area then 
               
               
                   
                 it should list the service area for 
               
               
                   
                 picking up the service area. 
               
               
                 County 
                 Show the county name based on the 
                 none 
               
               
                   
                 ZIP code and Service area 
               
               
                   
                 combination 
               
               
                 Mode of 
                 List mode of communications like 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                 Communication 
                 USPS, FAX, Email/Web and others. 
                 “Please choose the mode of 
               
               
                   
                 If the option selected is Email then the 
                 communication” 
               
               
                   
                 Email address field cannot be blank. 
               
               
                   
                 Default Option should be 
               
               
                   
                 -- choose one --. 
               
               
                   
                 If none is selected should throw error 
               
               
                   
                 message. 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Extension 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 FAX 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Extension 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 E-mail Address 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Gender 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Street Address 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Suite/Apts. 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 City 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 State 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Reset Button 
                 To reset the value in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Entry Field to its previous 
               
               
                   
                   
                 state as was on loading page 
               
               
                 Continue 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the “Continue” 
                 “The value entered for the 
               
               
                   
                 button or on Mouse Click. 
                 FIELD NAME is erroneous. 
               
               
                   
                 Check for all the validation on the 
                 Please enter valid values.” 
               
               
                   
                 fields 
                 “Please choose the mode of 
               
               
                   
                 If any data type error throw error 
                 communication” 
               
               
                   
                 message. 
               
               
                   
                 Allows blank entry 
               
               
                   
                 On Success Leads to the next page 
               
               
                   
                 for filling further information on the 
               
               
                   
                 employee. 
               
               
                   
                 Screen 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_003 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0565]    3.1.3.4 Help Menu
       This screen is used for filling up the primary COBRA member information. The information contained here is the personal information and the address information. The ZIP and the service are provided here governs the rate calculation for the COBRA member.       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element Name 
                 Purpose 
                 Valid Values 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Continue 
                 On clicking the 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button leads to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the next page for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 filling up the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 dependent 
               
               
                   
                   
                 information if 
               
               
                   
                   
                 applicable of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 member 
               
               
                   
                   
                 coverage 
               
               
                   
                   
                 information 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0567]    3.1.4 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN — 002 — 003—Dependent Information 
         [0568]    3.1.4.1 Screen Name: Dependent Information (See FIG. I- 5 ) 
         [0569]    3.1.4.2 Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Salutation 
                 Text 
                 Salutation 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Salutation 
                 List 
                 Salutation 
                 List type of salutation 
               
               
                 Dependent 
                 Text 
                 Dependent 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 First name 
                   
                 First name 
               
               
                 First Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 First Name 
                 Enter the first name 
               
               
                 Dependent 
                 Text 
                 Dependent 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Last name 
                   
                 Last name 
               
               
                 Last name 
                 Entry field 
                 Last name 
                 Enter the last name 
               
               
                 MI 
                 Text 
                 MI 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 MI 
                 Entry Field 
                 MI 
                 Enter the middle initial 
               
               
                 Suffix 
                 Text 
                 Suffix 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Suffix 
                 Entry Field 
                 Suffix 
                 Enter the suffix 
               
               
                 Dependent 
                 Text 
                 Dependent 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Social 
                   
                 Social 
               
               
                 Security 
                   
                 Security 
               
               
                 Number 
                   
                 Number 
               
               
                 SSN 
                 Text 
                 SSN 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 SSN 
                 Entry field 
                 SSN 
                 Enter the SSN number 
               
               
                 Unique ID 
                 Text 
                 Unique ID 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Unique ID 
                 Entry field 
                 Unique ID 
                 Show the unique ID generated 
               
               
                   
                 (uneditable). 
               
               
                 Gender 
                 Text 
                 Gender 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Gender 
                 List 
                 Gender 
                 List the gender 
               
               
                 Relationship 
                 Text 
                 Relationship 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Relationship 
                 List 
                 Relationship 
                 List all types of relationship like spouse, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 domestic partner, child, step child others 
               
               
                 Birth Date 
                 Text 
                 Birth Date 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Birth Date 
                 Calendar 
                 Birth Date 
                 Calendar to choose the birth date 
               
               
                 Add 
                 HTML 
                 Add 
                 To add the above dependent Information to the 
               
               
                 Dependent 
                 Submit 
                 Dependent 
                 html table below 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
               
               
                 Table 
                 HTML 
                 Table 
                 Table for adding up the dependent information 
               
               
                   
                 Table 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Button 
                 Delete 
                 To delete the items checked for deletion 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Check All 
                 Text Link 
                 Check All 
                 To check all the check boxes in the table 
               
               
                 Clear All 
                 Text Link 
                 Clear All 
                 To un check all the check boxes checked in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 table 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Check box 
                 Delete 
                 To check the items for deletion 
               
               
                 Edit 
                 Button 
                 Edit 
                 To edit the items against the row selected for 
               
               
                   
                 (HTML 
                   
                 edition 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Disabled 
                 Text 
                 Disabled 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Disabled 
                 Radio 
                 Disabled 
                 Temporary or permanent disability (Can be 
               
               
                 Radio Button 
                 Button 
                 Radio Button 
                 only one or the other) Default NONE. 
               
               
                 Domestic 
                 Text 
                 Domestic 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Partner 
                   
                 Partner 
               
               
                 Domestic 
                 Check box 
                 Domestic 
                 Is Form available if so check. 
               
               
                 Partner 
                   
                 Partner 
               
               
                 Legal 
                 Text 
                 Legal 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Guardian 
                   
                 Guardian 
               
               
                 Legal 
                 Check box 
                 Legal 
                 Is Form available if so check. 
               
               
                 Guardian 
                   
                 Guardian 
               
               
                 Signature 
                 Text 
                 Signature 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Signature 
                 Check box 
                 Signature 
                 Is signature available if check 
               
               
                 Continue 
                 HTML 
                 Continue 
                 On clicking the continue button save the 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 information 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 HTML reset 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset to the state as was before loading the 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 page 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0570]    3.1.4.3 Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 First Name 
                 Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
                 Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
               
               
                 Last name 
                 Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
                 Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
               
               
                 MI 
                 Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
                 Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
               
               
                 Suffix 
                 Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
                 Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
               
               
                 SSN Number 
                 Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
                 Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
               
               
                 Unique Id 
                 Unique 9 digit ID should be generated if 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 the SSN number is not provided. This 
               
               
                   
                 unique ID should not be repeated for any 
               
               
                   
                 employee. Also unique Id should be 
               
               
                   
                 generated on change mode. Number 
               
               
                   
                 should start with 999 999 000 and start 
               
               
                   
                 descending e.g. 
               
               
                   
                 999 998 999 
               
               
                   
                 999 998 998 and so on 
               
               
                 Birth Date 
                 Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
                 Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
               
               
                 Gender 
                 Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
                 Refer BPI_CAS_FSD_Common 
               
               
                 Relationship 
                 Default option should be 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 -- Choose one --. If none is selected 
                 “Please select the relationship of the 
               
               
                   
                 throw error message 
                 dependent with the employee” 
               
               
                 Add Dependent 
                 On clicking the Add Dependent the 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 dependent information gets filled in the 
                 “The value entered in the FIELD NAME is 
               
               
                   
                 HTML Table. All validation checks are 
                 incorrect. Please enter valid entries” 
               
               
                   
                 performed on the entry field before 
               
               
                   
                 adding the dependent. 
               
               
                 Table 
                 Should have column header and each 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 subsequent row should be identified by 
               
               
                   
                 alternate color combinations. i.e. First 
               
               
                   
                 row should have color ‘x’ and the next 
               
               
                   
                 row should have color ‘y’. The next row 
               
               
                   
                 should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The 
               
               
                   
                 size of any text inside any cell should be 
               
               
                   
                 wrapped if the text becomes too long. 
               
               
                   
                 Note: The values inside the table on 
               
               
                   
                 create mode would be blank. If this 
               
               
                   
                 screen is reached on edit/change mode 
               
               
                   
                 then the values inside the table would be 
               
               
                   
                 green in color if retrieved from the 
               
               
                   
                 database. If temporarily added then it 
               
               
                   
                 would be red in color. 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Positioned on the “Delete” button or on 
                 “Please choose the row or rows to be 
               
               
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 deleted.” 
               
               
                   
                 Delete Button should work on multiple 
               
               
                   
                 deletes based on the check box or boxes 
               
               
                   
                 selected. If the user clicks on the delete 
               
               
                   
                 button without checking any of the delete 
               
               
                   
                 check box should throw error message. 
               
               
                   
                 Success: Deletes the row or rows from 
               
               
                   
                 the HTML Table (temporary storage) 
               
               
                 Check All 
                 On clicking the “Check All” link should 
                 On clicking the “Check All” link 
               
               
                   
                 check all the check boxes in the HTML 
                 should check all the check boxes in the 
               
               
                   
                 table. 
                 HTML table. 
               
               
                 Clear All 
                 On clicking the “Clear All” link should 
                 On clicking the “Clear All” link should 
               
               
                   
                 uncheck all the checked check boxes in 
                 uncheck all the checked check boxes in 
               
               
                   
                 the HTML table. 
                 the HTML table. 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Check box option with default 
                 Check box option with default 
               
               
                   
                 “unchecked” 
                 “unchecked” 
               
               
                 Edit 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 On clicking the edit button the row 
               
               
                   
                 Positioned on the “Edit” button or on 
                 edited should be removed from the 
               
               
                   
                 Mouse Click. 
                 HTML table and the data should be 
               
               
                   
                 On clicking the edit button the row edited 
                 populated back on the editable entry 
               
               
                   
                 should be removed from the HTML table 
                 fields. 
               
               
                   
                 and the data should be populated back on 
               
               
                   
                 the editable entry fields. 
               
               
                   
                 On clicking the edit for the data that is 
               
               
                   
                 Green in color (permanent data) the edit 
               
               
                   
                 becomes disabled and the Add button 
               
               
                   
                 becomes Update. 
               
               
                   
                 On clicking edit for the red color data 
               
               
                   
                 (temporary data) the row with the data 
               
               
                   
                 disappears from the table 
               
               
                 Domestic Partner 
                 Default is un checked. Allow to check if 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 applicable 
               
               
                 Legal Guardian 
                 Default is un checked. Allow to check if 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 applicable 
               
               
                 Signature 
                 Default is un checked. Allow to check if 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 applicable 
               
               
                 Continue 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Positioned on the “Continue” button or 
                 “Do you want to add the coverage 
               
               
                   
                 on Mouse Click. 
                 information before continuing” Yes/ 
               
               
                   
                 On success should save the data lead to 
                 No 
               
               
                   
                 the next page. 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Should reset to the state as was before 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 loading the page. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0571]    3.1.4.4 Help Menu
       This screen is used for filling up the dependent COBRA member information. The information contained here is the personal information. If there are multiple ° dependent then you can add the dependent COBRA members here.       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element Name 
                 Purpose 
                 Valid Values 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Continue 
                 On clicking the 
                 none 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button leads to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the next page for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 filling up the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 member 
               
               
                   
                   
                 coverage 
               
               
                   
                   
                 information 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0573]    3.1.5 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN — 002 — 004—Coverage Information 
         [0574]    3.1.5.1 Screen Name: Coverage Information (See FIG. I- 6 ) 
         [0575]    3.1.5.2 Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 COBRA 
                 Page sub Header 
                 COBRA qualifying 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 qualifying 
                   
                 Event 
               
               
                 Event 
               
               
                 Initial 
                 Text 
                 Initial COBRA effective 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 COBRA 
                   
                 date 
               
               
                 effective date 
               
               
                 Date 
                 Entry field 
                 Date 
                 Enter the initial effective date 
               
               
                 COBRA End 
                 Text 
                 COBRA End Date 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Date 
               
               
                 Period 
                 Entry field 
                 Period 
                 Enter the COBRA effective 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 period 
               
               
                 Reasons for 
                 Text 
                 Reasons for electing 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 electing 
                   
                 COBRA 
               
               
                 COBRA 
               
               
                 Reasons for 
                 Drop Down List 
                 Reasons for electing 
                 List the reasons for COBRA 
               
               
                 electing 
                   
                 COBRA 
                 election 
               
               
                 COBRA 
               
               
                 Where would 
                 Text 
                 Where would you like 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 you like the 
                   
                 the bills to be sent 
               
               
                 bills to be sent 
               
               
                 Where would 
                 Check Box 
                 Where would you like 
                 Check if the bill is to be sent to 
               
               
                 you like the 
                   
                 the bills to be sent 
                 the group or the member 
               
               
                 bills to be sent 
               
               
                 Is member 
                 Text 
                 Is member signature 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 signature 
                   
                 verified 
               
               
                 verified 
               
               
                 Is member 
                 Check box 
                 Is member signature 
                 Check if signature is verified 
               
               
                 signature 
                   
                 verified 
               
               
                 verified 
               
               
                 Line of 
                 HTML Table 
                 Line of Coverage 
                 Table to display the Member 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                   
                 Selection Table 
                 names and the Line of coverage 
               
               
                 Selection 
                   
                   
                 check boxes for picking the line 
               
               
                 Table 
                   
                   
                 of coverage for each COBRA 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 members 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                 Check Box 
                 Coverage Selection 
                 Check box to select the line of 
               
               
                 Selection 
                   
                   
                 coverage 
               
               
                 Show 
                 HTML button 
                 Show Coverage Choice 
                 Button to show the coverage 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                   
                   
                 choice for each line of coverage 
               
               
                 Choice 
                   
                   
                 based on the check box/boxes 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 checked. 
               
               
                 Continue 
                 HTML Button 
                 Continue 
                 Button to save the data and lead 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 to the next screen for showing 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the summary and selection of 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Benefit level offered by carriers 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (Screen 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_004) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0576]    3.1.5.3 Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Date 
                 Defaults to system date. User can either 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 enter the date or pick the date from the 
                 “Date cannot be future date 
               
               
                   
                 calendar 
                 Please enter past date” 
               
               
                 COBRA effective 
                 Defaults to 18 months. Can be changed 
                 None 
               
               
                 period 
                 by the user. 
               
               
                 Reasons for electing 
                 List the qualifying reasons for COBRA. 
                 None 
               
               
                 COBRA 
               
               
                 Where would you 
                 Option to bill either the group of the 
                 None 
               
               
                 like the bills to be 
                 COBRA member based on the flag 
               
               
                 sent 
                 checked 
               
               
                 Is member signature 
                 Check if the member signature is verified 
                 None 
               
               
                 verified 
               
               
                 Line of Coverage 
                 Table to show the Line of coverage 
                 None 
               
               
                 Selection Table 
                 against each member for picking the 
               
               
                   
                 option. The Line of coverage displayed is 
               
               
                   
                 based on the line of coverage selected by 
               
               
                   
                 the primary group. 
               
               
                   
                 Note: The table would display the 
               
               
                   
                 Member name in the following priority. 
               
               
                   
                 Employee as primary member 
               
               
                   
                 Spouse as the next member 
               
               
                   
                 Other members would be listed based on 
               
               
                   
                 the age. 
               
               
                 Coverage Selection 
                 Check Box to pick any combination of 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 coverage&#39;s for all the member for this 
               
               
                   
                 specific COBRA group 
               
               
                 Show Coverage 
                 On click of the Coverage choice system 
                 None 
               
               
                 Choice 
                 should identify the coverage choice 
               
               
                   
                 based on the options checked. Whether 
               
               
                   
                 member only, member and spouse tec. 
               
               
                 Continue 
                 On clicking the continue button saves the 
                 Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 data and leads to the page 
                 “Are you sure to continue” 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_005 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0577]    3.1.5.4 Help Menu
       This screen is used for filling up the COBRA qualifying events and the COBRA tenure for the members. Also there is an option to select the line of coverage opted for the various members.       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element Name 
                 Purpose 
                 Valid Values 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Continue 
                 On clicking the 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                   
                 button leads to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the next page for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selecting the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 benefit level 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (Carrier) 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0579]    3.1.6 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN — 002 — 006—Summary/Missing Information 
         [0580]    3.1.6.1 Screen Name: Missing Info (See FIG. I- 7 ) 
         [0581]    3.1.6.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Member 
                 Text 
                 Member Missing 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Missing 
                   
                 Information 
               
               
                 Information 
               
               
                 Employee Tab 
                 Expandable Tree 
                 Employee Tab 
                 Should be able to expand the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Employee Tab to list the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Details for the Employee 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Missing and information and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Also show an expandable tab 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 for the Dependent Missing 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Information 
               
               
                 Enrollment 
                 Drop Down List 
                 Enrollment Status 
                 List the status of enrollment. 
               
               
                 Status 
                   
                   
                 Can be Enroll or Decline 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Entry Field 
                 Remarks 
                 Remark for the status of 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 enrollment 
               
               
                 Reasons for 
                 Drop Down List 
                 Reasons for Decline 
                 List the reasons for decline 
               
               
                 Decline 
               
               
                 Other Reasons 
                 Entry Field 
                 Other Reasons 
                 Any other reasons for decline 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 or others 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 HTML Button 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset the operation 
               
               
                 Process 
                 HTML Button 
                 Process Enrollment 
                 Process the enrollment and 
               
               
                 Enrollment 
                   
                   
                 leads to the enrollment 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 confirmation page. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_001_011 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0582]    3.1.6.3 Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Enrollment Status 
                 List the status of enrollment. The default 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 option should be --choose one-- 
                 “Please choose enrollment 
               
               
                   
                 If the option selected is Decline. 
                 status before continuing.” 
               
               
                   
                 Should list the list box containing 
               
               
                   
                 reasons for the decline. 
               
               
                   
                 If none is selected throw error message. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Can accept any character. 
               
               
                 Reasons for Decline 
                 List the reasons for the decline. The 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 default option should be --choose one-- 
                 “Please choose reasons for 
               
               
                   
                 If none is selected throw error message. 
                 declining before 
               
               
                   
                   
                 continuing.” 
               
               
                 Other Reasons 
                 Can accept any character 
                 None 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Resets to the status as was on loading this 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 page 
               
               
                 Process Enrollment 
                 Should function with Enter Key Cursor 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Positioned on the “Process Enrollment” 
                 “Please choose enrollment 
               
               
                   
                 button or on Mouse Click. 
                 status before continuing.” 
               
               
                   
                 On success leads to the confirmation 
                 “Please choose reasons for 
               
               
                   
                 page. 
                 declining before 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_001_011 
                 continuing.” 
               
               
                   
                 It checks the eligibility rule for the 
               
               
                   
                 COBRA member once again. Process the 
               
               
                   
                 post enrollment activity like sending 
               
               
                   
                 emails, welcome letter. First month 
               
               
                   
                 invoices and email alert to GMS, Sales 
               
               
                   
                 and finance. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0583]    3.1.7 User Interface Id: BPCSCR_EN — 002 — 007—Existing COBRA Employee Search 
         [0584]    3.1.7.1 Screen Name: Employee Search (See FIG. I- 8 ) 
         [0585]    3.1.7.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Group ID 
                 Text 
                 Group ID 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Group Id 
                 Entry field 
                 Group Id 
                 Enter the group id for searching 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the employee 
               
               
                 Employee ID 
                 Text 
                 Employee ID 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Employee ID 
                 Entry field 
                 Employee ID 
                 Enter the Employee ID for 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 searching the employee 
               
               
                 Employee 
                 Text 
                 Employee SSN 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 SSN 
               
               
                 Employee 
                 Entry field 
                 Employee SSN 
                 Enter the Employee SSN for 
               
               
                 SSN 
                   
                   
                 searching the employee 
               
               
                 Phone number 
                 Text 
                 Phone number 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Phone number 
                 Entry field 
                 Phone number 
                 Enter the Employee Phone 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 number for searching the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 employee 
               
               
                 List Employee 
                 HTML Tree 
                 List Employee 
                 Tree to List the Employee and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 their dependent 
               
               
                 Employee 
                 HTML Table 
                 Employee Table 
                 Table to list employee 
               
               
                 Table 
                   
                   
                 information and status 
               
               
                 Dependent 
                 HTML table 
                 Dependent Table 
                 Table to list dependent 
               
               
                 Table 
                   
                   
                 information and status 
               
               
                 Process 
                 HTML button 
                 Process COBRA 
                 Button to check the COBRA 
               
               
                 COBRA 
                   
                   
                 eligibility and take to the next 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 page 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_008 if 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 eligible. If not the show the same 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 page. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0586]    3.1.7.3 Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Group Id 
                 Enter the Group ID or pick the group ID 
                 Group ID can be tnered 
               
               
                   
                 based on the Group search 
                 along with any other valid 
               
               
                   
                   
                 fields for the employee 
               
               
                   
                   
                 provided below. 
               
               
                 Employee ID 
                 Enter the employee Id or pick the 
                 Note: At least one of the 
               
               
                   
                 employee based on the employee search 
                 field with the search criteria 
               
               
                   
                 window. 
                 for the employee must be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 entered 
               
               
                 Employee SSN 
                 Enter the employee SSN or pick the 
                 Note: At least one of the 
               
               
                   
                 employee based on the employee search 
                 field with the search criteria 
               
               
                   
                 window. 
                 for the employee must be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 entered 
               
               
                 Phone number 
                 Enter the employee Phone or pick the 
                 Note: At least one of the 
               
               
                   
                 employee based on the employee search 
                 field with the search criteria 
               
               
                   
                 window. 
                 for the employee must be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 entered 
               
               
                 List Employee 
                 Tree to open up if dependent exist for the 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 employee 
               
               
                 Employee Table 
                 List the employee with status and 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 effective date 
               
               
                 Process COBRA 
                 Check the status and term reasons and 
                 Embedded error if non-of 
               
               
                   
                 process the eligibility check for the 
                 the member is termed or not 
               
               
                   
                 existing member to COBRA 
                 qualifies for COBRA. 
               
               
                   
                 Note: It should check the following 
               
               
                   
                 status. Term Status, Term reasons 
               
               
                   
                 Only the member termed all eligible for 
               
               
                   
                 the COBRA. The reasons for term can 
               
               
                   
                 either decline COBRA enrollment or 
               
               
                   
                 define the COBRA period. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0587]    3.1.8 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN — 002 — 008—Existing COBRA Enrollment 
         [0588]    3.1.8.1 Screen Name: COBRA Enrollment (See FIG. I- 9 ) 
         [0589]    3.1.8.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 COBRA 
                 Page sub Header 
                 COBRA qualifying 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 qualifying 
                   
                 Event 
               
               
                 Event 
               
               
                 Initial 
                 Text 
                 Initial COBRA effective 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 COBRA 
                   
                 date 
               
               
                 effective date 
               
               
                 Date 
                 Entry field 
                 Date 
                 Enter the initial effective date 
               
               
                 COBRA End 
                 Text 
                 COBRA End Date 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Date 
               
               
                 Period 
                 Entry field 
                 Period 
                 Enter the COBRA effective 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 period Default to the period 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 based on the qualifying event 
               
               
                 Reasons for 
                 Text 
                 Reasons for Term 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Term 
               
               
                 Reasons for 
                 Dynamic Text 
                 Reasons for Term 
                 Reasons for Term based on the 
               
               
                 Term 
                   
                   
                 term reasons provided 
               
               
                 Term Date 
                 Text 
                 Term Date 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Term Date 
                 Dynamic text 
                 Term Date 
                 Display the term date of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 member 
               
               
                 Where would 
                 Text 
                 Where would you like 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 you like the 
                   
                 the bills to be sent 
               
               
                 bills to be sent 
               
               
                 Where would 
                 Check Box 
                 Where would you like 
                 Check if the bill is to be sent to 
               
               
                 you like the 
                   
                 the bills to be sent 
                 the group or the member 
               
               
                 bills to be sent 
               
               
                 Is member 
                 Text 
                 Is member signature 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 signature 
                   
                 verified 
               
               
                 verified 
               
               
                 Is member 
                 Check box 
                 Is member signature 
                 Check if signature is verified 
               
               
                 signature 
                   
                 verified 
               
               
                 verified 
               
               
                 Line of 
                 HTML Table 
                 Line of Coverage 
                 Table to display the Member 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                   
                 Selection Table 
                 names and the Line of coverage 
               
               
                 Selection 
                   
                   
                 check boxes for picking the line 
               
               
                 Table 
                   
                   
                 of coverage for each COBRA 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 members 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                 Check Box 
                 Coverage Selection 
                 Check box to select the line of 
               
               
                 Selection 
                   
                   
                 coverage 
               
               
                 Show 
                 HTML button 
                 Show Coverage Choice 
                 Button to show the coverage 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                   
                   
                 choice for each line of coverage 
               
               
                 Choice 
                   
                   
                 based on the check box/boxes 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 checked. 
               
               
                 Continue 
                 HTML Button 
                 Continue 
                 Button to save the data and lead 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 to the next screen for showing 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the summary and selection of 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Benefit level offered by carriers 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 (Screen 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_009) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0590]    3.1.8.3 Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Date 
                 Default to the date next to the term date. 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Allow for making changes based on 
                 “Date cannot be prior to the 
               
               
                   
                 authorization 
                 term date. Please enter the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 valid date” 
               
               
                 Period 
                 Default to the period based on the 
                 none 
               
               
                   
                 Qualifying events. Allow to change 
               
               
                   
                 based on authorization 
               
               
                 Where would you 
                 Check the option for billing, Whether to 
                 none 
               
               
                 like the bills to be 
                 the group or the member 
               
               
                 sent 
               
               
                 Is member signature 
                 Check if signature is verified 
                 none 
               
               
                 verified 
               
               
                 Line of Coverage 
                 Table to show the Line of coverage 
                 None 
               
               
                 Selection Table 
                 against each member for picking the 
               
               
                   
                 option. The Line of coverage displayed is 
               
               
                   
                 based on the line of coverage selected by 
               
               
                   
                 the primary group. 
               
               
                   
                 Note: The table would display the 
               
               
                   
                 Member name in the following priority. 
               
               
                   
                 Employee as primary member 
               
               
                   
                 Spouse as the next member 
               
               
                   
                 Other members would be listed based on 
               
               
                   
                 the age. 
               
               
                 Check if member is 
                 This is check if the member is not opting 
                 None 
               
               
                 not enrolling for 
                 for the COBRA 
               
               
                 COBRA 
               
               
                 Coverage Selection 
                 Check Box to pick any combination of 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 coverage&#39;s for all the member for this 
               
               
                   
                 specific COBRA group 
               
               
                 Show Coverage 
                 On click of the Coverage choice system 
                 None 
               
               
                 Choice 
                 should identify the coverage choice 
               
               
                   
                 based on the options checked. Whether 
               
               
                   
                 member only, member and spouse etc. 
               
               
                 Continue 
                 On clicking the continue button saves the 
                 Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 data and leads to the page 
                 “Are you sure to continue” 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_009 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0591]    3.1.9 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN — 002 — 009—Primary Member Information 
         [0592]    3.1.9.1 Screen Name: Primary Member Information (See FIG. I- 10 )
       Note: This screen is pre filled with the employee information available in the employee master for all the members and the dependents belonging to this employee. Changes can be made to the information as applicable.       
 
         [0594]    3.1.9.2 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Main Address 
                 Text 
                 Main Address 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Street Address 
                 Entry field 
                 Street Address 
                 Enter the street address 
               
               
                 Suite/Apts. 
                 Text 
                 Suite/Apts. 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Suite/Apts. 
                 Entry Field 
                 Suite/Apts. 
                 Enter the suite/apts. number 
               
               
                 City 
                 Text 
                 City 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 City 
                 Entry Field 
                 City 
                 Enter the city name 
               
               
                 State 
                 Text 
                 State 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 State 
                 Drop Down List 
                 State 
                 List all the state in US 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Text 
                 ZIP 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Entry Field 
                 ZIP 
                 Enter zip code 
               
               
                 Service Area 
                 Text 
                 Service Area 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Service Area 
                 Entry Field 
                 Service Area 
                 Shows the Service Area based 
               
               
                   
                 (uneditable) or list 
                   
                 on the ZIP code typed 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Show list if the ZIP has 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 multiple service area 
               
               
                 County 
                 Text 
                 County 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 County 
                 Entry Field 
                 County 
                 Display the county name based 
               
               
                   
                 (uneditable) 
                   
                 on the zip and service area 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 selected 
               
               
                 Preferred mode 
                 Text 
                 Preferred mode of 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 of 
                   
                 correspondence 
               
               
                 correspondence 
               
               
                 Mode of 
                 Drop Down List 
                 Mode of 
                 List the mode of 
               
               
                 correspondence 
                   
                 correspondence 
                 communication, USPS, FAX, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 email 
               
               
                 Home Phone 
                 Text 
                 Home Phone number 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 number 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Entry Field 
                 Phone 
                 To enter phone number 
               
               
                 Extension 
                 Entry Field 
                 Extension 
                 To enter extension number 
               
               
                 Home FAX No. 
                 Text 
                 Home FAX No. 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 FAX 
                 Entry Field 
                 FAX 
                 To enter FAX number 
               
               
                 Extension 
                 Entry Field 
                 Extension 
                 To enter extension number 
               
               
                 E-Mail Address 
                 Text 
                 E-Mail Address 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 E-mail Address 
                 Entry field 
                 Email Address 
                 Enter email address 
               
               
                 Alternate 
                 Text 
                 Alternate Address 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Address 
               
               
                 Street Address 
                 Text 
                 Street Address 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Street Address 
                 Entry field 
                 Street Address 
                 Enter the street address 
               
               
                 Suite/Apts./ 
                 Text 
                 Suite/Apts./PO Box # 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 PO Box # 
               
               
                 Suite/Apts./ 
                 Entry Field 
                 Suite/Apts./PO Box # 
                 Enter the suite/apts. number 
               
               
                 PO Box # 
               
               
                 City 
                 Text 
                 City 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 City 
                 Entry Field 
                 City 
                 Enter the city name 
               
               
                 State 
                 Text 
                 State 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 State 
                 Drop Down List 
                 State 
                 List all the state in US 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Text 
                 ZIP 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Entry Field 
                 ZIP 
                 Enter zip code 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 HTML Reset 
                 Cancel 
                 To cancel the operation and 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 reset for new selection 
               
               
                 Continue 
                 HTML Submit 
                 Continue 
                 To save the data gathered in 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                   
                 this screen and continue to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 next screen 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_010 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0595]    3.1.9.3 Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Street Address 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Suite/Apts. 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 City 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 State 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Service Area 
                 Should pick up the service area based 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 on the Zip code number typed in the 
               
               
                   
                 above ZIP entry field from the 
               
               
                   
                 database 
               
               
                   
                 If there are multiple service area then 
               
               
                   
                 it should list the service area for 
               
               
                   
                 picking up the service area. 
               
               
                 County 
                 Show the county name based on the 
                 none 
               
               
                   
                 ZIP code and Service area 
               
               
                   
                 combination 
               
               
                 Mode of 
                 List mode of communications like 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                 Communication 
                 USPS, FAX, Email and others. If the 
                 “Please choose the mode of 
               
               
                   
                 option selected is Email then the 
                 communication” 
               
               
                   
                 Email address field cannot be blank. 
               
               
                   
                 Default Option should be-- 
               
               
                   
                 choose one --. 
               
               
                   
                 If none is selected should throw error 
               
               
                   
                 message. 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Extension 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 FAX 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Extension 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 E-mail Address 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Street Address 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Suite/Apts. 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 City 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 State 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Refer Document No. 
                 Refer Document No. 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Reset Button 
                 To reset the value in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Entry Field to its previous 
               
               
                   
                   
                 state as was on loading the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 page 
               
               
                 Continue 
                 Should function with Enter Key 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Cursor Positioned on the “Continue” 
                 “The value entered for the 
               
               
                   
                 button or on Mouse Click. 
                 FIELD NAME is erroneous. 
               
               
                   
                 Check for all the validation on the 
                 Please enter valid values._” 
               
               
                   
                 fields 
                 “Please choose the mode of 
               
               
                   
                 If any data type error throw error 
                 communication” 
               
               
                   
                 message. 
               
               
                   
                 Allows blank entry 
               
               
                   
                 On Success Leads to the next page 
               
               
                   
                 for filling further information on the 
               
               
                   
                 employee. 
               
               
                   
                 Screen 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_010 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0596]    3.1.10 User Interface Id: BPI_SCR_EN — 002 — 010—Existing Coverage Information 
         [0597]    3.1.10.1 Screen Name: Coverage Information (See FIG. I- 11 ) 
         [0598]    3.1.10.2 Element Name, Element Type, Label &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Benefit Level 
                 HTML Table 
                 Benefit Level (carrier 
                 Table to display all the 
               
               
                 (carrier 
                   
                 Selection) 
                 Members in the row and The 
               
               
                 Selection) 
                   
                   
                 Benefit level selection option in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the Columns. 
               
               
                 Member name 
                 Link 
                 Member name 
                 Provide feature to edit the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 member information by clicking 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 this link 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                 HTML ROW 
                 Coverage Choice 
                 The row get pre populated based 
               
               
                 Choice 
                   
                   
                 on the choice made in the screen 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_009 
               
               
                 Benefit Level 
                 Link 
                 Benefit Level Name 
                 Link to the carrier selection for 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                   
                 the specific line of coverage if 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 not available in the ZIP and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 service area of the Primary 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 member. 
               
               
                 PCP info 
                 Link 
                 PCP info (Available) 
                 Link to edit the PCP info of the 
               
               
                 (Available) 
                   
                   
                 individual members as 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 applicable. 
               
               
                 COBRA 
                 HTML Button 
                 COBRA Summary 
                 Button to click for saving the 
               
               
                 Summary 
                   
                   
                 date and navigating to the next 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 page for displaying COBRA 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 summary/missing information 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 HTML reset 
                 Cancel 
                 Button to reset to the state as 
               
               
                   
                 button 
                   
                 was on loading the page. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0599]    3.1.10.3 Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Benefit Level 
                 Should have column header and each 
                 None 
               
               
                 (carrier 
                 subsequent row should be identified by 
               
               
                 Selection) 
                 alternate color combinations. I.e. First 
               
               
                   
                 row should have color ‘x’ and the next 
               
               
                   
                 row should have color ‘y’. The next row 
               
               
                   
                 should have color ‘x’ again and so on. The 
               
               
                   
                 size of any text inside any cell should be 
               
               
                   
                 wrapped if the text becomes too long. 
               
               
                   
                 The Header and the Left Column should 
               
               
                   
                 be distinguishable. 
               
               
                 Member name 
                 This is a link to edit the member 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 information when on change or edit 
               
               
                   
                 mode. 
               
               
                 PCP Info 
                 This is a link to edit the PCP information 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 for the specific member. If PCP 
               
               
                   
                 information is not available then on 
               
               
                   
                 clicking the link it allows to fill in the 
               
               
                   
                 PCP information for the specific line of 
               
               
                   
                 coverage. 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                 Displays the dynamic text based on the 
                 None 
               
               
                 Choice 
                 choices checked in the previous screen 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_004 
               
               
                 Benefit Level 
                 Default benefit level would that the 
                 None 
               
               
                 Selection 
                 employee selected when the status was 
               
               
                   
                 enrolled. 
               
               
                   
                 On clicking the Link show a minimized 
               
               
                   
                 window with option to select the benefit 
               
               
                   
                 level for the specific line of coverage. 
               
               
                   
                 Note the line of coverage is displayed 
               
               
                   
                 based on the Group options (i.e. only if 
               
               
                   
                 the group has selected the line of 
               
               
                   
                 coverage) 
               
               
                   
                 Also the benefit level (carrier) displayed 
               
               
                   
                 is based on the ZIP code/Service area of 
               
               
                   
                 the primary COBRA member. 
               
               
                   
                 Only if the prior Benefit level is not 
               
               
                   
                 available in the current ZIP/service are 
               
               
                   
                 of the primary member this is allowed to 
               
               
                   
                 be changed. 
               
               
                 COBRA 
                 On clicking the COBRA Summary 
                 Dialog Box: 
               
               
                 Summary 
                 button save the content of this page into 
                 “Are you 
               
               
                   
                 the repository and leads to the COBRA 
                 sure you 
               
               
                   
                 summary page to display the COBRA 
                 would like 
               
               
                   
                 missing information. Screen 
                 to continue” 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_002_006 
               
               
                   
                 This also does all the COBRA eligibility 
               
               
                   
                 checks prior to the display of summary 
               
               
                   
                 Page 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Resets to the state as was on loading the 
                 none 
               
               
                   
                 page. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0600]    Note: the rest of the flow is common for both new Business COBRA and the Existing member conversion to COBRA. 
         [0601]    Screen BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 006 followed by COBRA enrollment. 
         [0602]    3.2 Screen Flow: 
         [0603]    Screen Flow Diagram for COBRA Enrollment (See FIG. I- 12 ) 
       4 Business Rule Mapping 
       [0604]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Activity 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 New Business COBRA (NB brings 
                 Need to know initial COBRA effective date 
               
               
                   
                 in COBRA) 
                 Need to have system calculate COBRA end date (18 mo, 36 mo, or 
               
               
                   
                   
                 other) based on Term Reason (Qualifying events) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 For system to do this we need to have the following data captured 
               
               
                   
                   
                 during the New Business COBRA Enrollment 
               
               
                   
                   
                 a) Initial Effective date 
               
               
                   
                   
                 b) Qualifying events 
               
               
                   
                 COBRA coverage 
                 COBRA coverage has no lapse of time from the date of term &amp; 
               
               
                   
                   
                 COBRA enrollment 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Exception: Death 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Main subscribers coverage is terminated date of death and not the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 end of the month: qualified beneficiaries (i.e. spouse/child) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 effective date of COBRA is the day after the members death 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Note: Since the COBRA coverage has no lapse of time it should be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 basically effective from the day following the term date what ever 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be the reasons. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Normal terms are always done on the end of the Month. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Death is done on the day of the death. 
               
               
                   
                 COBRA Election 
                 60 days to elect COBRA coverage from the time of COBRA 
               
               
                   
                   
                 notification letter. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 60 days is based off the; 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Date that we are notified of the termination (Postmark date for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 termination) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 OR 
               
               
                   
                   
                 The termination date 
               
               
                   
                   
                 WHICHEVER IS LATER. The decision is to be made based on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 manual review by GMS personnel. 
               
               
                   
                 COBRA Election for Federal 
                 If a FED COBRA group, we need to include an additional 14 days 
               
               
                   
                 COBRA 
                 from termination notification date because FED Employers have 14 
               
               
                   
                   
                 days to notify their employees of their rights after which they notify 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the plan administrator/Pac Advantage). The decision is to be made 
               
               
                   
                   
                 based on manual review by GMS personnel. 
               
               
                   
                 COBRA Premium Dues 
                 COBRA members initial premium (all premiums from effective 
               
               
                   
                   
                 date to current) must be made/mailed/postmarked within 45 days 
               
               
                   
                   
                 from the COBRA election date (the date the application is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 postmarked) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If payment is not MADE within this time frame, the COBRA 
               
               
                   
                   
                 coverage is termed flat (effective date). Any partial premium 
               
               
                   
                   
                 payments made will be reimbursed. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Provide over ride for 45 th  day rule (ACL) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (This override needs to be available upon creating the COBRA) 
               
               
                   
                 COBRA Employee governed by 
                 If main Employer group goes into possible term status or is termed, 
               
               
                   
                 Employer (Groups) 
                 the COBRA will need to be notified and put in same status. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Employee will have the same coverage type, carrier &amp; co-pay as 
               
               
                   
                   
                 when termed (continue with exact coverage as before) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cannot add dependents that were not previously covered (until o/e 
               
               
                   
                   
                 or qualifying event) 
               
               
                   
                 Benefit Levels 
                 Benefit level cannot change. Optional benefits and medical offered 
               
               
                   
                   
                 by the group is not mandatory [Line of Coverage] 
               
               
                   
                 Possible extension of COBRA 
                 Social Security disability - coverage extended to a total of 29 month 
               
               
                   
                 coverage 
                 (11 mo. Extension) (all other term reasons apply) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 The main subscriber does not have to elect to extend the coverage 
               
               
                   
                   
                 for himself, just his dependents can elect to take the extension 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Age 60 prior to loss of employment &amp; worked for Employer for 5 
               
               
                   
                   
                 consecutive years - coverage extended until the Employee turns age 
               
               
                   
                   
                 65 (all other term reasons apply) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 The main subscriber does not have to elect to extend the coverage 
               
               
                   
                   
                 for himself, just his dependents can elect to take the extension 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Also there should be a facility to grant COBRA extension if 
               
               
                   
                   
                 applicable based on authority 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Qualifying Events 
                 Qualifying Beneficiaries 
                 Continuation period 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 TERMINATION_OF_EMPLOYMENT 
                 Employee, Spouse and Children 
                 18 
               
               
                 REDUCTION_OF_WORK_HOURS 
                 Employee, Spouse and Children 
                 18 
               
               
                 CAN_NO_LONGER_AFFORD_COVERAGE 
                 Employee, Spouse and Children 
                 18 
               
               
                 OBTAINED_COVERAGE_ELSE_WHERE 
                 Employee, Spouse and Children 
                 18 
               
               
                 DEATH 
                 Spouse and Children 
                 36 
               
               
                 ENTITLED_TO_MEDICARE 
                 Employee, Spouse and Children 
                 36 
               
               
                 FRAUD_OR_MISREPRESENTATION 
                 Employee, Spouse and Children 
                 36 
               
               
                 DPND_OBTAINED_COVERAGE_ELSEWHERE 
                 Employee, Spouse and Children 
                 18 
               
               
                 DIVORCE_OR_LEGAL_SEPARATION 
                 Employee, Spouse and Children 
                 36 
               
               
                 EMPLOYEE_CANNOT_AFFORD_SPOUSE_COVERAGE 
                 Spouse 
                 36 
               
               
                 DPND_DEATH 
                 None 
                 18 
               
               
                 DPND_ENTITLED_TO_MEDICARE 
                 Dependent Spouse and Children 
                 36 
               
               
                 DPND_FRAUD_OR_MISREPRESENTATION 
                 None 
                 36 
               
               
                 OVER_AGE_23 
                 Dependent Child 
                 18 
               
               
                 NO_LONGER_AN_ELIGIBLE_DEPENDENT 
                 Dependent Spouse and Children 
                 18 
               
               
                 NO_LONGER_A_DISABLED_CHILD 
                 Dependent Child 
                 18 
               
               
                 EMPLOYEE_CAN_NO_LONGER_AFFORD_CHILD_COVERAGE 
                 Child 
                 18 
               
               
                 OTHERS 
                 Employee, Spouse and Children 
                 36 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 There are other qualifying events, which are also considered while COBRA enrollment based on their Reason For Term. 
               
             
          
         
       
     
       5 User Role 
       [0605]    The respective level of user role can over rule the following missing information. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 User Role 
                 Level II, Level III, Level IV 
               
               
                 S. No., 
                 Missing Information 
                 Condition 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 SSN already exists 
                 Employee SSN already exists 
               
               
                 2 
                 SSN already exists. 
                 Dependent SSN already exists 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Benefit Partners INC 
     Process Specification 
     Functional Design Process Specification 
     Add On and Change 
     1. Introduction 
       [0606]    1.1. Purpose 
         [0607]    This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process. 
         [0608]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_EN 
                 Enrollment 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_EN_002 
                 Enrollment Add On 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0609]    Other Document Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Document ID 
                 Document Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN 
                 Functional Specification Document - 
               
               
                   
                 Enrollment 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_001 
                 Process Flow - New Business Enrollment 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_003 
                 Process Flow - COBRA Enrollment/Changes 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_005 
                 Process Flow - Termination/Reinstatement 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_RULEBOX 
                 RULE BOX for Add on and change 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0610]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [0611]    Process Flow and Description 
         [0612]    This process is used to make changes to the Existing groups/members or dependents or add a new member/dependent to the Group or employee based on the business rules associated with changes and “Add ON&#39;s”. 
         [0613]    2.1. Background 
         [0614]    2.2. Process Description
       The objective of the process       
 
         [0616]    2.3. Process Flow
       This process is used to make changes to the Existing groups/members or dependents or add a new member/dependent to the Group or employee based on the business rules associated with changes and “Add ON&#39;s”.       
 
         [0618]    2.4. User Interface Screens 
         [0619]    2.4.1. Screen ID&#39;s 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Screen ID (SID) 
                 Screen Name 
                 Corresponding HTML File Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Enrollment.addon.newemp.groupsearch 
                 GroupSearch 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/groupsearch 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.newemp.changerequest 
                 ChangeRequest 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/changerequest 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.newemp.groupgeneral 
                 EmployeeGeneral 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/addemployee 
               
               
                   
                 Info 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.newemp.employeecoverage 
                 EmployeeCoverage 
                 bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/employeecoverage 
               
               
                   
                 Info 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.newemp.dependent 
                 DependentGeneral 
                 bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/adddependent 
               
               
                   
                 Info 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.newemp.missing 
                 PreEnrollment 
                 bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/preenrollment 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.newemp.summary 
                 EnrollmentSummary 
                 bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/enrollmentsummary 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.newemp.confirmation 
                 Confirmation 
                 bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/confirmation 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.newemp.employeesearch 
                 Employee 
                 bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/employeesearch 
               
               
                   
                 Search 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.newemp.dependentsearch 
                 Dependent 
                 bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/newemp/dependentsearch 
               
               
                   
                 Search 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.employeesearch 
                 Employee 
                 bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/adddependent/employeesearch 
               
               
                   
                 Search 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.changerequest 
                 Change Request 
                 bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/adddependent/changerequest 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.dependent 
                 Dependent 
                 bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/adddependent/dependent 
               
               
                   
                 General Info 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.adddependentsearch 
                 Modify 
                 bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/adddependent/dependentsearch 
               
               
                   
                 dependent 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.missingforadddependent 
                 Pre-Enrollment 
                 bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/adddepedent/preenrollment 
               
               
                 Enrollment.addon.addconfirmation 
                 Confirmation 
                 bpi/cas/enrollment/addon/adddependent/confirmation 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.group.groupsearch 
                 Group Search 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/groupsearch 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.group.changerequest 
                 Change Request 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/changerequest 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.group.identifychanges 
                 Identify 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/identifychanges 
               
               
                   
                 Changes 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.group.general 
                 Group 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/generalinfo 
               
               
                   
                 GeneralInfo 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.group.billing 
                 Group Billing 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/billinginfo 
               
               
                   
                 Info 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.group.agent 
                 Agent Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/agentinfo 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.group.coverage 
                 Coverage Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/coverageinfo 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.group.missinginfo 
                 Missing Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/missinginfo 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.group.confirmation 
                 Confirmation 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/confirmation 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.group.groupmodifysearch 
                 Modify Search 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/group/groupmodifysearch 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.employee.employeesearch 
                 Employee 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/employeesearch 
               
               
                   
                 Search 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.employee.changerequest 
                 Change Request 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/changerequest 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.employee.identifychanges 
                 Identify 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/identifychanges 
               
               
                   
                 Changes 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.employee.individualemployee 
                 Individual 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/indivemployee 
               
               
                   
                 Employee 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.employee.individualbilling 
                 Individual 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/indivbilling 
               
               
                   
                 Billing 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.employee.individualcoverage 
                 Individual 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/indivcoverage 
               
               
                   
                 Coverage 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.employee.individualmissing 
                 Individual 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/indivmissing 
               
               
                   
                 Employee 
               
               
                   
                 Missing 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.employee.employeemodifysearch 
                 Modify Search 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/employeemodifysearch 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.employee.employeeconfirm 
                 Employee 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/employeeconfirm 
               
               
                   
                 Confirm 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.employee.employeegeneral 
                 Employee 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/employeegeneral 
               
               
                   
                 General Info 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.employee.employeecoverage 
                 Employee 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/employeecoverage 
               
               
                   
                 Coverage 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.employee.employeemissing 
                 Missing Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/employee/employeemissing 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.dependent.dependentsearch 
                 Dependent 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/dependent/dependentsearch 
               
               
                   
                 Search 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.dependent.changerequest 
                 Change Request 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/dependent/changerequest 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.dependent.identifychanges 
                 Identify 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/dependent/identifychanges 
               
               
                   
                 Changes 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.dependent.dependentgeneral 
                 Dependent 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/dependent/dependentgeneral 
               
               
                   
                 General 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.dependent.missinginfo 
                 Missing Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/dependent/missing info 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.dependent.dependentconfirm 
                 Confirmation 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/dependent/dependentconfirm 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.change.dependent.dependentmodify 
                 Modify Search 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/change/dependent/dependentmodify 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0620]    2.4.1.1. SID, Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0621]    2.4.1.1.1 SID: enrollment.addon.newemp.groupsearch 
         [0622]    2.4.1.1.1.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer BPI_CAS_FSD — 01—User Interface ID       
 
       :BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 012 
       [0624]    2.4.1.1.1.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer 3.1.13.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01 for the details.       
 
         [0626]    2.4.1.1.2 SID: enrollmentaddon.newemp.changerequest 
         [0627]    2.4.1.1.2.1 Screen Snap Shot 
         [0628]    2.4.1.1.2.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0629]    2.4.1.1.3 SID: enrollmentaddon.newemp.groupgeneral 
         [0630]    2.4.1.1.3.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 002—Group General of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0632]    2.4.1.1.3.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer 3.1.3.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01 for the details.       
 
         [0634]    2.4.1.1.4 SID: enrollment.addon.newemp.employeecoverage 
         [0635]    2.4.1.1.4.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 007—Employee Coverage of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0637]    2.4.1.1.4.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer 3.1.8.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01 for the details.       
 
         [0639]    2.4.1.1.5 SID: enrollment.addon.newemp.dependent 
         [0640]    2.4.1.1.5.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 008—Dependent of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0642]    2.4.1.1.5.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer 3.1.9.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01 for the details       
 
         [0644]    2.4.1.1.6 SID: enrollment.addon.newemp.missing 
         [0645]    2.4.1.1.6.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 010—Missing Information of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0647]    2.4.1.1.6.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.11.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0649]    2.4.1.1.7 SID: enrollmentaddon.newemp.summary 
         [0650]    2.4.1.1.7.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN 001 — 009—Enrollment Summary of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0652]    2.4.1.1.7.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0653]    Refer to 3.1.10.1 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01 
         [0654]    2.4.1.1.8 SID: enrollmentaddon.newemp.confirmation 
         [0655]    2.4.1.1.8.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 011—Enrollment Confirmation of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0657]    2.4.1.1.8.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.12.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0659]    2.4.1.1.9 SID: enrollmentaddon.newemp.employeesearch 
         [0660]    2.4.1.1.9.1 Screen Snap ShotElement Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 013—Employee Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0662]    2.4.1.1.9.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.14.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0664]    2.4.1.1.10 SID: enrollmentaddon.newemp.dependentsearch 
         [0665]    2.4.1.1.10.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 014—Dependent Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0667]    2.4.1.1.10.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.15.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0669]    2.4.1.1.11 SID: enrollment.addon.employeesearch 
         [0670]    2.4.1.1.11.1 Screen Snap Shot 
         [0671]    Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 013—Employee Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01 
         [0672]    2.4.1.1.11.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.14.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0674]    2.4.1.1.12 SID: enrollment.addon.changerequest 
         [0675]    2.4.1.1.12.1 Screen Snap Shot 
         [0676]    2.4.1.1.12.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0677]    2.4.1.1.13 SID: enrollment.addon.dependent 
         [0678]    2.4.1.1.13.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 008—Dependent of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0680]    2.4.1.1.13.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0681]    2.4.1.1.14 SID: enrollment.addon.adddependentsearch 
         [0682]    2.4.1.1.14.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 014—Dependent Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0684]    2.4.1.1.14.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.15.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0686]    2.4.1.1.15 SID: enrollment.addon.missingforadddependent 
         [0687]    2.4.1.1.15.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 010—Missing Information of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0689]    2.4.1.1.15.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.11.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0691]    2.4.1.1.16 SID: enrollment.addon.addconfirmation 
         [0692]    2.4.1.1.16.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 011—Enrollment Confirmation of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0694]    2.4.1.1.16.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.12.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0696]    2.4.1.1.17 Change Screen SID 
         [0697]    2.4.1.1.17.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01
           BPI_CAS_RULKEBOX   
               
 
         [0700]    2.4.1.1.17.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to User Interface ID BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01
           BPI_CAS_RULKEBOX   
               
 
         [0703]    2.4.2. Screen Flow 
         [0704]    (See FIG. I- 13 ) 
         [0705]    (See FIG. I- 14 ) 
         [0706]    (See FIG. I- 15 ) 
         [0707]    (See FIG. I- 16 ) 
         [0708]    (See FIG. I- 17 ) 
         [0709]    Change:—Group Change New Request 
         [0710]    (See FIG. I- 18 ) 
         [0711]    Change:—Group Modify Pending Changes 
         [0712]    (See FIG. I- 19 ) 
         [0713]    Change:—Employee Change New Request 
         [0714]    (See FIG. I- 20 ) 
         [0715]    Change:—Employee Modify Pending Changes 
         [0716]    (See FIG. I- 21 ) 
         [0717]    Change:—Dependent Change New Request 
         [0718]    (See FIG. I- 22 ) 
         [0719]    Change:—Dependent Modify Pending Changes 
         [0720]    (See FIG. I- 23 ) 
       3. Business Rule Mapping 
       [0721]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Activity 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Employer Add 
                 The rate for the employer is guaranteed for one year 
               
               
                 On 
                 (One year from the date of enrollment) Hence the 
               
               
                   
                 entire rates that is effective for the employer/group 
               
               
                   
                 needs to be effective for the new employees as well. 
               
               
                   
                 However the eligibility rules that is applicable for the 
               
               
                   
                 Employee at the time of enrollment. Counts for the 
               
               
                   
                 add-on employee can go more than 70 and up to 100 if 
               
               
                   
                 Small Employer Group (override based on ACL). If 
               
               
                   
                 Guaranteed association then there is no limit on the 
               
               
                   
                 employee count at any time. 
               
               
                 Process Add on 
                 Shows the missing information of the Add On 
               
               
                   
                 employee and emails the missing information to the 
               
               
                   
                 GMS rep. 
               
               
                 Process Add on 
                 On successful Add On the welcome mail is sent to the 
               
               
                   
                 Employer/Employee and cc to Agent. Billing 
               
               
                   
                 adjustment is made which would be handled in the 
               
               
                   
                 Finance Module. 
               
               
                 Process Add On 
                 Adding employee needs to check on the Waiting 
               
               
                 (waiting Period) 
                 Period. If the employee does not satisfy the waiting 
               
               
                   
                 period then it should send email to the GMS rep. Also 
               
               
                   
                 the employee effective date should default to the date 
               
               
                   
                 when the employee is actually eligible. If the 
               
               
                   
                 Employee satisfied the waiting period and is 60 days 
               
               
                   
                 past the waiting period then it should flag this as 
               
               
                   
                 missing information as this becomes a late 
               
               
                   
                 application, which needs clarification from the 
               
               
                   
                 employer before enrolling the employee. This 
               
               
                   
                 employee can be enrolled only with authorization. 
               
               
                   
                 The employee application form is not deemed as 
               
               
                   
                 “Late” if it is postmarked within 60 days from the 
               
               
                   
                 eligibility date. If it is postmarked within 60 days 
               
               
                   
                 from the eligibility date, the application is declined as 
               
               
                   
                 it is “Late”. 
               
               
                   
                 Late application can be enrolled only on the next 
               
               
                   
                 ROE. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0722]    Employee Add On (Adding Dependent) 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Activity 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Employee Add On 
                 The rate for the employer is guaranteed for one 
               
               
                   
                 year (One year form the date of enrollment) Hence 
               
               
                   
                 the entire rate that is effective for the employer/ 
               
               
                   
                 group needs to be effective for the new dependent 
               
               
                   
                 as well. However the eligibility of the Dependent is 
               
               
                   
                 base on the normal eligibility rules that is applicable 
               
               
                   
                 for the Dependent at the time of enrollment. 
               
               
                   
                 Coverage Choice to be manipulated by System 
               
               
                   
                 automatically. 
               
               
                 Process Add on 
                 Shows the missing information of the Add On 
               
               
                   
                 Dependent and emails the missing information to 
               
               
                   
                 the GMS rep. 
               
               
                 Process Add on 
                 On successful Add On the welcome mail is sent to 
               
               
                   
                 the Employer/Employee/Dependent and cc to 
               
               
                   
                 Agent. Billing adjustment is made which would be 
               
               
                   
                 handled in the Finance Module. 
               
               
                 General Rules 
                 If the employee has selected the Employee only 
               
               
                   
                 option as coverage choice then it needs to be 
               
               
                   
                 changed for adding a dependent. System would not 
               
               
                   
                 allow adding dependent with Employee only status. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Employer Change 
       [0723]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Activity 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Demographic 
                 Demographic change can include change in Company 
               
               
                 changes 
                 Name, Contact name, Address, Phone, Fax, Email, 
               
               
                   
                 Tax ID. All these change can be made and does not 
               
               
                   
                 affect the business rules except for transmission of 
               
               
                   
                 letter, email contacts 
               
               
                 Billing Changes 
                 All Billing changes are flag and email is sent to GMS 
               
               
                   
                 rep and Finance for Information. Billing changes 
               
               
                   
                 would effect the billing frequency or the mode of 
               
               
                   
                 payment (EFT, Credit Card or Check) 
               
               
                 Waiting Period 
                 Change in the waiting period would affect the 
               
               
                 Change 
                 Employee Eligibility criteria for all add on 
               
               
                   
                 employees, going forward, as the change may be. 
               
               
                   
                 Change in the Employee type for the waiting period 
               
               
                   
                 consideration would also affect the Employee 
               
               
                   
                 Eligibility for the New Employees ‘Add-On’, going 
               
               
                   
                 forward. 
               
               
                   
                 Waiting period would be based on the Employer 
               
               
                   
                 Effective date. 
               
               
                   
                 Effective date for changing the Waiting period should 
               
               
                   
                 default to the 1 st  of the following month. 
               
               
                   
                 Waiting period can be changed only once from the 
               
               
                   
                 date of enrollment (effective date) to one-year cycle 
               
               
                   
                 for the employer. 
               
               
                   
                 If the waiting period changes are more than once in 
               
               
                   
                 the calendar year for the employer. This is to be 
               
               
                   
                 notified to the GMS rep and only the authorized 
               
               
                   
                 person can override this and allow for waiting period 
               
               
                   
                 change beyond 1 in employer anniversary date (one 
               
               
                   
                 year cycle). 
               
               
                 Employer 
                 Contribution would be based on the Employer 
               
               
                 Contribution 
                 Effective date. 
               
               
                   
                 Effective date for changing the Contribution should 
               
               
                   
                 default to the 1 st  of the following month. 
               
               
                   
                 Contribution can be changed only twice from the date 
               
               
                   
                 of enrollment (effective date) to one-year cycle for the 
               
               
                   
                 employer. 
               
               
                   
                 If the Contribution changes are more than once in the 
               
               
                   
                 calendar year for the employer. This is to be notified 
               
               
                   
                 to the GMS rep and only the authorized person can 
               
               
                   
                 override this and allow for contribution change 
               
               
                   
                 beyond 1 in employer calendar year. 
               
               
                   
                 Note: Effective dates for Contribution changes 
               
               
                   
                 should be 1 st  following month if the billing cycle 
               
               
                   
                 has not completed. 
               
               
                   
                 If the billing cycle is complete then it should be 
               
               
                   
                 effective the next billing cycle. I.e. 1 st  of the month 
               
               
                   
                 following the next month. 
               
               
                 Option benefits 
                 a) Medical: No change allowed. 
               
               
                 Changes 
                 b) Dental Can be added only during ROE cycle. 
               
               
                   
                 Can be dropped any time. Note if dental is 
               
               
                   
                 dropped then it can be added in the ROE 
               
               
                   
                 following 12 month from the date of dropping the 
               
               
                   
                 dental plan. 
               
               
                   
                 c) Vision and CAM: Can be added and dropped any 
               
               
                   
                 time. Note if an optional benefit is dropped then 
               
               
                   
                 it can be added in the ROE following 12 month 
               
               
                   
                 from the date of dropping the optional benefit. 
               
               
                   
                 d) This is to be notified to the GMS rep and only the 
               
               
                   
                 authorized person can override this. 
               
               
                 Employee Counts 
                 Can be changed only at next ROE cycle. 
               
               
                 (Number of 
               
               
                 employee) 
               
               
                 COBRA 
                 Can Change any time but will effective from 1 st  of the 
               
               
                   
                 monthly only 
               
               
                   
                 If this changes then any existing COBRA with this 
               
               
                   
                 group will change accordingly and automatically, 1 st   
               
               
                   
                 of the month. 
               
               
                   
                 Should trigger automatic transmission 
               
               
                 TEFRA 
                 Can be change any time but will be effective from 1 st   
               
               
                   
                 of the month only. 
               
               
                   
                 Transmit record to the carrier only if the employee is 
               
               
                   
                 65+ 
               
               
                 Part time 
                 Can be change only during open enrollment or Re 
               
               
                 coverage/ 
                 qualification and open enrollment. But should allow 
               
               
                 Domestic partner 
                 for overriding this feature based on authority. 
               
               
                   
                 Note: Any over riding function should trigger auto 
               
               
                   
                 email to the concerned GMS rep for making the 
               
               
                   
                 changes based on their authority 
               
               
                 Agent Change 
                 This triggers a new process flow. (Refer process flow 
               
               
                   
                 diagram FIG. 4.) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0724]    Note: For all changes effective date will be defaulted based on POST MARK DATE, If POST MARK date is lesser than 15th Day of month then Effective date will be 1st day of next month else it will be 1st day of next of the next month 
       4. User Role 
       [0725]    The respective level of user role can over rule the following missing information. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 User Role 
                 Level II, Level III, Level IV 
               
               
                   
                 S. No., Missing Information 
                 Condition 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 1 SSN already exists. 
                 Employee 
               
               
                   
                 2 SSN already exists. 
                 Dependent 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Employee, Group and Dependent Changes (w.r.t. Current Date) 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 User Role 
                 Condition 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Level I 
                 Reinstatement date is with in 30 days prior or later 
               
               
                   
                 Level II 
                 Reinstatement date is with in 30 days prior or later 
               
               
                   
                 Level III 
                 Reinstatement date is with in 60 days prior or later. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Process Specification 
     ROE/OE Process 
     1. Introduction 
       [0726]    1.1. Purpose 
         [0727]    The purpose of this document is to describe the process of ROE/OE Process. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process. 
         [0728]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_EN 
                 Enrollment 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_EN_004 
                 Enrollment - ROE 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0729]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0730]    1.4. Document Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Document ID 
                 Document Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN 
                 Functional Specification Document - 
               
               
                   
                 Enrollment 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_001 
                 Process Flow - New Business Enrollment 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_002 
                 Process Flow - Enrollment Changes/Add-On 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_003 
                 Process Flow - COBRA Enrollment/Changes 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_005 
                 Process Flow - Termination/Reinstatement 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [0731]    2.1. Background
       Once a year, on the anniversary date of a group&#39;s enrollment in PacAdvantage (or for some, its July 1st, not their anniversary date), the group&#39;s participation, contribution and qualification is reviewed. This review is to ensure that the group meets the qualification requirement. The main objective of this process is to review these criteria and re qualify as needed, notify them of rate changes and provide an opportunity for employees of the group to make changes to their enrollment.   This process is identified as Re-qualification and open enrollment. Also there is another process associated with this called as open enrollment where in the group has the privilege to make the changes to the plan, waiting period etc.   The difference between the two processes is that for re-qualification the Group has to under go the eligibility check to qualify for their next term.   For open enrollment the group need not re qualify and under go the eligibility checks.   The group should already have been enrolled with the PacAdvantage and have no termination date for the ROE to be done.       
 
         [0737]    2.2. Process Description
       The objective of the ROE/OE Process is to:
           Annual Re qualification or open enrollment form filled by the Employer   Open Enrollment Change form completed by employee, if applicable   Employee Enrollment form(s) completed by employee, if applicable   Dependent Enrollment fonn(s) completed by employee, if applicable   
           The following are the other requirements that will be supported and constraints on the proposed system:
           1) The system has to initiate ROE/OE process 3 months prior to the actual anniversary date for the specific group. This process needs to be initiated by GMS personnel.   2) System has to pick up the Groups for ROE based on the rules defined below:   Group Size: less than or equal to 4—All the groups needs to be re-qualified.   Group Size: 5 to 9-10% of the Group needs to be re-qualified   Group Size: greater than or equal to 10-1% of the group needs to be re-qualified.   3) System has to randomly pick up the groups based on the above rules for ROE based on random generator algorithm.   4) All other Group that is a part of ROE and OE needs to have their open enrollment processed.   5) Also their needs to be a facility to have manual OE process wherein the Employee or Employees are manually picked for ROE or OE process. Manual OE is usually performed based on searching the Employee based on line of coverage and plan.   6) There needs to be a feature to Finalize the ROE or OE for all the groups that have the same ROE/OE cycle.   
               
 
         [0753]    2.3. Process Flow 
         [0754]    Process for ROE/OE 
         [0755]    The process starts after manual initiation
       1) Identify the group that has their anniversary date 3 months hence.   2) Based on the group size identify if the group needs to be re-qualified.   3) Randomly pick up the group for re-qualification   4) If the group is not picked for re-qualification then the group only needs to have open enrollment.   5) Send ROE/OE packets to mail house. The packet includes the Agent Packet and the group packet.   6) Also sent the packets to the COBRA members of the existing group.   7) Send reminder for the ROE/OE every month.   8) Receive the ROE/OE packets completed by the Group and enter into the system.   9) Follow up for missing information   10) Convey the Group/Agent about the ROE status on completion of the process.       
 
         [0766]    Note the screens for entry of data for the ROE/OE processes are similar to the Group/Employee/Dependent Changes screen. However for the ROW/OE process the status would be identified as ROE process. 
         [0767]    Process Flow Diagram—ROE process (See FIG. i- 24 ) 
       3. User Interface 
       [0768]    3.1. User Interface Screens 
         [0769]    3.1.1. Screen ID&#39;s 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Screen ID (SID) 
                 Screen Name 
                 Corresponding HTML File Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 enrollment.roe.groupsearch 
                 Group Search 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/groupsearch 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.request 
                 Group Request 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/request 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.identifygroupchange 
                 Identify Group Change 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/identifygroupchange 
               
               
                   
                 Request 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.groupgeneral 
                 Group General Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/groupgeneral 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.groupbilling 
                 Group Billing Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/groupbilling 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.groupagent 
                 Group Agent Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/groupagent 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.agentsearch 
                 Agent Search 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/agentsearch 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.groupcoverage 
                 Group Coverage Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/groupcoverage 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.employeesearch 
                 Employee Search 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/employeesearch 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.identifyemployeechange 
                 Identify Employee 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/identifyemployeechange 
               
               
                   
                 Change Request 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.employeegeneral 
                 Employee General Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/addemployee 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.employeecoverage 
                 Employee Coverage Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/employeecoverage 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.dependentsearch 
                 Dependent Search 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/dependentsearch 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.identifydependentchange 
                 Identify Dependent 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/identifydependentchange 
               
               
                   
                 Change Request 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.dependentgeneral 
                 Dependent General 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/adddependent 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.groupsummary 
                 Group Summary 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/enrollmentsummary 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.groupmissing 
                 Group Missing Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/preenrollment/ 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.groupconfirm 
                 Group Confirm 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/groupconfirm 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.individualemployeesearch 
                 Indiv Employee Search/ 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivemployeesearch 
               
               
                   
                 Indiv Group Search 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.indivemployeerequest 
                 Indiv Employee Request 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivemployeerequest 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.identifyindivemployee 
                 Identify Indiv Employee 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/identifyindivemployeechange 
               
               
                 change 
                 Change Request 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.individualemployeegeneral 
                 Indiv Employee General 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivemployee 
               
               
                   
                 Info 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.individualbilling 
                 Indiv Billing Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivbilling 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.individualagent 
                 Indiv Agent Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivagent 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.individualagentsearch 
                 Indiv Agent Search 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivagent 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.individualemployeecoverage 
                 Indiv Coverage Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivcoverage 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.individualdpendentsearch 
                 Indiv Dependent Search 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivdependentsearch 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.identifyindivdependent 
                 Identify indiv Dependent 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/identifyindivdependentchange 
               
               
                 change 
                 Change Request 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.individualdependentgeneral 
                 Indiv Dependent General 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivdependent/ 
               
               
                   
                 Info 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.individualsummary 
                 Indiv Enrollment 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivenrollmentsummary 
               
               
                   
                 Summary 
               
               
                 enrollment.roe.individualmissing 
                 Indiv Pre Enrollment 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/indivpreenrollment 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.searchcobra 
                 COBRA Search 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/cobraroesearch 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.request 
                 COBRA ROE/OE 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/request 
               
               
                   
                 Process Request 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.identify 
                 Identify COBRA ROE/ 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/request 
               
               
                 changes 
                 OE Change Request Info 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.general 
                 COBRA General info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/generalinfo 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.billing 
                 COBRA Billing Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/billinginfo 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.coverage 
                 COBRA Coverage Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/coverageinfo 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.dependent 
                 COBRA Dependent Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/dependentinfo 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.missing 
                 COBRA Missing Info 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/missinginfo 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.confirmation 
                 COBRA Confirmation 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/cobraroe/new/confirmation 
               
               
                 Enrollment.roe.manualroe 
                 ROE/OE Process 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/manualroe 
               
               
                 Enrollment.roe.roetransfer 
                 ROE/OE Transfer 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/roe/roetransfer 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0770]    3.1.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0771]    3.1.2.1. SID: enrollment.roe.groupsearch 
         [0772]    3.1.2.1.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 012—Group Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0774]    3.1.2.1.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.13.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0776]    3.1.2.2. SID: enrollment.roe.request 
         [0777]    3.1.2.2.1 Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 25 ) 
         [0778]    3.1.2.3. SID: enrollment.roe.identifygroupchange 
         [0779]    3.1.2.3.1 Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 26 ) 
         [0780]    3.1.2.4. SID: enrollment.roe.groupgeneral 
         [0781]    3.1.2.4.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 002—Group General of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0783]    3.1.2.4.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.3.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0785]    3.1.2.5. SID: enrollment.roe.groupbilling 
         [0786]    3.1.2.5.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 003—Billing of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0788]    3.1.2.5.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.4.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0790]    3.1.2.6. SID: enrollment.roe.groupagent 
         [0791]    3.1.2.6.1 Screen Snap Shot 
         [0792]    Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 005—Agent of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01 
         [0793]    3.1.2.6.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.6.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0795]    3.1.2.7. SID: enrollment.roe.agentsearch 
         [0796]    3.1.2.7.1 Screen Snap Shot 
         [0797]    3.1.2.7.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0798]    3.1.2.8. SID: enrollment.roe.groupcoverage 
         [0799]    3.1.2.8.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 004—Group Coverage of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0801]    3.1.2.8.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.5.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0803]    3.1.2.9. SID: enrollment.roe.employeesearch 
         [0804]    3.1.2.9.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 013—Employee Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0806]    3.1.2.9.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.14.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0808]    3.1.2.10. SID: enrollment.roe.identifyemployeechange 
         [0809]    3.1.2.10.1 Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 27 ) 
         [0810]    3.1.2.11. SID: enrollment.roe.employeegeneral 
         [0811]    3.1.2.11.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 006—Employee Information of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0813]    3.1.2.11.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.7.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0815]    3.1.2.12. SID: enrollment.roe.employeecoverage 
         [0816]    3.1.2.12.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 007—Employee Coverage of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0818]    3.1.2.12.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.8.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0820]    3.1.2.13. SID: enrollment.roe.dependentsearch 
         [0821]    3.1.2.13.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 014—Dependent Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0823]    3.1.2.13.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.15.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0825]    3.1.2.14. SID: enrollment.roe.identifydependentchange 
         [0826]    3.1.2.14.1 Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 28 ) 
         [0827]    3.1.2.15. SID: enrollment.roe.dependentgeneral 
         [0828]    3.1.2.15.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 008—Dependent of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0830]    3.1.2.15.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.9.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0832]    3.1.2.16. SID: enrollment.roe.groupsummary 
         [0833]    3.1.2.16.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 009—Enrollment Summary of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0835]    3.1.2.16.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.10.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0837]    3.1.2.17. SID: enrollment.roe.groupmissing 
         [0838]    3.1.2.17.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 010—Missing Information of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0840]    3.1.2.17.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0841]    Refer to 3.1.11.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01 
         [0842]    3.1.2.18. SID: enrollment.roe.groupconfinn 
         [0843]    3.1.2.18.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 011—Enrollment Confirmation of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0845]    3.1.2.18.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.12.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0847]    3.1.2.19. SID: enrollment.roe.individualemployeesearch 
         [0848]    3.1.2.19.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR — 001 — 013—Employee Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0850]    3.1.2.19.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.14.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0852]    3.1.2.20. SID: enrollment.roe.indivemployeerequest 
         [0853]    3.1.2.20.1 Screen Snap Shot 
         [0854]    3.1.2.20.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0855]    3.1.2.21. SID: enrollment.roe.identifyindivemployeechange 
         [0856]    3.1.2.21.1 Screen Snap Shot 
         [0857]    3.1.2.21.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0858]    3.1.2.22. SID: enrollment.roe.individualemployeegeneral 
         [0859]    3.1.2.22.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 006—Employee Information of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0861]    3.1.2.22.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.7.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0863]    3.1.2.23. SID: enrollment.roe.individualbilling 
         [0864]    3.1.2.23.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR — 001 — 003—Billing of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0866]    3.1.2.23.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.4.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0868]    3.1.2.24. SID: enrollment.roe.individualagent 
         [0869]    3.1.2.24.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 005—Agent of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0871]    3.1.2.24.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.6.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0873]    3.1.2.25. SID: enrollment.roe.individualagentsearch 
         [0874]    3.1.2.25.1 Screen Snap Shot 
         [0875]    3.1.2.25.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0876]    3.1.2.26. SID: enrollment.roe.individualemployeecoverage 
         [0877]    3.1.2.26.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 007—Employee Coverage of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0879]    3.1.2.26.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.8.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0881]    3.1.2.27. SID: enrollment.roe.individualdependentsearch 
         [0882]    3.1.2.27.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 014—Dependent Search of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0884]    3.1.2.27.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.15.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0886]    3.1.2.28. SID: enrollment.roe.identifyindivdependentchange 
         [0887]    3.1.2.28.1 Screen Snap Shot 
         [0888]    3.1.2.28.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0889]    3.1.2.29. SID: enrollment.roe.individualdependentgeneral 
         [0890]    3.1.2.29.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN 001-008—Dependent of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0892]    3.1.2.29.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose.
       Refer to 3.1.9.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0894]    3.1.2.30. SID: enrollment.roe.individualsummary 
         [0895]    3.1.2.30.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 009—Enrollment Summary of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0897]    3.1.2.30.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.10.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0899]    3.1.2.31. SID: enrollmentroe.individualmissing 
         [0900]    3.1.2.31.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 010—Missing Information of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0902]    3.1.2.31.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.11.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0904]    3.1.2.32. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.searchcobra 
         [0905]    3.1.2.32.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to 3.1.1 Screen Shot: BPI_SCR_EN 002 — 001 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 02       
 
         [0907]    3.1.2.32.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 02       
 
         [0909]    3.1.2.33. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.request 
         [0910]    3.1.2.33.1 Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 29 ) 
         [0911]    3.1.2.34. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.identifychanges 
         [0912]    3.1.2.34.1 Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 30 ) 
         [0913]    3.1.2.35. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.general 
         [0914]    3.1.2.35.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to 3.8.1 Screen Shot: BPI_SCR_EN — 002 — 009 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 02       
 
         [0916]    3.1.2.35.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.8.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 02       
 
         [0918]    3.1.2.36. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.billing 
         [0919]    3.1.2.36.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 003—Billing of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0921]    3.1.2.36.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.4.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0923]    3.1.2.37. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.coverage 
         [0924]    3.1.2.37.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to 3.9.1 Screen Shot: BPI_SCR_EN 002 — 010 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 02       
 
         [0926]    3.1.2.37.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.9.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 02       
 
         [0928]    3.1.2.38. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.dependent 
         [0929]    3.1.2.38.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to 3.3.1 Screen Shot: BPI_SCR_EN — 002 — 003 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 02       
 
         [0931]    3.1.2.38.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.3.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 02       
 
         [0933]    3.1.2.39. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.missing 
         [0934]    3.1.2.39.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to 3.5.1 Screen Shot: BPI_SCR_EN 002 — 006 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 02       
 
         [0936]    3.1.2.39.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.5.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 02       
 
         [0938]    3.1.2.40. SID: bpi.enrollment.cobraroe.new.confirmation 
         [0939]    3.1.2.40.1 Screen Snap Shot
       Refer to User Interface ID: BPI_CAS_SCR_EN — 001 — 011—Enrollment Confirmation of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0941]    3.1.2.40.2 Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       Refer to 3.1.12.2 of BPI_CAS_FSD_EN — 01       
 
         [0943]    3.1.3. Screen Flow 
         [0944]    (See FIG. I- 31 ) 
         [0945]    (See FIG. I- 32 ) 
         [0946]    (See FIG. I- 33 ) 
       4. Business Rule Mapping 
       [0947]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Activity 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 ROE Process 
                 Identify the group randomly based on the Group 
               
               
                   
                 size for ROE. 
               
               
                 ROE validation 
                 All the eligibility rules that are applicable as 
               
               
                   
                 new business enrollment are applicable for the 
               
               
                   
                 ROE as well. 
               
               
                 Open Enrollment 
                 Open enrollment allows for making the changes 
               
               
                   
                 that are normally not possible during the normal 
               
               
                   
                 changes. 
               
               
                 Billing 
                 Bill in a normal way if the ROE/OE has a 
               
               
                   
                 completed status. Make the bill for the new 
               
               
                   
                 effective date. 
               
               
                   
                 If the ROE/OE has a status as pend then pend 
               
               
                   
                 the bill for the new effective date. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       5. User Role 
       [0948]    The respective level of user role can over rule the following missing information, 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 ROE OE SEG/Alternate/Indiv Group 
               
             
          
           
               
                 User Role 
                 Level II, Level III, Level IV 
               
               
                 S. No., Missing Information 
                 Condition 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 1 SSN already exists. 
                 Employee SSN already exists 
               
               
                 2 SSN already exists. 
                 Dependent SSN already exists 
               
               
                 3 Employer Tax Id already exists. 
                 Employer Tax Id already exists 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 ROE OE COBRA Group 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 User Role 
                 Level II, Level III, Level IV 
               
               
                   
                 S. No., Missing Information 
                 Condition 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 1 SSN already exists. 
                 Employee SSN already exists 
               
               
                   
                 2 SSN already exists. 
                 Dependent SSN already exists 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Process Specification 
     Termination Reinstatement 
     1. Introduction 
       [0949]    1.1. Purpose 
         [0950]    The purpose of this document is to identify the process associated with the business use case Termination and Reinstatement 
         [0951]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_EN 
                 Enrollment 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_EN_005 
                 Termination and Reinstatement 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0952]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [0953]    2.1. Background 
         [0954]    &lt;Brief Description of the Process&gt; 
         [0955]    2.2. Process Description
       Process Flow for Group Term   This process is used to terminate or reinstate the Group, Employee and or Dependent.   The  FIG. 1  shows the process flow for the group termination. The group can be termed broadly based on two reasons; Non-payment of Premium or by group request for termination. Non-payment of premium is an automated process and starts and completes the term process automatically. The employer request is a manual term process and the Group is termed manually.   Automated Term process initiates the Term Process. Letter is sent to the Group with 15 days notice for reinstatement. The system holds the status as “Term Pending” although the group believes they are completely termed. The reason for this is to prevent the sending of termination then reinstatement transmissions to the carriers; which causes confusion. The finance department then processes the term to completion if the payment is not received. Finance also has ability to override the term pend status based on authority.   Manual Term process is based on the request received from the group. All manual term process is notified to finance for necessary action. If the Group has a shortfall then the system notifies the finance department and finance processes the term. Term letter is send to the Group for paying through the balance premium. If the balance premium is paid then the finance department completes the term. If the balance is not paid then finance terms the group retrospectively.   If the Group has a refund due them then the system notifies the finance department and finance processes the refund and completes the term process.       
 
       Process Flow for Employee Term 
       [0000]    
       
         
           
             Employee term is based on the Employer request to terminate the employee based on certain reasons. Based on these reasons the employee is termed and all employees who are termed needs to be sent the COBRA packets for COBRA enrollment. Billing adjustments are made for the employee term in the next invoice generated. 
           
         
       
     
         [0963]    Process Flow for Dependent Term
       Dependent term is based on the Employer/Employee request to terminate the Dependent based on certain reasons. Based on these reasons the Dependent is termed and the termed Dependent are sent the COBRA packets for COBRA enrollment. Billing adjustments are made for the Dependent term in the next invoice generated for the Group.       
 
         [0965]    2.3. Process Flow
       Process flow description (See FIG. I- 34 )       
 
       3. User Interface 
       [0967]    3.1. User Interface Screens 
         [0968]    3.1.1. Screen ID&#39;s 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Corresponding HTML File 
               
               
                 Screen ID (SID) 
                 Screen Name 
                 Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 enrollment.termination.groupsearch 
                 Search Group for Termination 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/group/GroupSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.termination.grouptermination 
                 Group Termination Request 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/group/GroupTerminationRequest.jsp 
               
               
                 request 
               
               
                 enrollment.termination.groupprocess 
                 Group Termination Process 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/group/GroupProcessTermination.jsp 
               
               
                 termination 
               
               
                 enrollment.termination.grouptemination 
                 Group Termination 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/group/GroupTerminationConfirm.jsp 
               
               
                 confirmation 
                 Confirmation 
               
               
                 enrollment.termination.multiple 
                 Multiple Group Termination 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/group/ 
               
               
                 groupsearch 
                 Request 
                 MultipleGroupTerminationRequest.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.termination.multiple 
                 Multiple Group Termination 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/group/ 
               
               
                 groupterminationconfirm 
                 Confirmation 
                 MultipleGroupTerminationConfirm.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.termination.employee 
                 Search Employee for Termination 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/employee/EmployeeSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 search 
               
               
                 enrollment.termination.employee 
                 Employee Termination Request 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/employee/ 
               
               
                 terminationrequest 
                   
                 EmployeeTerminationRequest.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.termination.employee 
                 Employee Process Termination 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/employee/ 
               
               
                 processtermination 
                   
                 EmployeeProcessTermination.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.termination.employee 
                 Employee Termination 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/employee/ 
               
               
                 terminationconfirm 
                 Confirmation 
                 EmployeeTerminationConfirm.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.termination.dependent 
                 Search Dependent for 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/dependent/ 
               
               
                 search 
                 Termination 
                 DependentSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.termination.dependent 
                 Dependent Termination 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/dependent/ 
               
               
                 terminationrequest 
                 Request 
                 DependentTerminationRequest.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.termination.dependent 
                 Dependent Process Termination 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/dependent/ 
               
               
                 processtermination 
                   
                 DependentProcessTermination.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.termination.dependent 
                 Dependent Termination 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/termination/dependent/ 
               
               
                 terminationconfirm 
                 Confirm 
                 DependentTerminationConfirm.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.reinstatement.group 
                 Search Group for Reinstatement 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/group/GroupSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 search 
               
               
                 enrollment.reinstatement.group 
                 Group Reinstatement Request 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/group/GroupReinstatementRequest.jsp 
               
               
                 reinstatementrequest 
               
               
                 enrollment.reinstatement.group 
                 Group Process Reinstatement 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/group/GroupProcessReinstatement.jsp 
               
               
                 processreinstatement 
               
               
                 enrollment.reinstatement.group 
                 Group Reinstatement 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/group/GroupReinstatementConfirm.jsp 
               
               
                 reinstatementconfirm 
                 Confirmation 
               
               
                 enrollment.reinstatement.employee 
                 Search for Employee 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/employee/EmployeeSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 search 
                 Reinstatement 
               
               
                 enrollment.reinstatement.employee 
                 Employee Reinstatement 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/employee/ 
               
               
                 reinstatementrequest 
                 Request 
                 EmployeeReinstatementRequest.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.reinstatement.employee 
                 Employee Process 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/employee/ 
               
               
                 processreinstatement 
                 Reinstatement 
                 EmployeeProcessReinstatement.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.reinstatement.employee 
                 Employee Reinstatement 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/employee/ 
               
               
                 reinstatementconfirm 
                 Confirmation 
                 EmployeeReinstatementConfirm.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.reinstatement.dependent 
                 Search Dependent for 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/dependent/DependentSearch.jsp 
               
               
                 search 
                 Reinstatement 
               
               
                 enrollment.reinstatement.dependent 
                 Dependent Reinstatement 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/dependent/ 
               
               
                 reinstatementrequest 
                 Request 
                 DependentReinstatementRequest.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.reinstatement.dependent 
                 Dependent Process 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/dependent/ 
               
               
                 processreinstatement 
                 Reinstatement 
                 DependentProcessReinstatement.jsp 
               
               
                 enrollment.reinstatement.dependent 
                 Dependent Reinstatement 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/reinstatement/dependent/ 
               
               
                 reinstatementconfirm 
                 Confirmation 
                 DependentReinstatementConfirm.jsp 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0969]    3.1.1.1. SID, Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       SID: enrollment.termination.groupsearch   Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 35 )       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Group Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter Group Id 
               
               
                   
                 Group Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter Group Name 
               
               
                   
                 Phone Number 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter Phone Number 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.termination.groupterminationrequest 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 36 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Mode of 
                 Selection Box 
                 Entry Field for the Group Id. 
               
               
                 Request 
               
               
                 Postmark Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Date Received 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Date Received 
               
               
                 Authorized 
                 Selection Box 
                 Entry Field for the Authorized Contact 
               
               
                 Contact 
               
               
                 Requested 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Request Term Date 
               
               
                 Term Date 
               
               
                 Reason for 
                 Selection Box 
                 Select the Reason for Term 
               
               
                 Term 
               
               
                 Other Reason 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Other Reason 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.termination.groupprocesstermination 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 37 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Effective Term Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Group Id. 
               
               
                 Change Term Status 
                 Select Box 
                 Select Change Term Status 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.termination.groupterminationcontirm 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 38 ) 
             SID: enrollment.termination.multiplegroupsearch 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 39 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Postmark Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Date Received 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Date Received 
               
               
                 Requested 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Request Term Date 
               
               
                 Term Date 
               
               
                 Reason for 
                 Selection Box 
                 Select the Reason for Term 
               
               
                 Term 
               
               
                 Other Reason 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Other Reason 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.termination.multiplegroupterminationconfirm 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 40 ) 
             SID: enrollment.termination.employeesearch 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 41 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Group Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Group Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Group ID 
               
               
                 Employee 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee First 
               
               
                 First Name 
                   
                 Name 
               
               
                 Employee 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee Last 
               
               
                 Last Name 
                   
                 Name 
               
               
                 Employee Phone 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee Phone 
               
               
                 Number 
                   
                 Number 
               
               
                 Employee SSN 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee SSN 
               
               
                 Employee ID 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee ID 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.termination.employeeterminationrequest 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 42 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Mode of Request 
                 Selection Box 
                 Entry Field for the Group Id. 
               
               
                 Postmark Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Date Received 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Date Received 
               
               
                 Authorized Contact 
                 Selection Box 
                 Entry Field for the Authorized 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Contact 
               
               
                 Requested Term 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Request Term 
               
               
                 Date 
                   
                 Date 
               
               
                 Reason for Term 
                 Selection Box 
                 Select the Reason for Term 
               
               
                 Other Reason 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Other Reason 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.termination.employeeprocesstermination 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 43 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Effective Term Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Group Id. 
               
               
                 Chance Term Status 
                 Select Box 
                 Select Change Term Status 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.termination.employeeterminationconfirm 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 44 ) 
             SID: enrollment.termination.dependentsearch 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 45 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Employee First Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee 
               
               
                   
                   
                 First Name 
               
               
                 Employee Last Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Last Name 
               
               
                 Employee SSN 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee 
               
               
                   
                   
                 SSN 
               
               
                 Employee Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee Id 
               
               
                 Dependent First Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Dependent 
               
               
                   
                   
                 First Name 
               
               
                 Dependent Last Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Dependent 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Last Name 
               
               
                 Dependent SSN 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Dependent 
               
               
                   
                   
                 SSN 
               
               
                 Dependent Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Dependent Id 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.termination.dependentterminationrequest 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 46 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Mode of Request 
                 Selection Box 
                 Entry Field for the Group Id. 
               
               
                 Postmark Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Date Received 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Date Received 
               
               
                 Authorized Contact 
                 Selection Box 
                 Entry Field for the Authorized 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Contact 
               
               
                 Requested Term 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Request Term 
               
               
                 Date 
                   
                 Date 
               
               
                 Reason for Term 
                 Selection Box 
                 Select the Reason for Term 
               
               
                 Other Reason 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Other Reason 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.termination.dependentprocesstermination 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 47 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Effective Term Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Term Date. 
               
               
                 Change Term Status 
                 Select Box 
                 Select Change Term Status 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.termination.dependentterminationconfirm 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 48 ) 
             SID: enrollment.reinstatement.groupsearch 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 49 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Group Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter Group Id 
               
               
                   
                 Group Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter Group Name 
               
               
                   
                 Phone Number 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter Phone Number 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.reinstatement.groupreinstatementrequest 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 50 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Mode of Request 
                 Selection Box 
                 Entry Field for the Group Id. 
               
               
                 Postmark Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Date Received 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Date Received 
               
               
                 Authorized Contact 
                 Selection Box 
                 Entry Field for the Authorized 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Contact 
               
               
                 Reinstatement Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Request Rein 
               
               
                 Requested 
                   
                 Date 
               
               
                 Reason for 
                 Selection Box 
                 Select the Reason for 
               
               
                 Reinstatement 
                   
                 Reinstatement 
               
               
                 Other Reason 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Other Reason 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.reinstatement.groupprocessreinstatement 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 51 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Effective Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Date. 
               
               
                   
                 Change Status 
                 Select Box 
                 Select Change Status 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollmentreinstatementgroupreinstatementconfirm 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 52 ) 
             SID: enrollmentreinstatementemployeesearch 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 53 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Group Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Group Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Group ID 
               
               
                 Employee First Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee 
               
               
                   
                   
                 First Name 
               
               
                 Employee Last Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Last Name 
               
               
                 Employee Phone 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee 
               
               
                 Number 
                   
                 Phone Number 
               
               
                 Employee SSN 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee 
               
               
                   
                   
                 SSN 
               
               
                 Employee ID 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee ID 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.reinstatement.employeereinstatementrequest 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 54 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Mode of Request 
                 Selection Box 
                 Entry Field for the Group Id. 
               
               
                 Postmark Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Date Received 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Date Received 
               
               
                 Authorized Contact 
                 Selection Box 
                 Entry Field for the Authorized 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Contact 
               
               
                 Reinstatement Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Request Rein 
               
               
                 Requested 
                   
                 Date 
               
               
                 Reason for 
                 Selection Box 
                 Select the Reason for 
               
               
                 Reinstatement 
                   
                 Reinstatement 
               
               
                 Other Reason 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Other Reason 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.reinstatement.employeeprocessreinstatement 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 55 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Effective Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Date. 
               
               
                   
                 Change Status 
                 Select Box 
                 Select Change Status 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollmentreinstatementemployeereinstatementconfirm 
             Screen Snap Shot 
             SID: enrollment.reinstatement.dependentsearch 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 56 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Employee First Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee 
               
               
                   
                   
                 First Name 
               
               
                 Employee Last Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Last Name 
               
               
                 Employee SSN 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee 
               
               
                   
                   
                 SSN 
               
               
                 Employee Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Employee Id 
               
               
                 Dependent First Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Dependent 
               
               
                   
                   
                 First Name 
               
               
                 Dependent Last Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Dependent 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Last Name 
               
               
                 Dependent SSN 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Dependent 
               
               
                   
                   
                 SSN 
               
               
                 Dependent Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Dependent Id 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollmentreinstatement.dependentreinstatementrequest 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 57 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Mode of Request 
                 Selection Box 
                 Entry Field for the Group Id. 
               
               
                 Postmark Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Date Received 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Date Received 
               
               
                 Authorized Contact 
                 Selection Box 
                 Entry Field for the Authorized 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Contact 
               
               
                 Reinstatement Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Request Rein 
               
               
                 Requested 
                   
                 Date 
               
               
                 Reason for 
                 Selection Box 
                 Select the Reason for 
               
               
                 Reinstatement 
                   
                 Reinstatement 
               
               
                 Other Reason 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Other Reason 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.reinstatement.dependentprocessreinstatement 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 58 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Effective Date 
                 Entry Field 
                 Entry Field for the Date. 
               
               
                   
                 Change Status 
                 Select Box 
                 Select Change Status 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollmentreinstatement.dependentreinstatementconfinn 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 59 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [1022]    3.1.2. Screen Flow (See FIG. I- 60 ) 
       4. Business Rule Mapping 
       [1023]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Activity 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Term Process (request 
                 The person who requested the term should be the 
               
               
                 received from) 
                 designated contact person or agent assigned to 
               
               
                   
                 that group. Other persons are not authorized to 
               
               
                   
                 initiate the term request. 
               
               
                 Term Process 
                 On employer request the term process is initiated. 
               
               
                 (Manual) 
                 The term process should check the billing 
               
               
                   
                 status and the balance due or refund. If the 
               
               
                   
                 group has paid through and there is no 
               
               
                   
                 shortage or surplus then this process 
               
               
                   
                 should auto initiate the term process. Send 
               
               
                   
                 letters the Group, Employee and 
               
               
                   
                 dependent. Notify via mail to the GMS 
               
               
                   
                 rep if the group size is less than 15 and if 
               
               
                   
                 above 15 notify the Sales rep. 
               
               
                   
                 If there is a shortage then send a mail to 
               
               
                   
                 the finance and put the term status as term 
               
               
                   
                 pending. Finance should initiate follow up 
               
               
                   
                 for collecting the balance due and sent the 
               
               
                   
                 term letter and payment letter. On receipt 
               
               
                   
                 of payment term the Group. If the 
               
               
                   
                 Payment is not received then retro terms 
               
               
                   
                 the group. 
               
               
                   
                 If there is refund due to the group the 
               
               
                   
                 finance should process the refund and 
               
               
                   
                 initiate the term there after. 
               
               
                   
                 Note: GMS can process Term up to 30 days 
               
               
                   
                 (LEVEL I) 
               
               
                   
                 Term beyond 30 days-60 days can be 
               
               
                   
                 processed only by lead (LEVEL II) 
               
               
                   
                 Term extended beyond 60 days is based on 
               
               
                   
                 ultimate authority to a specified user (LEVEL 
               
               
                   
                 III AND IV) 
               
               
                 Term Process 
                 Automated term process is initiated if the group 
               
               
                 (Automated) 
                 does not pay the premium or there is shortage of 
               
               
                   
                 premium. Term letter is sent to the group on 32 
               
               
                   
                 day of non-receipt of payment and the Group is 
               
               
                   
                 given 15-day notice to repay. If the Group does 
               
               
                   
                 not pay within 32 + 15 days the finance should 
               
               
                   
                 finalize term based on authority. 
               
               
                 General Term rules 
                 If the group is termed then all the employees and 
               
               
                   
                 dependents for the group are termed. The 
               
               
                   
                 COBRA Members associated with the group 
               
               
                   
                 should also be termed. The term letter should 
               
               
                   
                 be sent to the entire member for the Group 
               
               
                   
                 including the COBRA group. EFT and auto 
               
               
                   
                 credit card deductions should stop on term. 
               
               
                 Term Process 
                 Dependent can be terminated based on various 
               
               
                   
                 reason provide for the employee termination. 
               
               
                   
                 All term should be effective end of the current 
               
               
                   
                 month or if the term is requested for the month 
               
               
                   
                 after the current month. 
               
               
                   
                 Dependent cannot be termed with past date 
               
               
                   
                 beyond 30 days. 
               
               
                   
                 Exception: 
               
               
                   
                 Death of the dependent. The dependent is termed 
               
               
                   
                 the on the day of the death. 
               
               
                 Term Rules 
                 Auto initiate Dependent terms if the age of the 
               
               
                   
                 dependent is 23 and the dependent other than 
               
               
                   
                 spouse or domestic partner are no longer eligible. 
               
               
                   
                 Also send the COBRA packet to the dependent if 
               
               
                   
                 termed. 
               
               
                 Billing Adjustment 
                 Make adjustment to the billing for the termed 
               
               
                   
                 dependent in the next billing cycle 
               
               
                 Term Process 
                 The person who requested the term should be 
               
               
                 (request received 
                 designated contact person. Other person are not 
               
               
                 from) 
                 authorized to initiate the term request. 
               
               
                 Term Process 
                 On employer request the term process is initiated. 
               
               
                 (Manual) 
                 The term process should check the billing 
               
               
                   
                 status and the balance due or refund. If the 
               
               
                   
                 group has paid through and there is no 
               
               
                   
                 shortage or surplus then this process 
               
               
                   
                 should auto initiate the term process. Send 
               
               
                   
                 letters the Group, Employee and 
               
               
                   
                 dependent. Notify via mail to the GMS 
               
               
                   
                 rep if the group size is less than 15 and if 
               
               
                   
                 above 15 notify the Sales rep. 
               
               
                   
                 If there is a shortage then send a mail to 
               
               
                   
                 the finance and put the term status as term 
               
               
                   
                 pending. Finance should initiate follow up 
               
               
                   
                 for collecting the balance due and sent the 
               
               
                   
                 term letter and payment letter. On receipt 
               
               
                   
                 of payment term the Group. If the 
               
               
                   
                 Payment is not received then retro terms 
               
               
                   
                 the group. 
               
               
                   
                 If there is refund due to the group the 
               
               
                   
                 finance should process the refund and 
               
               
                   
                 initiate the term there after. 
               
               
                   
                 Note: GMS can process Term up to 30 days. 
               
               
                   
                 (LEVEL I) 
               
               
                   
                 Term beyond 30 days-60 days can be 
               
               
                   
                 processed only by lead (LEVEL II) 
               
               
                   
                 Term extended beyond 60 days is based on 
               
               
                   
                 ultimate authority to a specified user (LEVEL 
               
               
                   
                 III AND IV) 
               
               
                 Term Process 
                 Automated term process is initiated if the group 
               
               
                 (Automated) 
                 does not pay the premium or there is shortage of 
               
               
                   
                 premium. Term letter is sent to the group on 32 
               
               
                   
                 day of non-receipt of payment and the Group is 
               
               
                   
                 given 15-day notice to repay. If the Group does 
               
               
                   
                 not pay within 32 + 15 days the finance should 
               
               
                   
                 finalize term based on authority. 
               
               
                 General Term rules 
                 If the group is termed then all the employees and 
               
               
                   
                 dependents for the group are termed. The 
               
               
                   
                 COBRA Members associated with the group 
               
               
                   
                 should also be termed. The term letter should 
               
               
                   
                 be sent to the entire member for the Group 
               
               
                   
                 including the COBRA group. EFT and auto 
               
               
                   
                 credit card deductions should stop on term. 
               
               
                 Term Process 
                 This is to complete the term process where the 
               
               
                   
                 term status was term pend. All auto initiated term 
               
               
                   
                 process has the term status as term pend. It 
               
               
                   
                 requires user intervention to complete the term 
               
               
                   
                 process based on authority. 
               
               
                 Term Process 
                 Employee can be terminated based on various 
               
               
                   
                 reason provide from the employee termination 
               
               
                   
                 All term should be effective end of the current 
               
               
                   
                 month or if the term is requested for the month 
               
               
                   
                 after the current month 
               
               
                   
                 Employee cannot be termed with past date beyond 
               
               
                   
                 30 days. 
               
               
                   
                 Exception: 
               
               
                   
                 Death of the employee. The employee is termed 
               
               
                   
                 the on the day of the death. 
               
               
                 Process Associated 
                 All employee terms should send term letter to the 
               
               
                 with term 
                 employee and group. The employee can opt for 
               
               
                   
                 COBRA and hence the COBRE enrollment 
               
               
                   
                 packet should be sent to the employee 
               
               
                 Billing Adjustment 
                 There should be billing adjustment in the 
               
               
                   
                 subsequent bill for termed employee 
               
               
                 Term Process 
                 Dependent can be terminated based on various 
               
               
                   
                 reason provide for the employee termination 
               
               
                   
                 All term should be effective end of the current 
               
               
                   
                 month or if the term is requested for the month 
               
               
                   
                 after the current month. 
               
               
                   
                 Dependent cannot be termed with past date 
               
               
                   
                 beyond 30 days 
               
               
                   
                 Exception: 
               
               
                   
                 Death of the dependent. The dependent is termed 
               
               
                   
                 the on the day of the death. 
               
               
                 Term Rules 
                 Auto initiate Dependent terms if the age of the 
               
               
                   
                 dependent is 23 and the dependent other than 
               
               
                   
                 spouse or domestic partner are no longer eligible. 
               
               
                   
                 Also send the COBRA packet to the dependent if 
               
               
                   
                 termed. 
               
               
                 Billing Adjustment 
                 Make adjustment to the billing for the termed 
               
               
                   
                 dependent in the next billing cycle. 
               
               
                 Reinstatement Process 
                 The person who requested the reinstatement 
               
               
                   
                 should be the designated contact person. Other 
               
               
                   
                 persons are not authorized to initiate the 
               
               
                   
                 reinstatement request. 
               
               
                   
                 If reinstatement cannot happen then send the 
               
               
                   
                 denial letter. 
               
               
                   
                 If reinstated notify finance 
               
               
                   
                 System should calculate the reinstatement fees. 
               
               
                   
                 Finance will reinstate on receipt of payment. 
               
               
                   
                 Note When the group is reinstated all the 
               
               
                   
                 members associated with the group are also 
               
               
                   
                 reinstated. 
               
               
                   
                 Including COBRA GROUP. 
               
               
                   
                 GMS can reinstate within 30 days. Any period 
               
               
                   
                 above this needs authorization. 
               
               
                 Reinstatement Process 
                 The person who requested the reinstatement 
               
               
                   
                 should be the designated contact person. Other 
               
               
                   
                 persons are not authorized to initiate the 
               
               
                   
                 reinstatement request. 
               
               
                   
                 If reinstatement cannot happen then send the 
               
               
                   
                 denial letter. 
               
               
                   
                 Note When the Employee is reinstated all the 
               
               
                   
                 dependents of the Employee are also reinstated. 
               
               
                 Reinstatement Process 
                 The person who requested the reinstatement 
               
               
                   
                 should be designated contact person. Other 
               
               
                   
                 persons are not authorized to initiate the 
               
               
                   
                 reinstatement request. 
               
               
                   
                 If reinstatement cannot happen then send the 
               
               
                   
                 denial letter. 
               
               
                   
                 If reinstated notify finance for reinstatement fees 
               
               
                   
                 calculation if applicable. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       5. User Role 
       [1024]    The respective level user can terminate or reinstate the dependent, employee or group based on the criteria mention in the following table. The following validations are done with respect to the current date. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Dependent Termination 
               
             
          
           
               
                 S. No., 
                 User Role 
                 Condition 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 1 
                 Level I 
                 Termination date is with in 30 days prior or later 
               
               
                 2 
                 Level II 
                 Termination date is within 60 days prior or later 
               
               
                 3 
                 Level III, 
                 Termination date is within 90 days prior or later 
               
               
                   
                 Level IV 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Employee Termination 
               
             
          
           
               
                 S. No., 
                 User Role 
                 Condition 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 1 
                 Level I 
                 Termination date is with in 30 days prior or later 
               
               
                 2 
                 Level II 
                 Termination date is within 60 days prior or later 
               
               
                 3 
                 Level III 
                 Termination date is within 90 days prior or later 
               
               
                   
                 Level IV 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Group Termination 
               
             
          
           
               
                 S. No., 
                 User Role 
                 Condition 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 1 
                 Level I 
                 Termination date is with in 30 days prior or later 
               
               
                 2 
                 Level II 
                 Termination date is within 60 days prior or later 
               
               
                 3 
                 Level III, 
                 Termination date is within 90 days prior or later 
               
               
                   
                 Level IV 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Dependent Reinstatement 
               
             
          
           
               
                 S. No., 
                 User Role 
                 Condition 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 1 
                 Level I 
                 Termination date is with in 30 days prior or later 
               
               
                 2 
                 Level II 
                 Termination date is within 60 days prior or later 
               
               
                 3 
                 Level III, 
                 Termination date is within 90 days prior or later 
               
               
                   
                 Level IV 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Employee Reinstatement 
               
             
          
           
               
                 S. No., 
                 User Role 
                 Condition 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 1 
                 Level I 
                 Termination date is with in 30 days prior or later 
               
               
                 2 
                 Level II 
                 Termination date is within 60 days prior or later 
               
               
                 3 
                 Level III, 
                 Termination date is within 90 days prior or later 
               
               
                   
                 Level IV 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Group Reinstatement 
               
             
          
           
               
                 S. No., 
                 User Role 
                 Condition 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 1 
                 Level I 
                 Termination date is with in 30 days prior or later 
               
               
                 2 
                 Level II 
                 Termination date is within 60 days prior or later 
               
               
                 3 
                 Level III, 
                 Termination date is within 90 days prior or later 
               
               
                   
                 Level IV 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Proceess Specification 
     Appeals and Grievances 
     1. Introduction 
       [1025]    1.1. Purpose
       The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Appeals and Grievances. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.       
 
         [1027]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_EN 
                 Enrollment 
               
               
                   
                 SCOPE_ADD 
                 Addendum to the Scope Document 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1028]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN 
                 Functional Specification 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Document—Enrollment 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_001 
                 Process Specification—New 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Business Enrollment 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_002 
                 Process Specification—Enrollment 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Changes/Add-On 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_003 
                 Process Specification—COBRA 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Enrollment/Changes 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_004 
                 Process Specification—ROE/OE 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_005 
                 Process Specification—Termination/ 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Reinstatement 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [1029]    2.1. Background 
         [1030]    Any process or transaction that is performed by PacAdvantage is subject to a review process. The rule for such is defined in the PacAdvantage handbook. There are cases when the Customer is not satisfied with some of the decisions made during the administration of the program. When a customer is not satisfied with the decision made they can submit a request for Program Review. Once a decision has been made to grant or deny the request, an Appeal can then be submitted to overturn the decision of the Program Review. Not all decisions are appealable. In any case, all grievances need to be sent to PacAdvantage-Roseville, along with other certain requirements, for making a decision whether to consider the Grievances or to reject them as the case may be. 
         [1031]    PacAdvantage-Roseville makes the decision on the initial requests or “Program Reviews” and forwards the response to the customer. Upon receipt of a second request or “Appeal”, if the decision is appealable, Pac Advantage-Roseville forwards the information to PacAdvantage-SF to make a ruling. (If the decision is not appealable, PacAdvantage-Roseville sends a letter regarding such to the customer.) PacAdvantage-SF then returns a ruling and PacAdvantage-Roseville forwards the response to the customer. 
         [1032]    This entire process needs to be captured and tracked by the system. 
         [1033]    Any transaction within the system has a history. The personnel handling the grievance need to review the history and generate a report regarding the grievance for review. 
         [1034]    2.2. Process Description 
         [1035]    The objective of the Grievance process is to:
       1) Maintain a status for all Grievances received from the customer and follow up with the decision made either by PacAdvantage-Roseville or PacAdvantage-SF.       
 
         [1037]    The following are the other requirements that will be supported and constraints on the proposed system:
       1) The system would track the initial request from open to close.   2) The system would track subsequent requests, if a proper appeal, from re-open to close.   3) Track subsequent requests, if not a proper appeal, for receive dates, remarks and any correspondence.   4) The system would also have a history of all the transactions to get the report for the Nature of Grievance.       
 
         [1042]    2.3. Process Flow 
         [1043]    Process for Grievances—First Request (or “Program Review”)
       1) Receive the Grievance from Group and/or Member and/or Agent representing the Group and/or Member.   2) Categorize the nature of the Grievance.   3) Review the history and collect all the relevant documents for the Grievance.   4) Make decision to approve/deny the Grievance.   5) Close the Grievance.   6) Send relevant letters.   7) If the Grievance is in favor of the group or the employee, send notification to Finance and or GMS to take necessary action (Reinstate the Group/Member).       
 
         [1051]    Process for Grievances—Second Request (or “Appeal”)
       1) Receive the Grievance from the Group and/or Member and/or Agent representing the Group and/or Member.   2) Categorize the nature of the Grievance.   3) Review the history and collect all the relevant documents for the Grievance.   4) Forward the document with relevant information to PacAdvantage-SF.   5) Follow up with PacAdvantage-SF regarding the decision on the Grievance.   6) On receiving the decision convey the decision to the Group and or employee.   7) Close the Grievance.   8) Send relevant letters.   9) If the Grievance is in favor of the group or the employee send notification to Finance and or GMS to take necessary action (Reinstate the Group/Member).       
 
       3. User Interface 
       [1061]    3.1. User Interface Screens 
         [1062]    3.1.1. Screen ID&#39;s 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Screen 
                 Corresponding 
               
               
                 Screen ID (SID) 
                 Name 
                 HTML File Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 bpi.enrollment.grievance.appellantsearch 
                 Grievance 
                 grievancesearch 
               
               
                   
                 Search 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.grievance.grievancecreate 
                 Grievance 
                 grievancecreate 
               
               
                   
                 Create 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.grievance.grievancemodify 
                 Grievance 
                 grievancemodify 
               
               
                   
                 Modify 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.grievance.grievanceclose 
                 Grievance 
                 grievanceclose 
               
               
                   
                 Close 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1063]    3.1.1.1. SID, Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    SID: bpi.enrollment.grievance.appellantsearch (See FIG. I- 61 ) 
       Element Name 
       [1064]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Complainant 
                 Text 
                 Complainant 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Type 
                   
                 Type 
               
               
                 appellantType 
                 Radio 
                 Complainant 
                 To select the type “Group” 
               
               
                   
                 button 
                 Type 
                 or “Member” 
               
               
                 Complainant 
                 Text 
                 Complainant 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 ID 
                   
                 ID 
               
               
                 appellantId 
                 Text Field 
                 Complainant 
                 To enter complainant id 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ID 
               
               
                 Company 
                 Text 
                 Company 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                 Name 
               
               
                 companyName 
                 Text Field 
                 Company 
                 To enter company name 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Name 
               
               
                 First Name 
                 Text 
                 First Name 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 firstName 
                 Text Field 
                 First Name 
                 To enter first name 
               
               
                 Last Name 
                 Text 
                 Last Name 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 lastName 
                 Text Field 
                 Last Name 
                 To enter last name 
               
               
                 SSN 
                 Text Field 
                 SSN/Tax ID 
                 To enter SSN or Tax ID 
               
               
                 Phone Number 
                 Text 
                 Phone Number 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 phoneNumber 
                 Text Field 
                 Phone Number 
                 To enter phone number 
               
               
                 search 
                 HTML 
                 Search 
                 To perform Search 
               
               
                   
                 button 
                   
                 operation 
               
               
                 cancel 
                 HTML 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset the all search fields 
               
               
                   
                 button 
               
               
                 Search Table 
                 HTML 
                   
                 To list the Complainant ID, 
               
               
                   
                 Table 
                   
                 Company Name, First 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Name, Last Name and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Phone number is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 displayed on the screen 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1065]    3.1.1.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    SID: bpi.enrollment.grievance.grievancecreate (See FIG. I- 62 ) 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Complainant Type 
                 Text 
                 Complainant Type 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Complainant Type 
                 Text 
                 Complainant Type 
                 To display complainant type 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 dynamically 
               
               
                 Complainant ID 
                 Text 
                 Complainant ID 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Complainant ID 
                 Text 
                 Complainant ID 
                 To display complainant type 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 dynamically 
               
               
                 Group Information 
                 HTML Table 
                 Group Information 
                 To display company name, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 contact name, address, phone, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 effective date, ROE date, status 
               
               
                 Postmark Date 
                 Text 
                 Postmark Date 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 postMarkDate 
                 Calendar 
                 Postmark Date 
                 To enter the postmark date 
               
               
                 Received date 
                 Text 
                 Received date 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 receivedDate 
                 Calendar 
                 Received date 
                 To enter the received date 
               
               
                 Nature of 
                 Text 
                 Nature of Grievance 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Grievance 
               
               
                 natureOfGrievance 
                 List 
                 Nature of Grievance 
                 To list the Nature of Grievance. 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Upon selection of the Nature of 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Grievance, the corresponding 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Grievance Type is displayed on 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the screen 
               
               
                 Subject of 
                 Text 
                 Subject of Grievance 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Grievance 
               
               
                 subjectOfGrievance 
                 List 
                 Subject of Grievance 
                 To list the subject of Grievance 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 for selection 
               
               
                 Urgent 
                 Text 
                 Urgent 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 urgent 
                 Checkbox 
                 Urgent 
                 To select the option of having 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 urgent. 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Text 
                 Remarks 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 remarks 
                 Text Area 
                 Remarks 
                 to enter remarks larger area is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 provided 
               
               
                 save 
                 HTML button 
                 Save 
                 Submit the data and save in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 database 
               
               
                 cancel 
                 HTML button 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset to previous status as 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 was on loading the page 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Screen Validations 
       [1066]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Postmark Date 
                 Should default to system date. 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Postmark date can never be a future 
                 “Please choose the correct date. Postmark 
               
               
                   
                 date and can be one day older than 
                 date can be a future date. 
               
               
                   
                 current date only 
               
               
                 Received date 
                 Should default to system date. 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Received date can never be a future 
                 “Please choose the correct date. Received 
               
               
                   
                 date and should be equal to OR 
                 date can be a future date.” 
               
               
                   
                 greater than current date. 
               
               
                 Nature of Grievance 
                 Default Option should be --Choose 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 One-- Should list all the types of 
                 “Please choose the nature of grievance_” 
               
               
                   
                 Natures of Grievances 
               
               
                 Subject of 
                 Default Option should be --Choose 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                 Grievance 
                 One-- Should list all the types of 
                 “Please choose the subject of grievance_” 
               
               
                   
                 subject of Grievances 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Entry Text Area to enter the 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 remarks for the Grievance. The text 
               
               
                   
                 area should have scrollbar if the 
               
               
                   
                 content within the text area grows. 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Should function On clicking the 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Save Button or pressing the Enter 
                 “The value entered for ‘FIELD NAME’ is 
               
               
                   
                 key with cursor on the “Save 
                 incorrect. Please enter the correct value.” 
               
               
                   
                 Button” 
                 Note: The “FIELD NAME” name should be 
               
               
                   
                 Save the data to the repository with 
                 dynamically picked based on the name of 
               
               
                   
                 the status of the Grievance as open 
                 the field for which the error has occurred. 
               
               
                   
                 Auto generate the grievance ID 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Should reset to the status as was on 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 loading the page on clicking the 
               
               
                   
                 cancel button 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1067]    3.1.1.3. SID, Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    bpi.enrollment.grievance.grievancemodify (See FIG. I- 63 ) 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Search by 
                 Text 
                 Search by Complainant 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Complainant 
               
               
                 searchType 
                 Radio button 
                 Search by Complainant 
                 To select the option of search 
               
               
                 Search by 
                 Text 
                 Search by Grievance 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Grievance 
               
               
                 searchType 
                 Radio button 
                 Search by Grievance 
                 To select the option of search 
               
               
                 Grievance ID 
                 Text 
                 Grievance ID 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 grievanceID 
                 Read only field 
                 Grievance ID 
                 To display Grievance ID. Ability to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 search for open Grievances 
               
               
                 Complainant ID 
                 Text 
                 Complainant ID 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 appellantId 
                 Entry Field 
                 Complainant ID 
                 To enter complainant ID. Ability to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 search for open Grievances for the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 specific complainant. 
               
               
                 search 
                 Button 
                 Search 
                 To search for the Grievance ID or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the Complainant ID (group or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 member id) with open grievances 
               
               
                 Grievance 
                 HTML Table 
                 Grievance Process Table 
                 List the grievances based on the 
               
               
                 Process Table 
                   
                   
                 search criteria. 
               
               
                 Process 
                 HTML Button 
                 Process 
                 To show the grievance selected for 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 further processing 
               
               
                 Grievance 
                 HTML Table 
                 Grievance 
                 Table to display Postmark Date, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Received Date, Nature of 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Grievance, Subject of Grievance, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Appellant type, Appellant ID, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Grievance Status, Remarks. 
               
               
                 Additional 
                 Text 
                 Additional Remarks 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Remarks 
               
               
                 additionalRemarks 
                 Entry Field 
                 Additional Remarks 
                 To enter text 
               
               
                 Forward for 
                 Text 
                 Forward for Approval 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Approval 
               
               
                 forwardForApproval 
                 Check box 
                 Forward for Approval 
                 To check if forwarding for approval 
               
               
                 Forward to 
                 Text 
                 Forward to 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 forwardedTo 
                 Entry Field 
                 Forward to 
                 if “Forwarded for Approval” is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 checked then this field must be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 completed. To enter the name of 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the person to whom the Grievance 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 is to be forwarded 
               
               
                 Forward Date 
                 Text 
                 Forward Date 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 forwardDate 
                 Calendar 
                 Forward Date 
                 If “Forward for Approval” is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 checked then this field must be 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 completed. Enter the forward date 
               
               
                 Batch Date 
                 Text 
                 Batch Date 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 batchDate 
                 Calendar 
                 Batch Date 
                 To enter batch date 
               
               
                 save 
                 HTML button 
                 Save 
                 Save the data and save in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 database 
               
               
                 cancel 
                 HTML button 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset to previous status as was on 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 loading the page 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Screen Validations 
       [1068]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Grievance 
                 Entry field to enter grievance ID and on 
                 Error Message: 
               
               
                   
                 tab should populate the Grievance based 
                 “The grievance ID not available” 
               
               
                   
                 on the Grievance id 
               
               
                 Complainant 
                 Entry fields to enter Complainant ID 
                 Error Message: 
               
               
                   
                 and on tab should populate all the 
                 “Complainant ID not available” 
               
               
                   
                 Grievances for the specific appellant. 
               
               
                 Search 
                 Search for the Grievance ID or 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 Appellant ID 
               
               
                 Grievance Process 
                 The table gets populated based on the 
                 None 
               
               
                 Table 
                 search criteria. For Grievance ID the 
               
               
                   
                 table shows only one grievance. For 
               
               
                   
                 Appellant search the table shows all the 
               
               
                   
                 grievances for the specific Appellant. 
               
               
                 Process 
                 Process the specific Row in the table 
                 NONE 
               
               
                   
                 selected 
               
               
                 Grievance 
                 Table to display Postmark Date, 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 Received Date, Nature of Grievance, 
               
               
                   
                 Subject of Grievance, Appellant Type, 
               
               
                   
                 Appellant ID, Grievance Status, 
               
               
                   
                 Remarks. 
               
               
                 Additional Remarks 
                 Entry field for additional remarks 
                 None 
               
               
                 Forward for 
                 Check box to check if forward or not. 
                 None 
               
               
                 Approval 
               
               
                 Forward To 
                 If “Forward for Approval” is checked 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 then this field must be completed. To 
                 “Please Enter the Forwarded to persons 
               
               
                   
                 enter the name of the person to whom 
                 name” 
               
               
                   
                 the Grievance is to be forwarded 
               
               
                 Forward Date 
                 Allow entering the date or picking up 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 from the calendar 
                 “Please Enter the Forwarded Date” 
               
               
                   
                 if “Forward for Approval” is checked 
               
               
                   
                 then this field must be completed. Enter 
               
               
                   
                 the forward date 
               
               
                 Batch Date 
                 Allow entering the batch date or picking 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 up from the calendar 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Should function On clicking the Save 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Button or pressing the Enter key with 
                 “The value entered for ‘FIELD NAME’ is 
               
               
                   
                 cursor on the “Save Button” 
                 incorrect. Please enter the correct 
               
               
                   
                 Save the data on clicking the save 
                 value.” Note: The “FIELD NAME” name 
               
               
                   
                 button. 
                 should be dynamically picked based on 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the name of the field for which the error 
               
               
                   
                   
                 has occurred. 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Reset to the state as was on loading the 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 page 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1069]    3.1.1.4. SID, Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    SID: bpi.enrollment.grievance.grievanceclose (See FIG. I- 64 ) 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Search by 
                 Text 
                 Search by Complainant 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Complainant 
               
               
                 searchType 
                 Radio button 
                 Search by Complainant 
                 To select the option of search 
               
               
                 Search by 
                 Text 
                 Search by Grievance 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Grievance 
               
               
                 searchType 
                 Radio button 
                 Search by Grievance 
                 To select the option of search 
               
               
                 Grievance ID 
                 Text 
                 Grievance ID 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 grievanceID 
                 Entry Field 
                 Grievance ID 
                 To enter Grievance ID. Ability to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 search for open Grievances 
               
               
                 Complainant ID 
                 Text 
                   
                 To display text 
               
               
                 complainant ID 
                 Text 
                 Complainant ID 
                 To display Complainant ID. Ability 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 to search for open Grievances for 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the specific complainant. 
               
               
                 search 
                 Button 
                 Search 
                 To search for the Grievance ID or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the Complainant ID (group or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 member id) with open grievances 
               
               
                 Grievance 
                 HTML Table 
                 Grievance Close Table 
                 List the grievances based on the 
               
               
                 Close Table 
                   
                   
                 search criteria. 
               
               
                 Grievance 
                 HTML Table 
                 Grievance Table 
                 Table to display Postmark Date, 
               
               
                 Table 
                   
                   
                 Received Date, Nature of 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Grievance, Subject of Grievance, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Appellant Type, Appellant ID, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Grievance Status, Remarks. 
               
               
                 Conclusion 
                 Text 
                 Conclusion 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 conclusion 
                 List 
                 Conclusion 
                 List the conclusion of appeal as 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Approved, Denied, or Cancelled 
               
               
                 Reason 
                 Text 
                 Reason 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 reason 
                 List 
                 Reason 
                 List the Reason for the conclusion 
               
               
                 otherReason 
                 Entry Field 
                 Other Reason 
                 To enter reason not included in 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Reason List 
               
               
                 Batch Date 
                 Text 
                 Batch Date 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 batchDate 
                 Calendar 
                 Batch Date 
                 To enter batch date 
               
               
                 save 
                 HTML button 
                 Save 
                 Save the data and save in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 database 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Screen Validations 
       [1070]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Grievance 
                 Entry field to enter grievance ID 
                 Error Message: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “Grievance ID is required” 
               
               
                 Complainant 
                 Entry fields to enter Complainant ID. 
                 Error Message: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “Complainant ID is required” 
               
               
                 Search 
                 Search for the Grievance ID or Appellant 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 ID 
               
               
                 Grievance Close 
                 The table gets populated based on the 
                 None 
               
               
                 Table 
                 search criteria. For Grievance ID the 
               
               
                   
                 table shows only one grievance. For 
               
               
                   
                 Appellant search the table shows all the 
               
               
                   
                 grievances for the specific Appellant. 
               
               
                 Close 
                 Process the specific Row in the table 
                 NONE 
               
               
                   
                 selected 
               
               
                 Conclusion 
                 Default option should be --choose one--. 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 List the conclusion for closing the 
               
               
                   
                 grievance as Approved, Denied or 
               
               
                   
                 cancelled 
               
               
                 Reason 
                 Default option should be --choose one--. 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 List the reasons applicable 
               
               
                 Other Reason 
                 If the reason selected is others the enter 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 the other reason 
               
               
                 Batch Date 
                 Allow entering the batch date or picking 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 up from the calendar 
               
               
                 Submit 
                 Should function On clicking the Submit 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Button or pressing the Enter key with 
                 “The value entered for ‘FIELD NAME’ is 
               
               
                   
                 cursor on the “Submit “Button” 
                 incorrect. Please enter the correct 
               
               
                   
                 Save the data on clicking the submit 
                 value.” 
               
               
                   
                 button. 
                 Note: The “FIELD NAME” name should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be dynamically picked based on the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 name of the field for which the error 
               
               
                   
                   
                 has occurred. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1071]    3.1.2. Screen Flow 
       (See FIG. I- 65 ) 
     4. Business Rule Mapping 
       [1072]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Activity 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Appeals and 
                 Appeals and grievance is the screen that needs to be 
               
               
                 grievance 
                 handled by personnel skilled with the operations of the 
               
               
                   
                 PacAdvantage and the governing rules. 
               
               
                   
                 All appeals are entered and followed up for the outcome of 
               
               
                   
                 the appeals. The tum around time for the appeals should be 
               
               
                   
                 3 days at the BPI office for entering the record and 
               
               
                   
                 gathering the reports and summarizing the history. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Process Specification 
     Association Master 
     1. Introduction 
       [1073]    1.1. Purpose
       The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Association Master. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.       
 
         [1075]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 BPI_SCOPE_EN 
                 Enrollment 
               
               
                 SCOPE_ADD 
                 Addendum to the Scope Document 
               
               
                 BPI_SCOPE_EN_01 
                 Business Use case specification - Group 
               
               
                   
                 Enrollment 
               
               
                 BPI_SCOPE_EN_03 
                 Business Use case specification - Create 
               
               
                   
                 Individual Association 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1076]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [1077]    2.1. Background
       Associations are basically a body of groups/members representing certain types of associations within the State of California. Association Groups and Association Members can participate in the Pac Advantage program similar to small employer groups or members. Associations are classified as Guaranteed, Endorsed, PEO&#39;s or Chambers. Each of the associations classified have specific business rules when participating in PacAdvantage program. This document identifies the rules and business governing the association groups and members.       
 
         [1079]    2.2. Process Description
       The objective of the Association Master is to:   1) Create a master record for the association based on the classification of the association and specify the business rules associated with these classifications.   2) The master record for association includes
           General information about the association   Contact information   Coverage Information   Agent information   Other information like internal work group, membership status etc.   
               
 
         [1088]    2.3. Process Flow 
         [1089]    Process for Association Master
       Create, modify or inactivate an association master is the basic operations that can be performed on the association master.   1) Enter general information about the association. The general information includes
           Association Type   Association Name   Affiliation ID   Address   Suite   City   State   ZIP   
           2) Enter contact information. The contact information includes
           Salutation   First Name   Middle Initial   Last Name   Suffix   Contact Phone   Contact Fax   Email Address   
           3) Enter coverage information. Coverage information includes
           Line of coverage offered   Domestic Partner Coverage   Rate Type   Admin Fees Type (Note: This are captured in Carrier Maintenance Module (Rate Classification)   Agent Fees Type (Note: This are captured in Carrier Maintenance Module (Rate Classification)   Additional Fees type (Note: This are captured in Carrier Maintenance Module (Rate Classification)   
           4) Enter other information. Other information includes
           Internal Work group   Membership status   Contract Date   Association re qualification period   Special Handling   
               
 
       3. User Interface 
       [1122]    3.1. User Interface Screens 
         [1123]    3.1.1. Screen ID&#39;s 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Screen ID (SID) 
                 Screen Name 
                 Corresponding HTML File Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 enrollment.association.associationgeneral 
                 Association 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/association/associationgeneral/AssociationGeneralInfo.jsp 
               
               
                   
                 General Info 
               
               
                 enrollment.association.associationcoveraeg 
                 Association 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/association/associationcoverage/AssociationCoverageInfo.jsp 
               
               
                   
                 Coverage Info 
               
               
                 enrollment.association.associationother 
                 Association 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/association/associationother/AssociationOtherInfo.jsp 
               
               
                   
                 Other Info 
               
               
                 enrollment.association.associationconfirm 
                 Association 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/association/associationconfirm/AssociationConfirm.jsp 
               
               
                   
                 Confirmation 
               
               
                 enrollment.association.internalworkgroupsearch 
                 Internal Work 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/association/internalworkgroupsearch/InternalWorkGroupSearch.jsp 
               
               
                   
                 Group Search 
               
               
                 enrollment.association.associationgeneralsearch 
                 Association 
                 /bpi/cas/enrollment/association/associationgeneral/AssociationGeneralSearch.jsp 
               
               
                   
                 Search 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1124]    3.1.1.1. SID, Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       SID: enrollment.association.associationgeneral   Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 66 )       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 General 
                 Header Text 
                 To provide content for header 
               
               
                 Information 
               
               
                 Association 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 name 
               
               
                 Association 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter association name 
               
               
                 name 
               
               
                 Search 
                 HTMLButton 
                 To show pop up window to search for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the association name for editing the data 
               
               
                 Association 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Type 
               
               
                 Association 
                 Drop Down List 
                 List the types of association to select 
               
               
                 Type 
                   
                 from 
               
               
                 Address 
                 Sub Header 
                 To provide content for sub header 
               
               
                 Information 
               
               
                 Address 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Address 
                 Entry field 
                 Enter the address 
               
               
                 Suite 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Suite 
                 Entry field 
                 Enter the suite number 
               
               
                 City 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 City 
                 Entry field 
                 Enter the city name 
               
               
                 State 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 State 
                 Drop Down List 
                 List the states in USA for selection 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Entry field 
                 Enter the ZIP code 
               
               
                 Contact 
                 Sub Header for 
                 Text for sub header content 
               
               
                 Information 
                 contact 
               
               
                   
                 information 
               
               
                 Salutation 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Salutation 
                 Drop Down List 
                 Select the salutation 
               
               
                 First Name 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 First name 
                 Entry field 
                 Enter first name 
               
               
                 MI 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 MI 
                 Entry field 
                 Enter Middle initial 
               
               
                 Last name 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Last name 
                 Entry field 
                 Enter last name 
               
               
                 Suffix 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Suffix 
                 Drop down List 
                 To select the suffix 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Entry field 
                 Enter phone number 
               
               
                 Extension 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Extension 
                 Entry field 
                 Enter extension number 
               
               
                 FAX 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Fax 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter the Fax number 
               
               
                 Email 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Email 
                 Entry field 
                 Enter the email address 
               
               
                 Continue 
                 HTML Button 
                 Save and continue to the next screen 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_007_002 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Reset Button 
                 Reset to the status as was on loading 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the page 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollmentassociation.associationcoverage 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Coverage 
                 Header Text 
                 To provide header for Coverage 
               
               
                 Information 
               
               
                 Line of 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 coverage 
               
               
                 Line of 
                 Check boxes 
                 Check boxes to select multiple line of 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                   
                 coverage offered 
               
               
                 Domestic 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Partner 
               
               
                 Coverage 
               
               
                 Domestic 
                 Radio Boxes 
                 To choose yes or no for domestic partner 
               
               
                 Partner 
                   
                 coverage 
               
               
                 Coverage 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Rate Type 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                 Radio Boxes 
                 To choose if the rate type is blended or non 
               
               
                 Rate type 
                   
                 blended 
               
               
                 Continue 
                 HTML 
                 Submit button to save the data entered in to 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                 the. repository and navigate to the next 
               
               
                   
                   
                 screen BPI_CAS_SCR_EN_007_003 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 HTML reset 
                 To reset to the status as was on loading 
               
               
                   
                 Button 
                 the page 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.association.associationother 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 68 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Other 
                 Header text 
                 To provide text for the header 
               
               
                 Information 
               
               
                 Internal work 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 group 
               
               
                 Internal work 
                 Entry field 
                 Enter the work group ID 
               
               
                 group 
               
               
                 Search 
                 HTML Button 
                 Button to search for the work group to be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 attached to the association 
               
               
                 Membership 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 status 
               
               
                 Membership 
                 Drop down list 
                 List the membership status as active, closed or 
               
               
                 status 
                   
                 frozen 
               
               
                 Contract Date 
                 Entry field (Calendar) 
                 To enter or pick up the association&#39;s effective 
               
               
                   
                   
                 date 
               
               
                 Association re 
                 Entry field (Calendar) 
                 To enter or pick up the association&#39;s re 
               
               
                 qualification 
                   
                 qualification date 
               
               
                 period 
               
               
                 Batch billing 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Batch billing 
                 Radio box 
                 To specify if the association groups and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 members are to billed as one batch 
               
               
                 Desired 
                 Text 
                 To provide text 
               
               
                 Association 
               
               
                 name on the 
               
               
                 bill 
               
               
                 Desired 
                 Radio Box 
                 To specify if the Association name should be on 
               
               
                 Association 
                   
                 the bill or not 
               
               
                 name on the 
               
               
                 bill 
               
               
                 Continue 
                 HTML Button 
                 Button to save the information on this page 
               
               
                 Clear 
                 HTML reset Button 
                 To reset to the status as was on loading the page 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
       
         
           
             SID: enrollment.association.associationconfirm 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 69 ) 
             SID: enrollmentassociation.internalworkgroupsearch 
             Screen Snap Shot (See  FIG. 70 ) 
             SID: enrollment.association.associationgeneralsearch 
             Screen Snap Shot (See FIG. I- 71 ) 
           
         
       
     
         [1136]    3.1.2. Screen Flow 
       (See FIG. I- 72 ) 
     4. Business Rule Mapping 
       [1137]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Activity 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Allow 
                 Are eligible to enroll at any time and follow business rules 
               
               
                 Employer 
                 for Non-Association Small Employer Groups 2-50. 
               
               
                 Groups 2-50 
                 This rule applies for Guaranteed, Endorsed, PEO&#39;s and 
               
               
                   
                 Chambers 
               
               
                 Allow 
                 Must have a membership number and apply after 60 days 
               
               
                 Individual 
                 (read as waiting period), but within 120 days, of becoming 
               
               
                 Members 
                 a member of the Association or of a group sponsored for 
               
               
                   
                 coverage. Effective date of coverage will be within 
               
               
                   
                 45 days of receipt of a completed application. Declines 
               
               
                   
                 must wait until Open Enrollment. Waives may enroll 
               
               
                   
                 within 30 days of losing other employer-sponsored 
               
               
                   
                 coverage. The Individual Association member is required 
               
               
                   
                 to enroll in all lines of coverage offered by the Association 
               
               
                   
                 master. The Individual Association member is not eligible 
               
               
                   
                 for COBRA. 
               
               
                   
                 This is applicable only to Guaranteed association 
               
               
                 Allow 
                 Are eligible to enroll at any time and follow business rules 
               
               
                 Employer 
                 for Small Employer Groups 2-50 EXCEPT for the size of 
               
               
                 Groups &gt;100 
                 the group for Guaranteed association (Group size can be 
               
               
                   
                 un limited for guaranteed association) 
               
               
                 Rates 
                 Rate for each association for various rate classification are 
               
               
                   
                 defined in the carrier maintenance module (Admin Fees, 
               
               
                   
                 Agent Commission, Additional Fees and Rate differential) 
               
               
                 Agent 
                 All associations have an Agency and/or Agent(s). 
               
               
                   
                 Commissions are applicable to both Group&#39;s an 
               
               
                   
                 Association Member&#39;s. For both, the agent is attached at 
               
               
                   
                 the Group/Association member, but can only be chosen 
               
               
                   
                 from the particular agents attached to the association. 
               
               
                   
                 Agent is selected based on the internal work group 
               
               
                   
                 assigned to the agent/agency. 
               
               
                 Screen 
                 Small employer group after identifying the association 
               
               
                 Rules 
                 would follow the same navigation as applicable for the 
               
               
                 for Group 
                 Small employer group. The Group Affiliated to an 
               
               
                   
                 association should also have the Membership Number and 
               
               
                   
                 the date of membership. 
               
               
                 Screen 
                 Individual association would follow the same navigation 
               
               
                 Rules for 
                 as applicable to the employee after selecting the 
               
               
                 Individual 
                 association and validating that the association is 
               
               
                 Association 
                 guaranteed. The only additional things needed are a 
               
               
                 members 
                 “Membership Number” and a “Date of Membership”. 
               
               
                   
                 Essentially the “Date of Membership” replaces the 
               
               
                   
                 employee “Date of Hire” for an employee 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Process Specification 
     Carrier Issues 
     1. Introduction 
       [1138]    1.1. Purpose
       The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Carrier Issues. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.       
 
         [1140]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_EN 
                 Enrollment 
               
               
                   
                 SCOPE_ADD 
                 Addendum to the Scope Document 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1141]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN 
                 Functional Specification Document - 
               
               
                   
                 Enrollment 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_001 
                 Process Specification - New Business 
               
               
                   
                 Enrollment 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_002 
                 Process Specification - Enrollment Changes/ 
               
               
                   
                 Add-On 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_003 
                 Process Specification - COBRA Enrollment/ 
               
               
                   
                 Changes 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_004 
                 Process Specification - ROE/OE 
               
               
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_EN_005 
                 Process Specification - Termination/ 
               
               
                   
                 Reinstatement 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [1142]    2.1. Background
       Various issues can arise for a member or group once enrolled with a carrier through PacAdvantage. These issues can vary from not receiving identification cards to incomplete transmission upload by the carrier. As PacAdvantage becomes aware of these issues it is their responsibility to resolve the issue in a timely manner acting as a liaison between the member and the carrier. All issues need to be tracked from start to finish by reason for issue and related carrier for reporting on performance standards as well providing information to PacAdvantage-SF regarding recurring issues within a carrier.   Issues can arise at the Group level, for all members on a group and/or all members on a line of coverage. Issues can also arise at the Employee level and/or Dependent level, by member and/or by plan.   Within PacAdvantage there are personnel who specifically handle all carrier related issues. Other representatives within PacAdvantage can receive the initial request, document it as needed and forward it to the Carrier Issue personnel. The Carrier Issue personnel contact the carrier to resolve the issue. They mark the documentation as needed and then close the issue and forward the resolutions back to the initial requestor (Originator). The Originator informs the member/group of resolution.       
 
         [1146]    2.2. Process Description
       The objective of the Carrier Issues process is to:
           1) Maintain a status for all Carrier Issues received from the customer and follow up with the carrier for resolution and inform the customer of resolution.   
           The following are the other requirements that will be supported and constraints on the proposed system:
           1) The system would track the initial request from open to close.   2) The system would track both the reported issue and the actual issue.   3) The system would track the final resolution.   4) The system would also have a history of all the transactions to get the report for the Reported Issue.   
               
 
         [1154]    2.3. Process Flow 
         [1155]    Process for Carrier Issues
       1) Representative is notified of the issue by the customer and cannot resolve the issue alone.   2) Representative initiates a request either from the Group level, Employee level, or Dependent level.   3) The representative categorizes the reported issue and provides any supporting documentation.   4) The issue is marked as “Open” for the Carrier Issue personnel to handle.   5) The Carrier Issue personnel contact the carrier.   6) The Carrier Issue personnel provide the carrier with necessary information to resolve the issue. (i.e. re-transmission, e-mail of information)   7) The Carrier Issue personnel mark the issue as “Closed” and inform the Originator.   8) The originator follows-up with the member.       
 
       3. User Interface 
       [1164]    3.1. User Interface Screens 
         [1165]    3.1.1. Screen ID&#39;s
       &lt;List SID and the screen name and Corresponding HTML file for the screen.       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Corresponding 
               
               
                 Screen ID (SID) 
                 Screen Name 
                 HTML File Name 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrierissuesearch 
                 Carrier Issue Search 
                 carrierissuesearch 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrierissuecreate 
                 Carrier Issue 
                 carrierissuecreate 
               
               
                   
                 Create 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrierissuemodify 
                 Carrier Issue 
                 carrierissuemodify 
               
               
                   
                 Modify 
               
               
                 bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrierissueclose 
                 Carrier Issue 
                 carrierissueclose 
               
               
                   
                 Close 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1167]    3.1.1.1. SID, Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       SID: bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrierissuesearch (See FIG. I- 73 )       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Customer Type 
                 Text 
                 Customer 
                 To display text 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Type 
               
               
                 clientType 
                 Radio 
                 Customer 
                 To select the type 
               
               
                   
                 button 
                 Type 
                 “Group” or “Member” 
               
               
                 Customer ID 
                 Text 
                 Customer ID 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 clientId 
                 Text Field 
                 Customer ID 
                 To enter complainant id 
               
               
                 Company 
                 Text 
                 Company 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                 Name 
               
               
                 companyName 
                 Text Field 
                 Company 
                 To enter company name 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Name 
               
               
                 First Name 
                 Text 
                 First Name 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 firstName 
                 Text Field 
                 First Name 
                 To enter first name 
               
               
                 Last Name 
                 Text 
                 Last Name 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 lastName 
                 Text Field 
                 Last Name 
                 To enter last name 
               
               
                 SSN 
                 Text Field 
                 SSN/Tax ID 
                 To enter SSN or Tax ID 
               
               
                 SSN 
                 Text Field 
                 SSN/Tax ID 
                 To enter SSN or Tax ID 
               
               
                 Phone Number 
                 Text 
                 Phone 
                 To display text 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Number 
               
               
                 phoneNumber 
                 Text Field 
                 Phone 
                 To enter phone number 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Number 
               
               
                 search 
                 HTML 
                 Search 
                 To perform Search operation 
               
               
                   
                 button 
               
               
                 cancel 
                 HTML 
                 Cancel 
                 To reset the all search fields 
               
               
                   
                 button 
               
               
                 Search Table 
                 HTML 
                   
                 To list the Complainant ID, 
               
               
                   
                 Table 
                   
                 Company Name, First Name, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Last Name and Phone number 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 is displayed on the screen 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1169]    3.1.1.2. SID, Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       SID: bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrierissuecreate (See FIG. I- 74 )       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Received date 
                 Text 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Received date 
                 Calendar 
                 To enter the received date 
               
               
                 Reported Issue 
                 Text 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Reported Issue 
                 List 
                 To list the Reported Issue 
               
               
                 Group 
                 Entry Field 
                 To enter Group ID if Client Type is Group. Ability to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 search for Group, upon selection or entry of the Group, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the group&#39;s general information is displayed (Company 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Name, Contact Name, Address, Phone, Effective Date, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 ROE Date, Status) 
               
               
                 Member 
                 Entry Field 
                 To enter Member ID if Client Type is Member. Ability 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to search for Member, upon selection or entry of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 member ID, the member&#39;s general information is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 displayed (Name, Address, Phone, Effective Date, ROE 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Date, Status, Benefit Level, Coverage Choice) 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Text 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Entry Field 
                 To enter remarks 
               
               
                 Submit 
                 HTML button 
                 Submit the data and save in the database 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 HTML button 
                 To reset to previous status as was on loading the page 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 HTML button 
                 To reset to previous status as was on loading the page 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1171]    Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Received date 
                 Should default to system date. 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Received date can never be a future 
                 “Please choose the correct date. 
               
               
                   
                 date. 
                 Received date can be a future date.” 
               
               
                 Reported Issue 
                 Default Option should be --Choose 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 One-- Should list all the types of 
                 “Please choose the reported issue.” 
               
               
                   
                 Reported Issues 
               
               
                 Client Type 
                 Option to choose Group or member 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 with radio button group. 
               
               
                 Client 
                 Entry field to enter the group ID or 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 member ID based on the Client type 
               
               
                   
                 selected. Based on the Client selected 
               
               
                   
                 Display the Group or member 
               
               
                   
                 information in the HTML table. 
               
               
                 Search 
                 Pop up window to search for the 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 Group or Member based on the Client 
               
               
                   
                 type selected. 
               
               
                 Group 
                 HTML Table to display the Group 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 Information 
               
               
                 Member 
                 HTML Table to display member 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 information 
               
               
                 Remarks 
                 Entry Text Area to enter the remarks 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 for the Carrier Issue. The text area 
               
               
                   
                 should have scrollbar if the content 
               
               
                   
                 within the text area grows. 
               
               
                 Submit 
                 Should function On clicking the 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Submit Button or pressing the Enter 
                 “The value entered for ‘FIELD NAME’ 
               
               
                   
                 key with cursor on the “Submit 
                 is incorrect. Please enter the correct 
               
               
                   
                 Button” 
                 value.” 
               
               
                   
                 Save the data to the repository with 
                 Note: The “FIELD NAME” name 
               
               
                   
                 the status of the Carrier Issue as open. 
                 should be dynamically picked 
               
               
                   
                 Auto generate the Carrier Issue ID 
                 based on the name of the field for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 which the error has occurred. 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Should reset to the status as was on 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 loading the page on clicking the 
               
               
                   
                 cancel button 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1172]    3.1.1.3. SID, Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       SID: bpi.emollment.carrierissue.carrierissuemodify (See FIG. I- 75 )       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Carrier Issue ID 
                 Text 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Carrier Issue ID 
                 Entry Field 
                 To enter Carrier Issue ID. Ability to search for open 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Carrier Issues 
               
               
                 Client 
                 Text 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Client 
                 Entry Field 
                 To enter client ID. Ability to search for open Issues for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the specific client 
               
               
                 Search 
                 Pop Up window 
                 To search for the Carrier Issue ID or the Client ID 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (group or member id) with open issues 
               
               
                 Carrier Issue Process 
                 HTML Table 
                 List the issues based on the search criteria 
               
               
                 Table 
               
               
                 Process 
                 HTML Button 
                 To show the issue selected for further processing 
               
               
                 Carrier Issue 
                 HTML Table 
                 Table to display Received Date, Reported Issue, Client 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Type, Client ID, Issue Status, Remarks. 
               
               
                 Additional Remarks 
                 Text 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Additional Remarks 
                 Entry Field 
                 To enter text 
               
               
                 Notify Carrier 
                 Text 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Notify Carrier 
                 Radio Button 
                 To check if notifying to carrier 
               
               
                 Mode of Notification 
                 Text 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Mode of Notification 
                 List Box 
                 If “Notify Carrier” is checked then this field must be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 completed. To enter the mode of notification 
               
               
                 Date Notified 
                 Text 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Date Notified 
                 Calendar 
                 If “Notify Carrier” is checked then this field must be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 completed. Enter the notified date 
               
               
                 Batch Date 
                 Text 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Batch Date 
                 Calendar 
                 To enter batch date 
               
               
                 Submit 
                 HTML button 
                 Submit the data and save in the database 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 HTML button 
                 To reset to previous status as was on loading the page 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1174]    Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Carrier Issue 
                 Entry field to enter Carrier Issue ID 
                 Error Message: 
               
               
                   
                 and on tab should populate the Carrier 
                 “Carrier Issue ID is required” 
               
               
                   
                 Issue based on the Carrier Issue id 
               
               
                 Client 
                 Entry fields to enter Client ID and on 
                 Error Message: 
               
               
                   
                 tab should populate all the Carrier 
                 “Client ID is required” 
               
               
                   
                 issues for the specific Client. 
               
               
                 Search 
                 search for the Carrier Issue ID or 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 Client ID 
               
               
                 Carrier Issue 
                 The table gets populated based on the 
                 None 
               
               
                 Process Table 
                 search criteria. For Carrier Issue ID 
               
               
                   
                 the table shows only one Carrier 
               
               
                   
                 Issue. For Client search the table 
               
               
                   
                 shows all the Carrier Issues for the 
               
               
                   
                 specific Client 
               
               
                 Process 
                 Process the specific Row in the table 
                 NONE 
               
               
                   
                 selected 
               
               
                 Carrier Issue 
                 Table to display Received Date, 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 Reported Issue, Client Type, Client 
               
               
                   
                 ID, Issue Status, Remarks. 
               
               
                 Additional Remarks 
                 Entry field for additional remarks 
                 None 
               
               
                 Notify Carrier 
                 Radio button to select if notify or not 
                 None 
               
               
                 Mode of 
                 If “Notify Carrier” is yes then this 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                 Notification 
                 field must be completed. To enter the 
                 “Please Enter the Mode of 
               
               
                   
                 Mode of Notification for whom the 
                 Notification” 
               
               
                   
                 Issue is to be forwarded 
               
               
                 Date Notified 
                 Allow entering the date or picking up 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 from the calendar 
                 “Please Enter the Notified Date” 
               
               
                   
                 If “Notify Carrier” is yes then this 
               
               
                   
                 field must be completed. Enter the 
               
               
                   
                 notified date 
               
               
                 Batch Date 
                 Allow entering the batch date or 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 picking up from the calendar 
               
               
                 Submit 
                 Should function On clicking the 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Submit Button or pressing the Enter 
                 “The value entered for ‘FIELD NAME’ 
               
               
                   
                 key with cursor on the “Submit 
                 is incorrect. Please enter the correct 
               
               
                   
                 Button” 
                 value.” 
               
               
                   
                 Save the data on clicking the submit 
                 Note: The “FIELD NAME” name 
               
               
                   
                 button. If the Mode of Notification is 
                 should be dynamically picked 
               
               
                   
                 Email, then open new message with 
                 based on the name of the field for 
               
               
                   
                 appropriate information. If Mode of 
                 which the error has occurred. 
               
               
                   
                 Notification is Fax, then enter 
               
               
                   
                 appropriate information for fax. 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Reset to the state as was on loading 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 the page 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1175]    3.1.1.4. SID, Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose
       SID: bpi.enrollment.carrierissue.carrierissueclose (See FIG. I- 76 )       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Search by 
                 Text 
                 Search by Customer 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Customer 
               
               
                 searchType 
                 Radio button 
                 Search by Customer 
                 To select the option of search 
               
               
                 Search by 
                 Text 
                 Search by Carrier 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Carrier Issue 
                   
                 Issue 
               
               
                 searchType 
                 Radio button 
                 Search by Carrier 
                 To select the option of search 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Issue 
               
               
                 Carrier Issue ID 
                 Text 
                 Carrier Issue ID 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 carrierIssueId 
                 Entry Field 
                 Carrier Issue ID 
                 To enter Carrier Issue ID. Ability to search 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 for open Carrier Issue 
               
               
                 Customer ID 
                 Text 
                   
                 To display text 
               
               
                 customerId 
                 Text Field 
                 Customer ID 
                 To display Customer ID. Ability to search 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 for open Carrier Issue for the specific 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Customer 
               
               
                 search 
                 Button 
                 Search 
                 To search for the Carrier Issue ID or the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Customer ID (group or member id) with 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 open carrier issues 
               
               
                 Carrier Issue 
                 HTML Table 
                 Carrier Issue Close 
                 List the carrier issue based on the search 
               
               
                 Close Table 
                   
                 Table 
                 criteria. 
               
               
                 Carrier Issue 
                 HTML Table 
                 Carrier Issue Table 
                 Table to display Received Date, Reported 
               
               
                 Table 
                   
                   
                 Issue, Client Type, Client ID, Issue Status, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Remarks. 
               
               
                 Actual Issue 
                 Text 
                 To display text 
                 Actual Issue 
               
               
                 Actual Issue 
                 List 
                 List the Actual Issue 
                 Actual Issue 
               
               
                 Retransmission 
                 Text 
                 Retransmission 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Retransmission 
                 Radio button 
                 Retransmission 
                 Select if retransmission needed or not 
               
               
                 Resolution 
                 Text 
                 Resolution 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Resolution 
                 List 
                 Resolution 
                 List the Resolution of Issue as Verbally 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Updated; Retransmitted, etc. 
               
               
                 Resolution 
                 Text 
                 Resolution 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Comments 
                   
                 Comments 
               
               
                 Resolution 
                 Entry Field 
                 Resolution 
                 To enter text 
               
               
                 Comments 
                   
                 Comments 
               
               
                 Date Carrier 
                 Text 
                 Date Carrier 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Resolved 
                   
                 Resolved 
               
               
                 Date Carrier 
                 Calendar 
                 Date Carrier 
                 To enter date Carrier resolved 
               
               
                 Resolved 
                   
                 Resolved 
               
               
                 Batch Date 
                 Text 
                 Batch Date 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Batch Date 
                 Calendar 
                 Batch Date 
                 To enter batch date 
               
               
                 Notify 
                 Text 
                 Notify Originator 
                 To display text 
               
               
                 Originator 
               
               
                 Notify 
                 Radio Button 
                 Notify Originator 
                 To select if notifying to Originator 
               
               
                 Originator 
               
               
                 save 
                 HTML button 
                 Save 
                 Submit the data and save in the database 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1177]    Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Carrier Issue 
                 Entry field to enter Carrier Issue ID 
                 Error Message: 
               
               
                   
                 and on tab should populate the Carrier 
                 “Carrier Issue ID is required” 
               
               
                   
                 Issue based on the Carrier Issue id 
               
               
                 Customer 
                 Entry fields to enter Client ID and on 
                 Error Message: 
               
               
                   
                 tab should populate all the Carrier 
                 “Customer ID is required” 
               
               
                   
                 Issues for the specific Client. 
               
               
                 Search 
                 search for the Carrier Issue ID or 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 Client ID 
               
               
                 Carrier Issue 
                 The table gets populated based on the 
                 None 
               
               
                 Process Table 
                 search criteria. For Carrier Issue ID 
               
               
                   
                 the table shows only one Carrier 
               
               
                   
                 Issue. For Client search the table 
               
               
                   
                 shows all the Carrier Issues for the 
               
               
                   
                 specific Client. 
               
               
                 Close 
                 Close the specific Row in the table 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 selected 
               
               
                 Carrier Issue 
                 Table to display Received Date, 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 Reported Issue, Client Type, Client 
               
               
                   
                 ID, Issue Status, Remarks. 
               
               
                 Actual Issue 
                 Default option should be the same as 
               
               
                   
                 reported issue. List all issues. 
               
               
                 Retransmission 
                 Radio button to select if retransmit or 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 not 
               
               
                 Resolution 
                 Default option should be --choose 
               
               
                   
                 one--. List the resolutions for closing 
               
               
                   
                 the issue as Updated, Denied or 
               
               
                   
                 cancelled 
               
               
                 Resolution 
                 Entry field for additional comments 
                 None 
               
               
                 Comments 
               
               
                 Date Carrier 
                 Allow entering the date or picking up 
                 None 
               
               
                 Resolved 
                 from the calendar 
               
               
                   
                 If “Notify Carrier” is yes then this 
               
               
                   
                 field must be completed. Enter the 
               
               
                   
                 notified date 
               
               
                 Batch Date 
                 Allow entering the batch date or 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 picking up from the calendar 
               
               
                 Notify Originator 
                 Radio button to select if notify or not. 
               
               
                   
                 If yes send pre-formatted email to 
               
               
                   
                 Originator. 
               
               
                 Submit 
                 Should function On clicking the 
                 Error Dialog Box: 
               
               
                   
                 Submit Button or pressing the Enter 
                 “The value entered for ‘FIELD NAME’ 
               
               
                   
                 key with cursor on the “Submit 
                 is incorrect. Please enter the correct 
               
               
                   
                 Button” 
                 value.” 
               
               
                   
                 Save the data on clicking the submit 
                 Note: The “FIELD NAME” name 
               
               
                   
                 button. If the Mode of Notification is 
                 should be dynamically picked 
               
               
                   
                 Email, then open new message with 
                 based on the name of the field for 
               
               
                   
                 appropriate information. If Mode of 
                 which the error has occurred. 
               
               
                   
                 Notification is Fax, then enter 
               
               
                   
                 appropriate information for fax. 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Reset to the state as was on loading 
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 the page 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1178]    3.1.2. Screen Flow 
       (See FIG. I- 77 ) 
     4. Business Rule Mapping 
       [1179]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Activity 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Carrier Issues 
                 Carrier Issue is the screen that needs to be handled by 
               
               
                   
                 personnel skilled with the operations of the 
               
               
                   
                 PacAdvantage and the coordination of data with the 
               
               
                   
                 Carriers. 
               
               
                   
                 All issues are entered and followed up for the resolution 
               
               
                   
                 of the issue. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Benefit Partners 
     Process Specification 
     Billing 
     1. Introduction 
       [1180]    1.1. Purpose
       The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Billing. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.       
 
         [1182]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_FI_001 
                 Finance - Business use case 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Specification - Billing 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1183]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [1184]    2.1. Background
       Billing is the process of creating the invoice for the Customers enrolled in the PacAdvantage program. The Invoice is on broad base classified into two—First Time Invoice (invoice to the group/member that has enrolled as new business) and Running invoice or periodic invoice (To the existing Group/Members).       
 
         [1186]    2.2. Process Description
       The objective of the Billing process is to:
           1) Generate first time invoice to the groups/members who have enrolled as new business. The invoice should get all the information about the group/member prior to invoicing. Generation of first time invoice is an automated process and should be triggered on completion of group/member enrollment.   2) Generate running invoice or periodic invoice to the existing groups/members. All the information about the existing group/members and their real time transaction details are required to invoice correctly.   
           This billing sub module also needs to have a feature to incorporate the following.
           Suppress periodic Bill for a specific Group/Member or collective group and members   Preview invoice prior to creation of actual invoice.   Suppress late fee for a specific Group/Member or collective group and members   Calculate Reinstatement Fee for a specific Group/Member or collective group and members   Include feature to add dynamic content on the bills sent to the for a specific Group/Member or collective groups and members   Calculate additional fee for Credit card transaction if applicable.   Calculate adjustment when there is retrospective change in Benefit Level (for the Carrier Selected) for group/member and make adjustments in the subsequent bill.   Calculate adjustment if the group/members have termed.   Generate manual invoice and preview invoices before generating them.   All billing transactions would be period specific (i.e. the bills would be associated with the month of coverage). Invoices would be run only on a monthly basis, whatever is the billing frequency. For example if the billing frequency opted is quarterly. The excess amount would be adjusted as credits in the subsequent month&#39;s invoices.   Invoice view/preview prior to generation of invoice needs to be provided in the Enrollment module.   
               
 
         [1202]    2.3. Process Flow 
         [1203]    Process for Billing—First Time Invoice
       1) Enrollment is completed for the new business prior to generation of First Time Invoice.   2) All information relevant for billing (Generation of Invoice is gathered) These information are
           Group ID   Group Billing Address   Billing information for the group like billing frequency, mode of payment and relevant information for mode of payment like EFT or Credit Card.   Employees and Dependents information   Member count   Employer Contribution   Employee Contribution   Raw Rate for Each of the Benefit Level for the specific Carrier selected by the employee (for specific Age bracket, Service Area, Coverage Choice with effective date)   Rate differential based on member count (Group size) with effective date   Admin fees for the specific group type with effective date.   Agent commission that is defined in the Agent Info tab for the group if defined. Otherwise the default agent commission specified in the Carrier Maintenance Module (Agent Commission Fees) with effective date.   Additional fees if any for the specific group type with effective date.   
               
 
         [1218]    Process for Billing—Running Invoice (Periodic Invoice)
       1) Monthly or periodic invoice is sent to the existing group/members based on the Frequency selected by the group/member and the mode of communication preferred.   2) Existing billing also gathers all information relevant for billing.   3) In addition to this it also needs the previous invoice history to calculate the additional fees, late fees, reinstatement fees or as applicable.   4) The running invoice generated is for the coverage period following the previous invoice period. I.e if the previous invoice was generated in the month of Jan. 5 2002 and for the coverage period February 2002, The invoice generate on Feb. 5 2001 would be for the coverage period March 2002,   5) Billing should also calculate the Fees required for Credit Card transaction if applicable.   6) Adjustment for Add On employee/dependent or member.   7) Adjustment for Termed employee/dependent or member.   8) Reinstatement fees Termed Group, employee/dependent or member are reinstated.   9) Invoice once created by the system cannot be cancelled.   An invoice is considered closed only if the invoice has been reconciled. Hence all open invoices should be considered for late fee calculation.       
 
       3. User Interface 
       [1229]    3.1. User Interface Screens 
         [1230]    3.1.1. Suppress Batch Billing 
         [1231]    3.1.1.1. Screen Snapshot (See FIG. J- 1 ) 
         [1232]    3.1.1.2. Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Bill Period 
                 Option Box 
                 Bill Period 
                 Bill period for which batch billing is suppressed 
               
               
                 Selected 
                 Display Text 
                 Selected Groups 
                 Displays count of groups selected out of total 
               
               
                 Groups 
                   
                   
                 groups 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Filter 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Group Id 
                 Text Box 
                 Group Id 
                 To filter groups based on group id 
               
               
                 Group Name 
                 Text Box 
                 Group Name 
                 To filter groups based on group name 
               
               
                 Group Type 
                 Option Box 
                 Group Type 
                 To filter groups based on group type 
               
               
                 Group Size 
                 Text Box 
                 Group Size 
                 To filter groups based on group size 
               
               
                 ROE Date 
                 Text Box 
                 ROE Date - To 
                 To filter groups based on ROE date of groups 
               
               
                 Range 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Text Box 
                 Effective Date - 
                 To filter groups based on effective date of groups 
               
               
                 Range 
                   
                 To 
               
               
                 Rate Type 
                 Option Box 
                 Rate Type 
                 To filter groups based on rate type 
               
               
                 View 
                 Option Box 
                 View 
                 To filter groups based on whether batch billing is 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 suppressed or not 
               
               
                 Filter 
                 Command 
                 Filter 
                 Refreshes group selection table based on the filter 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 entered 
               
               
                 Clear Filter 
                 Command 
                 Clear Filter 
                 Clears the filter and displays all groups in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 group selection table 
               
               
                 Groups 
                 Selection 
                   
                 For selecting groups for export. Options for 
               
               
                 Selection 
                 Table 
                   
                 selection all groups, all groups in a page, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 deselecting all and selection inversion are 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 available to the user. 
               
               
                 New 
                 Command 
                 New 
                 Clears the screen 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Command 
                 Save 
                 Saves the suppressed groups information to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 database 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1233]    3.1.1.3. Screen Validations. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Action/Validation 
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Bill Period 
                 Check to see that 
                 “Please enter a valid billing period” 
               
               
                   
                 billing period is not 
               
               
                   
                 null 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1234]    3.1.2. Group Auto Bill Suppressing 
         [1235]    3.1.2.1. Screen Snapshot (See FIG. J- 2 ) 
         [1236]    3.1.2.2. Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Run Id 
                 Display Text 
                 Import Id 
                 Displays unique system 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 generated id for the bill 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 process run 
               
               
                 Bill Period 
                 Option Box 
                 Bill Period 
                 Period for which batch billing 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 is run 
               
               
                 Run By 
                 Display Text 
                 Run By 
                 Displays id of user who 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 initiated the process 
               
               
                 New 
                 Command 
                 New 
                 Clears the screen 
               
               
                 Process 
                 Command 
                 Process 
                 Starts the batch billing process 
               
               
                 View Status 
                 Command 
                 View Status 
                 View status of batch 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 billing process 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1237]    3.1.2.3. Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Bill 
                 Check to see that billing 
                 “Please enter a valid billing period” 
               
               
                 Period 
                 period is not null 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1238]    3.1.3. Manual Bill 
         [1239]    3.1.3.1. Screen Snapshot (See FIG. J- 3 ) 
         [1240]    3.1.3.2 Element Name, Element Tyne &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                   
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Bill Details 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Bill # 
                 Display Text 
                 Bill # 
                 Displays unique system generated bill # 
               
               
                 Bill Date 
                 Display Text 
                 Bill Date 
                 Displays bill date 
               
               
                 Bill Period 
                 Option Box 
                 Bill Period 
                 Period for which group is billed 
               
               
                 Due Date 
                 Display Text 
                 Due Date 
                 Displays date on which bill is due 
               
               
                 Status 
                 Display Text 
                 Status 
                 Displays the status of bill: Open or Reconciled 
               
               
                 Reconciled 
                 Display Text 
                 Reconciled 
                 Displays date on which bill was reconciled 
               
               
                 Date 
                   
                 Date 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Group Information 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Group Id 
                 Text Box 
                 Group Id 
                 Id of the group being billed 
               
               
                 Group Type 
                 Display Text 
                 Group Type 
                 Displays group type 
               
               
                 Group name 
                 Display Text 
                 Group Name 
                 Displays group name 
               
               
                 Association 
                 Display Text 
                 Association 
                 Displays name of association if group is enrolled 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                 Name 
                 through one 
               
               
                 Status 
                 Display Text 
                 Status 
                 Displays status of group 
               
               
                 Rate Type 
                 Display Text 
                 Rate Type 
                 Displays the rate type for the group: blended or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 non-blended 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Billing Summary 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Prior Bill 
                 Display Text 
                 Prior period 
                 Displays prior period bill amount for the group 
               
               
                 Amount 
                   
                 billed amount 
               
               
                 Adjustments 
                 Display Text 
                 Adjustments 
                 Displays adjustments total for the group 
               
               
                   
                   
                 since prior 
               
               
                   
                   
                 period 
               
               
                 Payments 
                 Display Text 
                 Payments 
                 Displays payments made by the group from 
               
               
                   
                   
                 received 
                 previous bill 
               
               
                 Current Bill 
                 Display Text 
                 Current bill 
                 Displays current bill amount 
               
               
                   
                   
                 amount 
               
               
                 Total Due 
                 Display Text 
                 Total due 
                 Displays total due from the group 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Employer Level Adjustments 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Adjustment 
                 Option Box 
                 Adjustment 
                 Type of adjustment 
               
               
                 Type 
                   
                 Type 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Text Box 
                 Amount 
                 Adjustment Amount 
               
               
                 Period 
                 Option Box 
                 Period 
                 Period for which adjustment entry is posted 
               
               
                 Adjustments 
                 Entry Table 
               
               
                 Entry Table 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Employee Level Adjustments 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Employee 
                 Display 
                 Employee 
                 Displays name of employee 
               
               
                 Name 
                 Column 
                 Name 
               
               
                 Period 
                 Display 
                 Period 
                 Displays adjustment period 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Plan Name 
                 Display 
                 Plan Name 
                 Displays the name of the plan 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Plan Type 
                 Display 
                 Plan Type 
                 Displays plan type 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                 Display 
                 Coverage Type 
                 Displays coverage option selected by the employee 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Column 
               
               
                 # Members 
                 Display 
                 # Members 
                 Displays member count under the employee&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
                   
                 coverage 
               
               
                 Premium 
                 Display 
                 Premium 
                 Displays premium 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Admin Fee 
                 Display 
                 Admin Fee 
                 Displays admin fee 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Agent Fee 
                 Display 
                 Agent Fee 
                 Displays agent fee 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Total 
                 Display 
                 Agent Fee 
                 Displays total premium 
               
               
                 Premium 
                 Column 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Employee Level Detail 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Employee 
                 Display 
                 Employee 
                 Displays name of employee 
               
               
                 Name 
                 Column 
                 Name 
               
               
                 Plan Name 
                 Display 
                 Plan Name 
                 Displays the name of the plan 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Plan Type 
                 Display 
                 Plan Type 
                 Displays plan type 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                 Display 
                 Coverage Type 
                 Displays coverage option selected by the employee 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Column 
               
               
                 # Members 
                 Display 
                 # Members 
                 Displays member count under the employee&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
                   
                 coverage 
               
               
                 Premium 
                 Display 
                 Premium 
                 Displays premium 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Admin Fee 
                 Display 
                 Admin Fee 
                 Displays admin fee 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Agent Fee 
                 Display 
                 Agent Fee 
                 Displays agent fee 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Total 
                 Display 
                 Total Premium 
                 Displays total premium 
               
               
                 Premium 
                 Column 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Bill Summary 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Medical 
                 Display Text 
                 Subtotal - 
                 Displays medical premium subtotal 
               
               
                 Premium 
                   
                 Medical 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Premium 
               
               
                 Dental 
                 Display Text 
                 Subtotal - 
                 Displays dental premium subtotal 
               
               
                 Premium 
                   
                 Dental 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Premium 
               
               
                 Vision 
                 Display Text 
                 Subtotal - 
                 Displays vision premium subtotal 
               
               
                 Premium 
                   
                 Vision 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Premium 
               
               
                 CAM 
                 Display Text 
                 Subtotal - 
                 Displays CAM premium subtotal 
               
               
                 Premium 
                   
                 CAM Premium 
               
               
                 Admin 
                 Display Text 
                 Administration 
                 Displays total of member level admin fee 
               
               
                 Member Fee 
                   
                 Member Fee 
               
               
                 Agent 
                 Display Text 
                 Agent Member 
                 Displays total of member level agent fee 
               
               
                 Member Fee 
                   
                 Fee 
               
               
                 Admin Flat 
                 Display Text 
                 Administration 
                 Displays group level admin flat fee 
               
               
                 Fee 
                   
                 Flat fee 
               
               
                 Agent Flat 
                 Display Text 
                 Agent Flat Fee 
                 Displays group level agent flat fee 
               
               
                 Fee 
               
               
                 Current Due 
                 Display Text 
                 Total Due 
                 Displays current bill amount 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Current Period 
               
               
                 Past Due 
                 Display Text 
                 Add Past 
                 Displays amount due from previous bill 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Amount Due 
               
               
                 Total due 
                 Display Text 
                 Total Due 
                 Displays total due from the group 
               
               
                 New 
                 Command 
                 New 
                 Clears the screen 
               
               
                 Create 
                 Command 
                 Create 
                 Creates the bill 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1241]    3.1.3.3. Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Bill Period 
                 Check to see if bill period is not null 
                 “Please enter 
               
               
                   
                 and is valid 
                 a valid bill period” 
               
               
                 Group Id 
                 Check to see if group id is not null 
                 “Please enter a 
               
               
                   
                 and is valid 
                 valid group id” 
               
               
                 Adjustment 
                 Check to see that the value for the 
                 “Please enter a valid 
               
               
                 Type 
                 filed is not null and is valid 
                 adjustment type” 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Check to see that the value for the 
                 “Please enter a valid 
               
               
                   
                 filed is not null and is valid 
                 adjustment amount” 
               
               
                 Period 
                 Check to see that the value for the 
                 “Please enter a valid 
               
               
                   
                 filed is not null and is valid 
                 adjustment period” 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1242]    3.1.4. Billing Adjustments 
         [1243]    3.1.4.1. Screen Snapshot (See FIG. J- 4 ) 
         [1244]    3.1.4.2. Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Adjustment Id 
                 Display Text 
                 Adjustment Id 
                 Displays unique system generated id for the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 adjustment 
               
               
                 Adjustment 
                 Text Box 
                 Adjustment Date 
                 Adjustment Date 
               
               
                 Date 
               
               
                 Status 
                 Display Text 
                 Status 
                 Status of the adjustment: Open or Reconciled 
               
               
                 Group Id 
                 Text Box 
                 Group Id 
                 Id of group for which adjustment entry is made 
               
               
                 Group Type 
                 Display Text 
                 Group Type 
                 Displays group type 
               
               
                 Group Name 
                 Display Text 
                 Group Name 
                 Displays group name 
               
               
                 Association 
                 Display Text 
                 Association 
                 Displays name of association if group is enrolled 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                 Name 
                 through one 
               
               
                 Group Status 
                 Display Text 
                 Group Status 
                 Displays status of group 
               
               
                 Adjustment 
                 Option Box 
                 Adjustment Type 
                 Type of adjustment 
               
               
                 Type 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Text Box 
                 Amount 
                 Adjustment Amount 
               
               
                 Period 
                 Option Box 
                 Period 
                 Period for which adjustment entry is posted 
               
               
                 New 
                 Command 
                 New 
                 Clears screen for a new adjustment entry 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Command 
                 Save 
                 Saves the adjustment entry to the database 
               
               
                 Search 
                 Command 
                 Search 
                 Provides search functionality for adjustments 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1245]    3.1.4.3. Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Group Id 
                 Check to see that the value for the 
                 “Please enter a 
               
               
                   
                 filed is not null and is valid 
                 valid group id” 
               
               
                 Adjustment 
                 Check to see that the value for the 
                 “Please enter a valid 
               
               
                 Type 
                 filed is not null and is valid 
                 adjustment type” 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Check to see that the value for the 
                 “Please enter a valid 
               
               
                   
                 filed is not null and is valid 
                 adjustment amount” 
               
               
                 Period 
                 Check to see that the value for the 
                 “Please enter a valid 
               
               
                   
                 filed is not null and is valid 
                 adjustment period” 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1246]    3.2. Interface Flow
       N/A       
 
       4. Business Rule Mapping 
       [1248]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Activity 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 I - First Time Invoice 
                 Blended 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 For Small Employer Group 
                 (New Business) Note: All new business falls under blended rate  
               
               
                   
                   
                 only 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 1. 
                 Check All the member for Small Employer Group 
               
               
                   
                 2. 
                 Check the Employee Raw Rate for the Specific Line of Coverage for the (Carrier  
               
               
                   
                   
                 Selected) Benefit Level. 
               
               
                   
                 3. 
                 Apply formula on the entire employee for all the line of coverage provided by the group  
               
               
                   
                   
                 for the (Carrier Selected) Benefit Level (Age Bracket, Coverage Choice and Service Area  
               
               
                   
                   
                 for the specific Employee). Refer Formula 
               
               
                   
                 4. 
                 The Admin Fees, Agent Commission and Rare Differential Factor are governed by the  
               
               
                   
                   
                 effective date. Apply the effective date for these fees with the Effective date for the Group  
               
               
                   
                   
                 in deriving the Blended rate for the employees and the total amount payable by the Group.  
               
               
                   
                   
                 However the Agent commission is based on the one provided at the group level in the  
               
               
                   
                   
                 Agent Information Tab. It overrides the fee provided in the carrier maintenance agent  
               
               
                   
                   
                 commission fees. 
               
               
                   
                 5. 
                 Check if the initial payment made by the group equals the Total amount as derived above.  
               
               
                   
                   
                 If not then check the difference. Allow for Reconciliation up to $2 without and authorized  
               
               
                   
                   
                 intervention. For amount between $50-$3 Allow reconciliation based on security. For  
               
               
                   
                   
                 amount above $50 allow reconciliation based on ultimate authority. (This rule governs if  
               
               
                   
                   
                 the group can be enrolled or not. Hence there should be an invoice preview that identifies  
               
               
                   
                   
                 the Cash received and the total amount due for the new business) This should be viewable  
               
               
                   
                   
                 by all. 
               
               
                   
                 6. 
                 The rate should be picked up based on the rules specified below: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check the Effective date for the Group (initial enrollment date) 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Check the rate from the rate table whose effective date is latest but less than the effective  
               
               
                   
                   
                 date of the Group. (E.g.) Group Effective date 3/1/01. Rate effective dates 1/1/01 and  
               
               
                   
                   
                 7/1/01. In this example since the group effective date is 3/1/01 the Rate picked should be  
               
               
                   
                   
                 1/1/01 effective date rate. 
               
               
                   
                 7. 
                 Show the Employer Contribution and the Employee Deduction in the invoice summary.  
               
               
                   
                   
                 Billing Address should be picked up based on the billing address provided by the group. If  
               
               
                   
                   
                 billing address is not provided, then business address should be considered for billing.  
               
               
                   
                   
                 Also check the mode of communication. If the group prefers to be mailed emailed or  
               
               
                   
                   
                 faxed and accordingly transmit the invoice. Refer Sample Invoice 1 for the Small  
               
               
                   
                   
                 Employer Group (New Business) 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Note: Small employer may bring in the COBRA members. Bill the COBRA members  
               
               
                   
                 separately or along with the Group based on the decision made for billing the COBRA Group. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                   
                 If the COBRA members are billed separately. Generate a separate invoice for the each  
               
               
                   
                   
                 subscriber COBRA members. Refer Rule for COBRA Member Invoice 
               
               
                   
                   
                 However the bill for the COBRA members can be sent to the primary group if that option  
               
               
                   
                   
                 is selected. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 All COBRA Invoices whether billed to the primary group or the COBRA Group should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 have a separate invoice for all the COBRA groups. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 For COBRA Members 
                 (New Business) Note: All new business falls under blended rate  
               
               
                   
                   
                 only even for COBRA members brought by new business. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 1. 
                 Check the entire subscriber COBRA member for Small Employer Group (primary Group). 
               
               
                   
                 2. 
                 Check Coverage Choice for the Subscriber member for each lines of coverage and also  
               
               
                   
                   
                 note that these line of coverage are selected by the Primary group. 
               
               
                   
                 3. 
                 Check what are the line of coverage picked up be each of the members including the  
               
               
                   
                   
                 subscriber member and their dependent. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Note: The rate for the COBRA member should be based on the following rule. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                   
                 Identify the subscriber member line of coverage selected. The age, service area and the  
               
               
                   
                   
                 coverage choice provided by the subscriber member is the governing rate. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If the subscriber does not select the line of coverage that the dependent member have  
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected. Check if the dependent member have relation ship as spouse or child/children. If  
               
               
                   
                   
                 the Relationship is spouse then the Spouse Age should be the deciding factor for the rate  
               
               
                   
                   
                 and the coverage choice opted. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If the relationship is child/children then the eldest dependent member should be the  
               
               
                   
                   
                 deciding factor for the rate based on the Age. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Note however in all the above cases the Service Area is governed by the Service area of the  
               
               
                   
                 Subscriber COBRA member. 
               
               
                   
                 Note: If the Primary COBRA member is a child they have their own Group ID and their own  
               
               
                   
                 line of coverage and benefit level. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 For Individual Association  
                 (New Business) Note: All new business falls under blended rate  
               
               
                   
                 Member 
                 even for the individual association member. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 1. 
                 Individual association member can have dependent attached to the member. 
               
               
                   
                 2. 
                 The rate for the individual association member is governed by the rate applicable for the  
               
               
                   
                   
                 Guaranteed association based on the effective date for the Association. 
               
               
                   
                 3. 
                 The individual members can have the same line of coverage as defined by the association. 
               
               
                   
                 4. 
                 The Admin Fee, Agent Commission, Additional fees and rate differential factor is as  
               
               
                   
                   
                 applicable for the Association with the effective date. 
               
               
                   
                 5. 
                 The calculation formula is the same as applicable for the employee of Small employer  
               
               
                   
                   
                 group. 
               
               
                   
                 6. 
                 The dependents for the individual association members are governed by what has been  
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected by the subscriber individual association member. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Small employer Group  
                 New Business) Note: All new business falls under blended rate 
               
               
                   
                 affiliated to association 
                 even for the Small employer group affiliated to an association. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 1. 
                 Small employer groups affiliated with an association have the same rules as applicable  
               
               
                   
                   
                 to the Small employer group with exception for the rate. 
               
               
                   
                 2. 
                 The Admin fees, Agent commission, additional fees and Differential factor for the small  
               
               
                   
                   
                 employer groups affiliated with an association are as defined for the Association with  
               
               
                   
                   
                 effective date for the Association. 
               
               
                   
                 3. 
                 However the Agent commission is based on the one provided at the group level in the  
               
               
                   
                   
                 Agent Information Tab. It overrides the fee provided in the carrier maintenance agent  
               
               
                   
                   
                 commission fees 
               
             
          
           
               
                 II - First Time Invoice Formula 
                 Blended for Small Employer Group 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Blended Rate = (Raw Rate * Differential Factor)/(1 − Agent Commission % − Admin Fee %) 
               
               
                 Example 
                 The formula for the premium calculation for invoice Blended is as follows (Blended) 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 a) 
                 Raw Rate 
               
               
                   
                 b) 
                 Agent Commission 
               
               
                   
                 c) 
                 Admin fee 
               
               
                   
                 d) 
                 Additional Fees 
               
               
                   
                 e) 
                 Differential factor 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
                 The total amount billed to group should include all the Rates after applying this formula for  
               
               
                   
                 all the employees/members and their line of coverage. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 III - First Time Invoice Formula 
                 Blended for COBRA Members 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Example 
                 The formula for the premium calculation for the invoice Blended for Cal COBRA is as  
               
               
                   
                 follows: 
               
               
                   
                 Cal Cobra Total Premium = Blended Rate * (1 + Additional Fees %) 
               
               
                   
                 
                   
                             
                     
                         
                         
                     
                   
                 
               
               
                   
                 The total amount billed to COBRA Subscriber member should include all the Rates after 
               
               
                   
                 applying this formula for all the members and their line of coverage. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 IV - Running Invoice 
                 Blended 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 1. 
                 For Running invoice all that is applicable for first time invoice is applicable. In addition to  
               
               
                   
                   
                 that the running invoice has the following as well: 
               
               
                   
                 2. 
                 Late fee if applicable: Late fee charges are 5% on the Amount due in the prior invoices.  
               
               
                   
                   
                 The late fee calculation rule is as follows: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Due Date: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Postmark date: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Received date: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If the post mark date for cash receipt is available it should fall on or before due date. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If postmark date is not available then if should check 5 calendar days backward from the  
               
               
                   
                   
                 date received and see if it falls within the due date. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If the amount is received within the due date as per the above rules and is short late fee is  
               
               
                   
                   
                 still applied for the shortage of premium. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 If the above two conditions are not satisfied then late fee is charged for the Group or  
               
               
                   
                   
                 member. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Note: Late fee is charged on the prior month&#39;s current premium 
               
               
                   
                 (e.g.) Due date is l st  of every month or the first business day of the month. Whichever is 
               
               
                   
                 applicable. For example 2/1/01 
               
               
                   
                 Date payment received: 2/1/01 No late fee 
               
               
                   
                 Date payment received is 2/2/01 and post marked 1/31/01 No late fee 
               
               
                   
                 Date payment received is 2/3/01 and post marked 2/2/01 late fee applicable 
               
               
                   
                 Date payment received is 2/6/01 and postmarked date not available. Look 5 days behind for  
               
               
                   
                 the date for receipt, I.e 2/1/01 hence no late fees 
               
               
                   
                 Date payment received is 2/8/01 and postmarked date not available. Look 5 days behind for  
               
               
                   
                 the date for receipt. I.e 2/3/01 hence late fees applicable. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 3. 
                 Balance forward if applicable: Balance forward is the amount balance from the previous  
               
               
                   
                   
                 invoice or shortage of premium. 
               
               
                   
                 4. 
                 Billing Adjustment: Billing adjustments can have various categories: Note The adjustment  
               
               
                   
                   
                 can be positive or negative based on the coverage period. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Employee Coverage Choice Change 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Employee/Dependent Benefit Level (Selected carrier) change 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Employee/Dependent Termination 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Employee/Dependent Add On 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Rate for the Benefit Level Offered by the carrier changes retrospectively. I.e over writing  
               
               
                   
                   
                 the previous effective date that was applicable for the group. 
               
               
                   
                 5. 
                 Credit Card Payment transaction fee if applicable: Credit card transaction fee is  
               
               
                   
                   
                 2.5% of the total amount due for the group/member 
               
               
                   
                 6. 
                 NSF Check if applicable: $25 handling fees is charged for the NSF check. 
               
               
                   
                 7. 
                 Reinstatement fees: (Reinstatement fees are on the following assumption that on the date  
               
               
                   
                   
                 of term all the previous balances on the group are settled.) The group needs to be  
               
               
                   
                   
                 reinstated on the date next to the term date. The Amount due for the reinstatement from  
               
               
                   
                   
                 the date following the term dates to the current month when the group is reinstated. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 (e.g.) Group Term Dare: 2/31/01 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                   
                 Date when the group was reinstated 5/10/01 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Effective reinstatement date is 3/1/01. Reinstatement fees is calculated for the Period 3/1/01  
               
               
                   
                 I.e. the month when the reinstatement occurred. The invoice contains the premium due for the  
               
               
                   
                 next month as well i.e. 6/1/01. However the current amount due is based on the current period  
               
               
                   
                 i.e. from 3/1/01 to 5/31/01. Next months period 6/31/01 and reinstatement fees 
               
               
                   
                 Percentage on the premium due when reinstatement occurred (The amount on which the  
               
               
                   
                 reinstatement fees is calculated.) 
               
               
                   
                 Note: Subsequent billing cycle would contain the Reinstatement Adjustments and  
               
               
                   
                 Reinstatement fees on reinstatement for the group/member. 
               
               
                   
                 A reinstatement fee is 10% of the premium due when reinstatement occurred. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 V - Running Invoice 
                 Non-Blended 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Note: The difference in the rules for non-blended and blended is in the rate calculation rules.  
               
               
                   
                 The rest of the processes are same as for the blended. 
               
               
                 Formula 
                 Formula for Non-Blended Rates 
               
               
                   
                 The formula for the premium calculation for the invoice Non-Blended is as follows 
               
               
                   
                 (Non-Blended) 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 a) 
                 Raw Rate 
               
               
                   
                 b) 
                 Agent Commission per Member 
               
               
                   
                 c) 
                 Agent Commission per Group based on group size 
               
               
                   
                 d) 
                 Admin fee per Member 
               
               
                   
                 e) 
                 Admin fee per Group based on group size 
               
               
                   
                 f) 
                 Additional Fees 
               
               
                   
                 g) 
                 Differential factor 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Member Level Fees = Raw Rate + Member Count * (Agent Commission Per Member +  
               
               
                   
                 Admin Fee Per Member) 
               
               
                   
                 Note (If differential factor is applicable then Raw rate should be factored i.e Raw Rate *  
               
               
                   
                 Differential Factor) 
               
               
                   
                 Group Level Fees = Agent Commission per Group Size + Admin Fees per Group size 
               
               
                   
                 Total Non Blended Premium Billed to Group = Member Level Fees + Group Level Fees 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Example 
                 Raw Rate 
                 = 
                 $100 
               
               
                   
                 Agent Commission per Member 
                 = 
                 $10 
               
               
                   
                 Agent Commission per Group based on group size 
                 = 
                 $50 for Group size =&gt; 15 
               
               
                   
                 Admin fee per Member 
                 = 
                 $10 
               
               
                   
                 Admin fee per Group based on group size 
                 = 
                 $50 for Group size =&gt; 15 
               
               
                   
                 Additional Fees 
                 = 
                 10% on Raw Rate 
               
               
                   
                 Differential factor 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Employee1 Member count including employee 
                 = 
                  3 
               
               
                   
                 Employee2 Member count including employee 
                 = 
                  2 
               
               
                   
                 Employee3 Member count including employee 
                 = 
                  4 
               
               
                   
                 Employee4 Member count including employee 
                 = 
                  5 
               
               
                   
                 Employee5 Member count including employee 
                 = 
                  1 
               
               
                   
                 Total Member count 
                 = 
                 15 
               
               
                   
                 Group size (=&gt; 15) 
                 = 
                 15 
               
               
                   
                 Member Level Fee 
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Employee1 = 100 + 3 (10 + 10) 
                 = 
                 $160 
               
               
                   
                 Employee2 = 100 + 2 (10 + 10) 
                 = 
                 $140 
               
               
                   
                 Employee3 = 100 + 4 (10 + 10) 
                 = 
                 $180 
               
               
                   
                 Employee4 = 100 + 5 (10 + 10) 
                 = 
                 $200 
               
               
                   
                 Employee5 = 100 + 1 (10 + 10) 
                 = 
                 $120 
               
               
                   
                 Member Level Fees 
                 = 
                 $800 
               
               
                   
                 Group Level Fees  
                 = 
                 $50 + $50 + $100 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Total Non Blended Premium Billed to Group =  
               
               
                   
                 Member Level Fees + Group Level Fees = $800 + $100 = $900 
               
               
                   
                 This formula is for the specific Benefit Level (offered by carrier) for a specific line of  
               
               
                   
                 coverage and a specific employed member. 
               
               
                   
                 The total amount billed to group should include all the Rates after applying this formula for  
               
               
                   
                 all the employees/members and their line of coverage. 
               
               
                 Formula 
                 Formula for Non-Blended Rates 
               
               
                 Example 
                 The formula for the premium calculation for the invoice Non Blended for Cal COBRA is as  
               
               
                   
                 follows: 
               
               
                   
                 Member Premium for Cal COBRA − Raw Rate * (1 + Additionul fee %) 
               
               
                   
                 Example: 
               
               
                   
                 Member Premium for Cal COBRA = 100 * (1 + 0.10) = $110 
               
               
                   
                 Amount Billed to COBRA Group = $110 
               
               
                   
                 This formula is for the specific Benefit Level (offered by carrier) for a specific line of  
               
               
                   
                 coverage and a specific employee/member. 
               
               
                   
                 The total amount billed to COBRA Subscriber member should include all the Rates after  
               
               
                   
                 applying this formula for all the members and their line of coverage. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Process Specification 
     Cash Receipt 
     1. Introduction 
       [1249]    1.1. Purpose
       The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Cash Receipt. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.       
 
         [1251]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_FI_002 
                 Finance - Business use case 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Specification - Cash Receipt 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1252]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 EFT 
                 Electronic Fund Transfer 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [1253]    2.1. Background
       Cash Receipt is the process of entering the cash received by BPI into the system. The cash receipt can be received in various modes as defined by the business process. Cash Receipt includes Lock Box receipts, Check, Credit Card, EFT and Transfer.       
 
         [1255]    2.2. Process Description
       This Cash Receipt sub module also needs to incorporate the following.
           1) Enter the lock box payment received as a batch process into the system   2) Enter EFT payment received as a batch process into the system   3) EFT payment made directly to Wells Fargo Bank   4) On line payment using the Credit Card and Check   5) User interface to make payment over phone by Credit card or Check   6) Credit Card payment with automatic pulling of the cash or manually on request   7) Handle negative check i.e. NSF&#39;s, Refund and Transfer.   8) Transfer of cash from one group to the other.   
           This Cash Receipt sub module also needs to have a feature to incorporate the following.
           Batch the cash receipt based on the batch number defined.   There should be ability to batch each of the modes of the payment received into a separate batch.   For EFT, Credit Card, On Line Check and Lockbox payments there should be ability to upload the files into the system as one batch. Reconciliation will follow once the batch is imported and closed.   In addition, prior entry of Lock box total entry made needs to tally with the lock box total.   
           This document details only one mode of cash entry namely, Manual Batch. Lockbox, EFT and payments through credit cards are detailed in their respective process specification documents.       
 
         [1271]    2.3. Process Flow
       Cash receipts into the system can be from the following sources:
           EFT   Check received at BPI   Lock Box file   On line Credit Card   Check or Credit card over phone   
           The cash received by any of the above mode is batched and entered into the system. The batch number is identified based on the mode of payment receipts. All batches should be identified uniquely with batch number and timestamp.   The Payment received are either entered manually into the system or uploaded into the system from the files available. The batch total and sum of the entries made in each batch should tally before saving the batch.   Batch date should represent the deposit date.   Batch Types are:
           1. Manual Batch   2. NSF Batch   3. Returns Batch   4. Positive Transfer   5. Negative Transfer   6. Lockbox Check   7. Auto-Batch EFT   8. Direct Deposit   9. Wire Transfer   10. CC over phone   11. Auto-Batch Credit Card   12. Online Credit Card   
               
 
       3. User Interface 
       [1294]    3.1. User Interface Screens 
         [1295]    3.1.1. Manual Cash Batch 
         [1296]    3.1.1.1. Screen Snapshot (See FIG. J- 5 ) 
         [1297]    3.1.1.2. Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Batch Information 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Batch Id 
                 Display Text 
                 Batch Id 
                 Displays unique system generated id for the batch 
               
               
                 Batch Date 
                 Text Box 
                 Batch Date 
                 Batch Date 
               
               
                 Batch Total 
                 Display Text 
                 Batch Total 
                 Displays total of all cash entries 
               
               
                 Batch Type 
                 Option Box 
                 Batch Type 
                 Type of manual batch. Possible options are 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Manual Batch, NSF Batch, Returns Batch, 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Positive Transfer, Negative Transfer 
               
               
                 Tape Total 
                 Text Box 
                 Tape Total 
                 Tape total of all cash entries 
               
               
                 Tape Balance 
                 Display Text 
                 Tape Balance 
                 Displays difference between the tape total and 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 total of cash entries entered 
               
               
                 Batch Status 
                 Display Text 
                 Batch Status 
                 Displays status of batch: Open or Closed 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Check Information 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Postmark Date 
                 Text Box 
                 Postmark Date 
                 Date on which the payment was postmarked 
               
               
                 Received Date 
                 Text Box 
                 Received Date 
                 Date on which payment was received 
               
               
                 Check # 
                 Text Box 
                 Check # 
                 Check number 
               
               
                 Check Amount 
                 Text Box 
                 Check Amount 
                 Check amount 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Check Distribution 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Group Id 
                 Text Box 
                 Group Id 
                 Group against which payment is allocated 
               
               
                 Group Name 
                 Display Text 
                 Group Name 
                 Displays name of selected group 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Text Box 
                 Amount 
                 Amount allocated to the group out of the total 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 payment amount 
               
               
                 Comments 
                 Option Box 
                 Comments 
                 Standard comments for the payment, if any 
               
               
                 Others 
                 Text Box 
                 Others 
                 To enter any comments other than the standard 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 ones 
               
               
                 Payment 
                 Editable Table 
                   
                 Displays all payment entries for the batch for 
               
               
                 Entries 
                   
                   
                 editing 
               
               
                 New 
                 Command 
                 New 
                 Clears screen for a new batch entry 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Command 
                 Save 
                 Saves the batch information to the database 
               
               
                 Close 
                 Command 
                 Close 
                 Closes the batch. A batch can not be edited after 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 closing 
               
               
                 Search 
                 Command 
                 Search 
                 To search for saved batches 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1298]    3.1.1.3. Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Batch Information 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Batch Date 
                 Check to see if batch date is not 
                 “Please enter a valid 
               
               
                   
                 null and is valid 
                 batch date” 
               
               
                 Batch Type 
                 Check to see if valid batch type is 
                 “Please select a 
               
               
                   
                 selected 
                 valid batch type” 
               
               
                 Tape Total 
                 Check to see if tape total is not null 
                 “Please enter a 
               
               
                   
                 and is valid 
                 valid tape total” 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Check Information 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Postmark Date 
                 Check to see if postmark date is 
                 “Please enter a valid 
               
               
                   
                 not null and is valid 
                 postmark date” 
               
               
                 Received Date 
                 Check to see if the received date is 
                 “Please enter a valid 
               
               
                   
                 not null and is valid 
                 received date” 
               
               
                 Check # 
                 Check to see if check number is 
                 “Please enter a valid 
               
               
                   
                 not null and is valid 
                 check number” 
               
               
                 Check Amount 
                 Check to see if check amount is 
                 “Please enter a valid 
               
               
                   
                 not null and is valid 
                 check amount” 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Check Distribution 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Group Id 
                 Check to see if group id is not null 
                 “Please enter a 
               
               
                   
                 and is valid 
                 valid group id” 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Check to see if amount is not null 
                 “Please enter a 
               
               
                   
                 and is valid 
                 valid amount” 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1299]    3.2. Interface Flow
       N/A       
 
       4. Business Rule Mapping 
       [1301]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Activities 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Batch Entry 
                 Unique id should be created for each batched. The batch total should be tallied to the 
               
               
                   
                 individual sum before saving the batch. The batch id should be uniquely generated prior 
               
               
                   
                 to creation of batch. Each cash receipt should have the postmark date, date received and 
               
               
                   
                 the system date (I.e the date when the batch is created) and batch total. The line items 
               
               
                   
                 within each batch should have a feature to Split the payment for multiple group ids if 
               
               
                   
                 required. Batch date should be the deposit data. 
               
               
                   
                 Any entries made to the batch can be saved prior to completion of the batch entries. 
               
               
                   
                 However there would be a status for the batch which would indicate if the batch is closed 
               
               
                   
                 or not. Modification can be done only to the batches that are open. Any batch that is 
               
               
                   
                 closed cannot be modified. If there is an erroneous entry for the batch and the batch is 
               
               
                   
                 saved. Only Transfer can be done and it is not allowed to delete the batch that are closed. 
               
               
                   
                 Only the batches that are closed can be reconciled. 
               
               
                 Batch by File 
                 The batch that are created by uploading the files like for Lockbox, EFT or Credit Card 
               
               
                 Uploads 
                 will have an identification that payment for this batch was made by Lockbox, EFT or 
               
               
                   
                 Credit Card. These batches are always closed. 
               
               
                 Negative 
                 NSF would be entered into the system and there would be an indicator indicating that 
               
               
                 Check (NSF) 
                 this batch is a NSF batch. 
               
               
                 Transfer 
                 Cash transfer may be due to the reason that the Cash has been wrongly enter for the 
               
               
                   
                 group to which the cash does not belong. In such cased entering negative cash receipt for 
               
               
                   
                 the Group for whom the cash has been wrongly entered and making positive cash to the 
               
               
                   
                 group to whom the cash belongs makes the cash adjustment. There should be a positive 
               
               
                   
                 and negative cash adjustment. 
               
               
                 Returns 
                 Refund would be a batch and would be handled similar to the NSF Check. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Process Specification 
     Cash Reconciliation 
     1. Introduction 
       [1302]    1.1. Purpose
       The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Cash Reconciliation. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.       
 
         [1304]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_FI_003 
                 Finance - Business use case 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Specification - Cash 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Reconciliation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1305]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 EFT 
                 Electronic Fund Transfer 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [1306]    2.1. Background
       Cash Reconciliation is the process of reconciling the cash receipts to individual invoices and reconciling the amount paid by the group.   The objective of the Cash Reconciliation process is to reconcile:
           1) Billed amounts and cash receipt   2) Cash to negative cash   3) Adjustment to cash   4) Adjustment to billed amounts   5) Billed amount to itself if the total due results in zero   6) Adjustment to Adjustment   
               
 
         [1315]    2.2. Process Flow and Description
       Process for Cash Reconciliation:   Reconciliation is the process of matching one to one the cash received on hand and the invoices that are open. The cash are received by numerous ways as described in BPI_CAS_FSD_FI — 02 (Cash Receipt). The invoice is generated for the various groups/members based on the premium due. These invoices are matched with the cash receipts and reconciled.   The rule for reconciliation should be as follows:
           1. Look for the Negative Cash available and reconcile it with the positive cash (for NSF checks).   2. Look for the oldest unreconciled invoice and reconcile with the oldest cash.   
           The reconciliation process should look through all the invoices that have not been reconciled for a specific group and reconcile the invoice that has the earliest date with the cash received. It should also match the Cash receipt with the invoice amount.   Note: reconciliation process is started automatically when the cash receipt batch is closed and it reconciles the cash received with the invoices.
           Billed amounts and cash receipt: This reconciliation process is to reconcile the invoice that has not yet been reconciled for the specific group and check if the invoice is earliest un reconciled invoice for the specific group and reconcile the invoice with the cash received form the group/member.   Cash to negative cash: This is the process of reconciling the negative cash with the positive cash received from the group. This case arises when there is a NSF check and the group&#39;s invoice has been reconciled. The bank usually notifies NSF check and then NSF Cash receipt entry is created in the system. Now on receipt of a replacement check against the NSF check the NSF check is reconciled with the replacement check provided the amount tallies.   Adjustments to Cash: This is the process of reconciling the cash receipt with the adjustment that may be available in the next invoice. Example: If the group has received the invoice for the next month and they have an employee termed this month after the generation of invoice. The generated invoice would not identify this adjustment for the termed employees as the employee was termed after creation of invoice. But the Group may deduct the adjustments for the termed employee and send the cash that would be short as they would sent the check with the adjustments. Hence this process should identify such conditions and adjust the cash receipt for the invoice with adjustment taken in to account. The next invoice would show the cash receipt and the adjustment for the employees termed. This process can also be coined as “Reconciled but not billed”.   Adjustment to billed amounts: This process identifies the invoices that are already billed to the group and any adjustments that are not made in the current invoice needs to be adjusted in the next invoice with the adjustments made.   Billed amount to itself if the total due results in zero: This is process identifies if the group is termed and the invoice is already created for the group for the next month. Invoice would be created for the termed group on group termination and would adjust that with previous invoice. There would always be a final invoice for the termed groups showing adjustments that would include refund, or short fall or zero balance.   Adjustment to Adjustment: This process is for adjusting the late fee with late fee is waived, Reinstatement fees with reinstatement fee waive as the case may be. If the Late fee is shown in the previous invoice that can be adjusted by waiving late fee or reinstatement fees as applicable. Example: Late fees may be $25.00 and waive late fees would be $−25.00. Here adjustment to adjustment would be $25 to $25. Also adjustment needs to be made on invoice with invoice.   
               
 
       3. User Interface 
       [1329]    3.1. User Interface Screens 
         [1330]    3.1.1. Manual Reconciliation 
         [1331]    3.1.1.1. Screen Snapshot (See FIG. J- 6 ) 
         [1332]    3.1.1.2. Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Group Information 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Group Id 
                 Display Text 
                 Group Id 
                 Displays id of the group 
               
               
                 Group Type 
                 Display Text 
                 Group Type 
                 Displays group type 
               
               
                 Group Name 
                 Display Text 
                 Group Name 
                 Displays group name 
               
               
                 Association 
                 Display Text 
                 Association 
                 Displays name of association if group is enrolled 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                 Name 
                 through one 
               
               
                 Status 
                 Display Text 
                 Status 
                 Displays status of group 
               
               
                 Rate Type 
                 Display Text 
                 Rate Type 
                 Displays the rate type for the group: blended or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 non-blended 
               
               
                 Left to balance 
                 Display Text 
                 Left to balance 
                 Displays amount left to be reconciled 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Bill Information 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Bill # 
                 Display 
                 Bill # 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                 Display 
                 Coverage Period 
               
               
                 Period 
                 Column 
               
               
                 Due Date 
                 Display 
                 Due Date 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Bill Date 
                 Display 
                 Bill Date 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Bill Total 
                 Display 
                 Bill Total 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Total Due 
                 Display 
                 Total Due 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Adjustments Information 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Adjustment Id 
                 Display 
                 Adj. Id 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Adjustment 
                 Display 
                 Adj. Type 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Column 
               
               
                 Adjustment 
                 Display 
                 Adj. Date 
               
               
                 Date 
                 Column 
               
               
                 User Id 
                 Display 
                 User Id 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                 Display 
                 Cvrg Month 
               
               
                 Month 
                 Column 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Display 
                 Amount 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Cash Receipts 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Batch Id 
                 Display 
                 Batch Id 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Postmarked 
                 Display 
                 Date PM 
               
               
                 Date 
                 Column 
               
               
                 Date Received 
                 Display 
                 Date Recd 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Check # 
                 Display 
                 Check # 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Batch Type 
                 Display 
                 Batch Type 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Payment 
                 Display 
                 Pmt Amt 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Column 
               
               
                 Unused 
                 Display 
                 Unused Amt 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Column 
               
               
                 Comments 
                 Display 
                 Comments 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Post 
                 Command 
                 Post 
                 Post reconciliation entries 
               
               
                 Reconciliation 
                   
                 Reconciliation 
               
               
                 Clear 
                 Command 
                 Clear 
                 Clears screen for a new import. 
               
               
                 Search 
                 Command 
                 Search 
                 Provides functionality to search groups 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1333]    3.1.1.3. Screen Validations
       Note: Reconciliation can have any of the possible combination provided below:
           1) Invoice to Invoice   2) Invoice to Cash receipt   3) Invoice to Adjustment   4) Cash receipt to cash receipt   5) Cash receipt to adjustment   6) Adjustment to adjustment   
           Hence, the validation for the amount left to balance is done based on any of the combination selected from the check boxes.   Note: Adjustments would be shown only under special conditions where term has been initiated after generation of invoices and the group pays short taking this adjustments into account.       
 
         [1343]    3.1.2. Billing &amp; Payments History 
         [1344]    3.1.2.1. Screen Snapshot (See FIG. J- 7 ) 
         [1345]    3.1.2.2. Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Group Information 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Group Id 
                 Display Text 
                 Group Id 
                 Displays id of the group 
               
               
                 Group Type 
                 Display Text 
                 Group Type 
                 Displays group type 
               
               
                 Group Name 
                 Display Text 
                 Group Name 
                 Displays group name 
               
               
                 Association 
                 Display Text 
                 Association 
                 Displays name of association if group is enrolled 
               
               
                 Name 
                   
                 Name 
                 through one 
               
               
                 Status 
                 Display Text 
                 Status 
                 Displays status of group 
               
               
                 Rate Type 
                 Display Text 
                 Rate Type 
                 Displays the rate type for the group: blended or 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 non-blended 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Bill Information 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Bill # 
                 Display 
                 Bill # 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                 Display 
                 Coverage Period 
               
               
                 Period 
                 Column 
               
               
                 Due Date 
                 Display 
                 Due Date 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Bill Date 
                 Display 
                 Bill Date 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Bill Total 
                 Display 
                 Bill Total 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Total Due 
                 Display 
                 Total Due 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Adjustments Information 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Adjustment Id 
                 Display 
                 Adj. Id 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Adjustment 
                 Display 
                 Adj. Type 
               
               
                 Type 
                 Column 
               
               
                 Adjustment 
                 Display 
                 Adj. Date 
               
               
                 Date 
                 Column 
               
               
                 User Id 
                 Display 
                 User Id 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Coverage 
                 Display 
                 Cvrg Month 
               
               
                 Month 
                 Column 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Display 
                 Amount 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Cash Receipts 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Batch Id 
                 Display 
                 Batch Id 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Postmarked 
                 Display 
                 Date PM 
               
               
                 Date 
                 Column 
               
               
                 Date Received 
                 Display 
                 Date Recd 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Check # 
                 Display 
                 Check # 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Batch Type 
                 Display 
                 Batch Type 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Payment 
                 Display 
                 Pmt Amt 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Column 
               
               
                 Unused 
                 Display 
                 Unused Amt 
               
               
                 Amount 
                 Column 
               
               
                 Comments 
                 Display 
                 Comments 
               
               
                   
                 Column 
               
               
                 Search 
                 Command 
                 Search 
                 Provides functionality to search groups 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1346]    3.1.2.3. Screen Validations
       NA       
 
         [1348]    3.2. Interface Flow
       N/A       
 
       4. Business Rule Mapping 
       [1350]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Activities 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Automated 
                 Automatic Reconciliation would be done on closing the batch for the cash receipt. If the 
               
               
                 Reconciliation 
                 cash receipt batch were closed then it would start the reconciliation process. 
               
               
                   
                 The following process would be auto reconciled: 
               
               
                   
                 Billed amounts and cash receipt 
               
               
                   
                 Adjustment to cash 
               
               
                   
                 Billed amount to itself if the total due results in zero 
               
               
                   
                 Adjustment to billed amounts 
               
               
                 Reconciliation 
                 Reconciliation process would look for the earliest un reconciled invoice and reconciles it 
               
               
                 for the Existing 
                 provided it is less than $ +_2.00. 
               
               
                 Groups 
                 Reconciliation would be as per the following sequence. 
               
               
                   
                 Look for the Negative Cash available and reconcile it with the positive cash (for NSF 
               
               
                   
                 checks). 
               
               
                   
                 Look for the oldest unreconciled invoice and reconcile with the oldest un-reconciled 
               
               
                   
                 cash and so on. 
               
               
                   
                 On Reconciliation the entire invoice, cash receipts would have a status as reconciled. 
               
               
                 Manual 
                 This process would trigger reconciliation manually based on authority or if the user is trying 
               
               
                 Reconciliation 
                 to reconcile and specific cash receipts with the invoice as the case may be. Manual 
               
               
                   
                 reconciliation can be does only for those invoices that has not reconciled automatically 
               
               
                 Manual 
                 Cash to negative cash 
               
               
                 Reconciliation 
                 Adjustment to Adjustment 
               
               
                   
                 Any reconciliation that is not completed by automatic reconciliation process would be 
               
               
                   
                 reconciled manually. 
               
               
                 Formula for 
                 General formula for reconciliation would be as follows: 
               
               
                 reconciliation 
                 Billed amounts and cash receipt = (Invoice Amount − Cash Receipt) 
               
               
                   
                 Adjustment to cash = (Adjustment − Cash Receipts) 
               
               
                   
                 Billed amount to itself if the total due results in zero = (Invoice Amount + Invoice Amount) 
               
               
                   
                 Adjustment to billed amounts = (Adjustment Amount + Invoice Amount) 
               
               
                   
                 Cash to negative cash = (Cash receipt + cash receipt) 
               
               
                   
                 Adjustment to Adjustment = (Adjustment + adjustment) 
               
               
                   
                 General formula = (Invoice Amount + Adjustment Amount − Cash Receipt Amount) 
               
               
                   
                 Example 
               
               
                   
                 Invoice = $000.00, Cash receipt = $−100.00, Cash receipt = $918.00, 
               
               
                   
                 Adjustment = $−100.00, Adjustment = $−80.00 
               
               
                   
                 Amount that can be Reconciled = 1000 − (−100) − (800) + (−100) + (−80) = 1000 + 100 − 918 − 
               
               
                   
                 100 − 80 = $2.00 This $2.00 is balance forward for the subsequent invoice. 
               
               
                 New Business 
                 Excluding COBRA and Individual Association Members who follow the reconciliation rules 
               
               
                 Reconciliation 
                 as per the Existing Group, the new business groups is auto reconcile if within $ +− 2.00. If 
               
               
                   
                 the amount is short by $100.00 the invoice and the cash receipt would be reconciled and the 
               
               
                   
                 short fall would be balance forward in the next invoice. PacAdvantage Fund (A Cash 
               
               
                   
                 Receipt Batch auto generated by the system) would adjust this short fall. This would be 
               
               
                   
                 based on authority (Finance/GMS). 
               
               
                   
                 Also for the new business the auto reconciliation process would apply to reconcile the 
               
               
                   
                 Invoice Generated on successful enrollment with the cash receipt as initial enrollment 
               
               
                   
                 payment. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Process Specification 
     Risk Adjustment 
     1. Introduction 
       [1351]    1.1. Purpose
       The purpose of this document is to describe the process of Risk Adjustment. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process.       
 
         [1353]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_FI_007 
                 Finance - Business use case 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Specification - Risk Adjustment 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1354]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 EFT 
                 Electronic Fund Transfer 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [1355]    2.1. Background
       Risk Adjustment is the process of accessing the risk borne by each of the Carrier in paying for the claims submitted to them by members.   Risk adjustment factor is assigned to the Carrier. Based on these factors the carrier may be classified as Payers, Receivers or None (if no factor is assigned).
 
Payers are the one who pays in the risk adjustment amount to the Pool. Receivers are the one who receives the Risk Adjustment amount from the pool.
   These risk adjustment factors are pre-defined by PacAdvantage.       
 
         [1359]    2.2. Process Description
       The objective of the Risk Adjustment process is to:
           1) Provide for upload of Risk Adjustment (RA) factors in the form of text files into PX2 system   
           The uploaded data would subsequently be used in cash disbursement reports for suggesting the amount to be paid out to carriers after application of RA factors.   The following are the other requirements that will be supported and constraints on the proposed system:
           1) The system will maintain a log of all zip codes and service area imports. The log information will include the user, the day &amp; time of import, the file path &amp; format and the status of the import.   
               
 
         [1365]    2.3. Process Flow 
         [1366]    Process for Upload of Risk Adjustment Factors
       1) The import file and an effective date for import are all input from the user.   2) The system checks to see if the file data is per the format expected. If not, an error is reported.   3) If data already exists for an effective date, the system prompts to the user as to whether it should overwrite the data or cancel the import.   4) The system imports Risk Adjustment factors to its database.   3. User Interface       
 
         [1372]    3.1. User Interface Screens 
         [1373]    3.1.1. Risk Adjustment Factors Import 
         [1374]    3.1.1.1. Screen Snapshot (See FIG. J- 8 ) 
         [1375]    3.1.1.2. Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element 
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Type 
                 Label 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Import Id 
                 Display Text 
                 Import Id 
                 Displays unique id for 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the import 
               
               
                 Status 
                 Display Text 
                 Status 
                 Displays status of import 
               
               
                 Imported By 
                 Display Text 
                 Imported By 
                 Displays id of user who 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 did the import 
               
               
                 Import Date 
                 Display Text 
                 Import Date 
                 Displays date on which 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 import was done 
               
               
                 Import File 
                 Text Box 
                 Import File 
                 Full path of the file to 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 be imported 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Text Box 
                 Effective Date 
                 Date on which the RA 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 factors becomes effective 
               
               
                 New 
                 Command 
                 New 
                 Clears screen for a 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 new import. 
               
               
                 Import 
                 Command 
                 Import 
                 Starts the import process 
               
               
                 Search 
                 Command 
                 Search 
                 Provides functionality 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 for search of imports 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1376]    3.1.1.3. Screen Validations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Import File Name 
                 Check to see that the value for 
                 “Please enter a valid 
               
               
                   
                 the field is not null 
                 import file name” 
               
               
                 Effective Date 
                 Check to see that the value for 
                 “Please enter a valid 
               
               
                   
                 the filed is not null and is valid 
                 effective date” 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1377]    3.2. Interface Flow
       N/A       
 
       4. Business Rule Mapping 
       [1379]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Activities 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Risk 
                 The formula for risk Adjustment factor is as given below: 
               
               
                 Assessment 
                 Raw Rate = Premium Amount (Raw Rate for Medical 
               
               
                 Formula 
                 Line of coverage and the benefit level for the specific 
               
               
                   
                 carrier opted by the member) 
               
               
                   
                 Adjustment Factor = Fixed dollar amount per member 
               
               
                   
                 count (can be negative or positive based on whether the 
               
               
                   
                 Carrier is receiver or payer) Positive is the receiver and 
               
               
                   
                 negative is the payer. 
               
               
                   
                 Risk Adjustment amount = Raw rate + (Risk Adjustment 
               
               
                   
                 factor * member count for that plan) 
               
               
                   
                 Example 
               
               
                   
                 Adjustment Factor = $ + 5.00 for Aerna (receiver) 
               
               
                   
                 Adjustment Factor = $ − 2.00 for Health Net (payer) 
               
               
                   
                 Employee 1 = $ 400 with (4 member inclusive of 
               
               
                   
                 employee) Aerna 
               
               
                   
                 Employee 2 = $ 300 with (2 member inclusive of 
               
               
                   
                 employee) Health net 
               
               
                   
                 Employee 3 = $ 200 with (1 member inclusive of 
               
               
                   
                 employee) Health net 
               
               
                   
                 For Health net 
               
               
                   
                 300 + (−2 * 2) + 200 + (−2 * 1) = 304 + 202 = 494.00 
               
               
                   
                 For Aerna 
               
               
                   
                 400 + (5 * 4) = $ 420.00 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Note: 
               
               
                 the adjustment factor has an effective date attach to it. Normally it is loaded once in 6 months. 
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Process Specification 
     BPI_CAS_PSD_SECURITY — 01 
     1.1 Introduction 
       [0000]    
       
         
           
             This purpose of this document is to identify the processes associated with the security mechanism for core administrative system 
           
         
       
     
       1.2 Business Use Case Specification Reference 
       [1381]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 NONE 
                 NONE 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       1.3 Process Identification 
       [1382]    1.3.1 Process Description &amp; Flow
       This process describes the security framework requirements. The security framework consists of creating database for security system as well as administrator login into the system. The system also allows the administrator to create users, module, groups, and application, assign user roles and ACL etc. The system also takes care of user login into the core administrative system. The system should generate the ACL for each user when user logs in into the system. The access to any resource in the core administrative system will be decided by this ACL which will be stored in the User Profile object, stored into the session.   The security system for Intranet application built for shall broadly contain following categories.
           1. Definition of Realms   2. Definition of Modules   3. Definition of Applications   4. Definition of Resources   5. Definition of groups (groups can ideally be a department which has a number of users)   6. Definition of User   7. Definition of User Roles   8. Definition ACL/Permissions   9. Resources, which can be assigned to the groups.   10. User, User Role and Groups mapping   11. Overriding the group access rights.   
               
 
         [1396]    Realms
       A realm is a database of users, groups, modules, application resources and access control lists. A user must be defined in a realm in order to access any resources belonging to that realm.       
 
         [1398]    Modules
       The modules provide the high level classification for the applications. The module is a group of applications. The following modules have been identified in the initial stage as a part of core administrative system viz. Carrier Maintenance, Enrollment, Sales and Marketing and Finance.       
 
         [1400]    Applications
       A module consists of many applications. An application represents the business use case or set of related use cases. A module consists of many applications. For e.g. Carrier Maintenance module consists of following applications viz. Zip Master, Carrier Master, and M Plan etc. Each application can be further classified into the pages.       
 
         [1402]    Resources
       An application can be further classified into the Resources. An application can have one or more resources.   Resources are the valuable items accessible from the Web server/Web Application server:
           Web applications: Java.Servlet or JSP   
           The resources can be protected by using a single access control (ACL). The ACL specifies which users or groups are allowed to access or modify the resource. For each resource to protect, you&#39;ll specify:
           An access control list (ACL)—a list defining who can use the resource   
               
 
         [1408]    Groups
       A group is a collection of users. A user can belong to multiple groups. The groups can be created based on the department where all the uses are going to perform the similar kind of operation.   Groups are sets of users. Groups provide an efficient way to manage large numbers of users because an administrator can specify permissions for an entire group at one time. The resources pages can be allocated to group instead of assigning to individual user. The user gets the default access rights as a part of group. The user can override the group access rights. A person can be defined as both an individual user and as a member of a group. When an individual user also belongs to a group, the individual access permissions override any group access permissions.   For e.g. a set of data entry operators can have be classified into one group. The rights can be assigned to this group as all basically going to do the data entry operation.       
 
         [1412]    User Roles
       In any system, there are many roles, which a particular entity plays. For e.g. in any industry role played by the manager differs from the subordinate.   The roles need to be classified into the security system. A user can play multiple roles in the system. A manager can play the role as data entry as well as authorizing body.   A data entry operation may not have provision to enter some critical data, which manager does enter if manager is logging into the system as manager role. The managers can login into the system as data entry operator as well.   If manager is logging in as data entry operation he may not have the privileges as he was having in manager role. In such a case he will be treated as data entry operator. The security system needs to take above situations. The user roles can be
           SUPER USER   SENIOR MANAGEMENT   MANAGER   DATA ENTRY PERSONNEL   PART TIME EMPLOYEE   
           The user roles need to be configured into the system. The user roles can be added for the future modifications. The CAS (Core Administration System) system need to be pre configured for the basic pre defined roles which will not be editable.       
 
         [1423]    Users
       A user is an identity that can be authenticated by the system. A user can represent a person who is working in any of the departments in Benefit Partners Inc. A user can belong to multiple groups.   A user can play multiple roles       
 
         [1426]    Access Rights/Permissions
       Permissions represent the privileges required for accessing resources. An administrator protects resources by establishing access control lists to grant permissions to users and groups.   Individual user permissions take precedence over group permissions. Individual user permission overrides the more restrictive group permission. (Even if the group permission is less restrictive than the user permission, the user permission overrides the group permission and vice versa).       
 
         [1429]    List of Programs
       1. Security Login
           Allows the administrator to login into the security system.   
           2. Module Master
           Allows administrator to do following operations   Create Module   Modify Module   Delete Modules   
           3. Application Master
           Allows administrator to do following operations   Create Application   Modify Application   Delete Application   
           4. Resources
           Allows administrator to do following operations   Create Resources   Modify Resources   Delete Resources   
           5. Group Master
           Allows administrator to do following operations   Create Group   Modify Group   Delete Group   
           6. User Master
           Allows administrator to do following operations   Create User   Modify User   Delete User   
           7. User Role
           Allows administrator to do following operations   Create Role   Modify Role   Delete Role   
           8. User Access Rights   9. User, User Role and Groups Mapping   10. Group Access Rights
           Allows administrator to do following operations.   Assign Rights for a User. This program allows the administrator to override the access rights for a user.   
           11. User Login
           When the system user logs in into the core administration system the separate ACL will be generated for each user. The ACL will be stored in the User Profile object, which will be stored in the user session. When user request for a particular page controller will check with the security system whether user is having access to the particular page.   The user password needs to be validated as follows
               The password need to be minimum 6 characters long and max 10 characters   The password needs to be combination of alphabets and special characters and numbers (for e.g. Amit1$3, sriRam9#445 etc).   The password is valid for 15 days, which is configurable. The system should prompt user to change the password three days (which is configurable) prior to expiry date of the password.   If user changes the password then his password is valid for 15 days (which is configurable) from the date of change.   In the same way administrator can configure the minimum limit for password age, which signifies that user cannot change the password for this period from the date of prior change.   The minimum limit for the password age, which is configured value, cannot be greater than or equal to configured maximum limit of the password age.   First time user must change his password before entering into the system.   Scenario
                   If the user password is “123456” the for first time login user goes and change the password to “Mali5%9”. The user is created on date Jan. 4, 2002. User logs in on Jan. 5, 2002 and password expiry date for the user changes to Jan. 19, 2002 (15 calendar days) if the configured time limit is 15 days. The user needs to prompt to change password on Jan. 17, 2002 (3 calendar days prior to the expiry date). If user changes the password within stipulated time then extend the password expiry date by 15 calendar days. (New Date=Sys Date+15). All changes in the date is effective from 0000 AM   
                   The above validation is not applicable at the time of user creation as administrator can keep the password 123456 for all.   The new password in the change password is to be validated for above conditions. The old password need not be validated for above conditions. As user can have 123456 as first time as his password.   The old password needs to be maintained in the history. The new password must not be equal to last five passwords. This number of history of passwords (here its 5) should be configurable. (A configurable password history where the administrator can enter value that would represent how many passwords it would remember until the user can use the same password again)   The ability to enable or disable Account lockout with a configuration value for the number of user log in attempts at which point a lockout would occur. A way timer for when to reset the count of attempts before lock would be helpful. Also if it possible to make a lockout duration value that would be configurable would also be helpful.   User Name cannot be a part of password.   
               
               
 
         [1484]    Configurable Items 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Sr No 
                 Item Name 
                 Value 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Length Of Password 
                 Integer (Ranging From 1-n) 
               
               
                   
                 (Minimum Value) 
                 Need to be set by the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 administrator 
               
               
                 2 
                 Length Of Password 
                 Integer (Ranging From 1-n) 
               
               
                   
                 (Maximum Value) 
                 Need to be set by the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 administrator 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Maximum need to be greater 
               
               
                   
                   
                 than minimum value 
               
               
                 3 
                 Expiry of the password from the 
                 Integer (Number of days) 
               
               
                   
                 date of validity 
                 Ranging from 1-n 
               
               
                   
                 (Maximum Range) 
                 Need to be set by the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 administrator 
               
               
                 4 
                 Expiry of the password from the 
                 Integer (Number of days) 
               
               
                   
                 date of validity 
                 Ranging from 1-n 
               
               
                   
                 (Minimum Range) 
                 Need to be set by the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 administrator 
               
               
                 5 
                 Password Repeat allowed value 
                 Integer (Number of days) 
               
               
                   
                 This indicates that new passwords 
                 Ranging from 1-n 
               
               
                   
                 can not be same as last 
                 Need to be set by the 
               
               
                   
                 n passwords 
                 administrator 
               
               
                 6 
                 Invalid Passwords allowed before 
                 Integer (Number of days) 
               
               
                   
                 locking the account 
                 Ranging from 1-n 
               
               
                   
                 If user enters the password 
                 Need to be set by the 
               
               
                   
                 incorrect for n times then his 
                 administrator 
               
               
                   
                 account will be locked 
               
               
                   
                 automatically. 
               
               
                 7 
                 Lock Time 
                 Time for which account to be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 locked if it is locked because 
               
               
                   
                   
                 of successive invalid 
               
               
                   
                   
                 passwords entry. 
               
               
                 8 
                 Password change prompt date 
                 This value signifies that user 
               
               
                   
                   
                 need to be intimated by 3 
               
               
                   
                   
                 days prior about password 
               
               
                   
                   
                 change (Value here set as 3) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1485]    1.3. Security Framework 
         [1486]    Process Flow Diagram (See FIG. P- 1 ) 
         [1487]    1.3.1.1. Script for Setup
       Run the basic admin script, which will create the basic administrative user for security login and minimal data into the database.       
 
         [1489]    1.3.1.2. Security Login
       Security Login
           Refer Process Flow Diagram  FIG. 2 . The flow of the process is as described below.   System allows user to login into the system. The basic user id and password validation will be done for the administrator for the security system.   On successful login administrator can create modules, groups, applications, user etc.   
             FIG. 2  Process Flow Diagram (See FIG. P- 2 )       
 
         [1495]    1.3.1.3. Module Master
       Refer Process Flow Diagram  FIG. 3 , The flow of the process is as described below.       
 
         [1497]    Create Modules
       a) On selecting create modules option. The user needs to enter the module name and description.   b) The user enters the details and clicks save.   c) Upon save the data will be stored in the database. Modify Modules   a) When user selects modify modules option. He will be shown all the modules in the combo box.   b) The user selects the module name and clicks select.   c) The user will be shown the details about the selected module. The user can modify the module details and click save. The data will be updated into database.       
 
         [1504]    Delete Modules
       a) When user selects the Delete option, the user will be shown all the modules where in user can select one or more access control list and click delete.   b) The selected modules will be deleted from the database.     FIG. 3 : Process Flow Diagram (See FIG. P- 3 )       
 
         [1508]    1.3.1.4. Application Master
       Refer Process Flow Diagram  FIG. 4 . The flow of the process is as described below.       
 
         [1510]    Create Application
       a) On selecting create application option. The user needs to enter the application details like application name, module name and description.   b) The user enters the data and clicks save.   c) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.       
 
         [1514]    Modify Application
       a) When user selects modify applications option. He will be shown all the applications in the selection box. The user selects one application and clicks select.   b) The user will be shown the details about the selected application. The user can modify the application details and click save.   c) The data will be updated into database.       
 
         [1518]    Delete Application
       a) When user selects the Delete option, the user will be shown all the applications where in user can select one or more applications and click delete.   b) The selected applications will be deleted from the database.     FIG. 4 : Process Flow Diagram (See FIG. P- 4 )       
 
         [1522]    1.3.1.5. Resource Master
       Refer Process Flow Diagram. The flow of the process is as described below.       
 
         [1524]    Create Resource
       a) On selecting create resource option. The user needs to enter the resource details like resource name, application name and description.   b) The user enters the data and clicks save.   c) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.       
 
         [1528]    Modify Resource
       a) When user selects modify resource option. He will be shown all the resources in the selection box. The user selects one resource and clicks select.   b) The user will be shown the details about the selected resource. The user can modify the resource details and click save.   c) The data will be updated into database.       
 
         [1532]    Delete Resource
       a) When user selects the Delete option, the user will be shown all the resource where in user can select one or more resources and click delete.   b) The selected resources will be deleted from the database.     FIG. 5 : Process Flow Diagram (See FIG. P- 5 )       
 
         [1536]    1.3.1.6. Group Master
       Refer Process Flow Diagram  FIG. 6 . The flow of the process is as described below.       
 
         [1538]    Create Group
       a) On selecting create group option. The user needs to enter the group details like group name and description.   b) The user enters the data and clicks save.   c) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.       
 
         [1542]    Modify Group
       a) When user selects modify group&#39;s option. He will be shown all the groups in the selection box. The user selects one group and clicks select.   b) The user will be shown the details about the selected group. The user can modify the group details and click save   c) The data will be updated into database.       
 
         [1546]    Delete Group
       a) When user selects the Delete option, the user will be shown all the groups where in user can select one or more groups and click delete   b) The selected groups will be deleted from the database.     FIG. 6 : Process Flow Diagram (Sec FIG. P- 6 )       
 
         [1550]    1.3.1.7. User Creation
       Refer Process Flow Diagram  FIG. 7 . The flow of the process is as described below.       
 
         [1552]    Create User
       a) On selecting create user option. The user needs to enter the details like user name, description, address details etc.   b) The user enters the data and clicks save.   c) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.       
 
         [1556]    Modify User
       a) When user selects modify user option. He will be shown all the user details in the selection box. The user selects one-user and clicks select.   b) The user will be shown the details about the selected user. The user can modify the user details and click save   c) The data will be updated into database.       
 
         [1560]    Delete User
       a) When user selects the Delete option, the user will be shown all the users where in user can select one or more users and click delete   b) The selected users will be deleted from the database.     FIG. 7 : Process Flow Diagram (See FIG. P- 7 )       
 
         [1564]    1.3.1.8. User Role Creation
       Refer Process Flow Diagram  FIG. 7   a . The flow of the process is as described below.       
 
         [1566]    Create User Role
       a) On selecting create user role option. The user needs to enter the details like user role name, description   b) The user enters the data and clicks save.   c) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.       
 
         [1570]    Modify User Role
       a) When user selects modify user role option. He will be shown all the user role details in the selection box. The user selects one-user role and clicks select.   b) The user will be shown the details about the selected user role. The user can modify the user details and click save.   c) The data will be updated into database.       
 
         [1574]    Delete User Role
       a) When user selects the Delete option, the user role will be shown all the users roles where in user can select one or more users role and Click delete   b) The selected user roles will be deleted from the database.     FIG. 7   a : Process Flow Diagram (See FIG. P- 8 )       
 
         [1578]    1.3.1.9. User, User Role and Group Mapping
       Refer Process Flow Diagram  FIG. 8 . The flow of the process is as described       
 
         [1580]    Assign Rights
       a) On selecting the User, User Role and Group Mapping option. The user will be shown the all the users and user roles in the selection box. The user can select the combination of user and user role.   b) On selection user will be shown the all the groups with already assigned groups as checked.   c) The user adds or removes the group assignment and clicks save.   d) Upon save the data will be stored in the database     FIG. 8 : Process Flow Diagram (See FIG. P- 9 )       
 
         [1586]    1.3.1.10. Group Access Rights
       Refer Process Flow Diagram. The flow of the process is as described below.       
 
         [1588]    Assign Rights
       a) On selecting the group access rights. The user will be shown the all the groups in the selection box. The user can select any group and click select.   b) When user selects the particular group, the user will be shown the all the resources and with the access rights selection box corresponding to each module.   c) User can assign one or more resources to the group and click save.   d) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.     FIG. 9 : Process Flow Diagram (See FIG. P- 10 )       
 
         [1594]    1.3.1.11. User Access Rights
       Refer Process Flow Diagram. The flow of the process is as described below.   As stated earlier, user can override the access specified to the group.       
 
         [1597]    Assign User Rights.
       a) On selecting the user access rights. The user will be shown the all the users in the selection box. The user can select anyone user and click select.   b) When user selects the particular user, the user will be shown the all the access rights for his group for corresponding resource.   c) The user can add or remove the resources.   d) Upon save the data will be stored in the database.       
 
         [1602]    1.3.1.12. Configure Items
       Refer Process Flow Diagram. The flow of the process is as described below. This allows administrator to configure various items like password length, expiry etc.     FIG. 10 : Process Flow Diagram (See FIG. P- 11 )     FIG. 10A : Process Flow Diagram (See FIG. P- 12 )       
 
         [1606]    1.4 User Interface 
         [1607]    1.4.1 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 001 (See FIG. P- 13 )
       User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 002 (See FIG. P- 14 )       
 
         [1609]    1.4.1.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Security Login 
         [1610]    1.4.1.2 Field Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_LOGIN_SCREEN_001 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Security Login 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Login Name 
               
               
                 Login Name 
               
               
                 Login Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the password 
               
               
                 password 
               
               
                 Password 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the password 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 to be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Select the Role 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Role 
               
               
                 Role 
                 Selection Box 
                 Selection box applicable for user 
               
               
                   
                   
                 login only. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY LOGIN SCREEN 002 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Security Login 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header Login 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Login Name 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 Login Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header old 
                 Text 
                 Text for the old password 
               
               
                 password 
               
               
                 old Password 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the old password 
               
               
                 Sub Header new 
                 Text 
                 Text for the new password 
               
               
                 password 
               
               
                 new Password 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the new re enter password 
               
               
                 Sub Header re 
                 Text 
                 Text for the re enter password 
               
               
                 enter password 
               
               
                 re enter Password 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the re enter password 
               
               
                 Select 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To select the current selected module 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 to modify. 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1611]    1.4.1.3 Front End Validation
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element 
                   
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1. 
                 Login Name 
                 Accepts all the alphabets 
                 Mandatory Max Length: 15 
               
               
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
                 and numeric characters. 
                 “Please Enter Login Name” 
               
               
                 2. 
                 Password 
                 Accepts all the alphabets 
                 Mandatory Max Length: 15 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and numeric characters. 
                 Min Length: 6 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Please Enter the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 password” 
               
               
                 3. 
                 User Role 
                 Selection Box validation 
                 Default: Choose One 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Mandatory” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 “Please choose one of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 options specified” 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1614]    1.4.2 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 003 (See FIG. P- 15 )
       User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 004 (See FIG. P- 16 )   User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 005 (See FIG. P- 17 )       
 
         [1617]    1.4.2.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Module Master 
         [1618]    1.4.2.2 Field Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_003 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Create Module 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Module Id 
               
               
                 Module Id 
               
               
                 Module Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Module Name 
               
               
                 Module Name 
               
               
                 Module Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Module Name 
               
               
                 Module 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Module 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 to be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_004 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Search 
                 Gif File 
                 Used to search the module 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_004 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Modify Module 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Module Id 
               
               
                 Module Id 
               
               
                 Module Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Module Name 
               
               
                 Module Name 
               
               
                 Module Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Module Name 
               
               
                 Module 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Module 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Update 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 to be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_005 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen being 
               
               
                 Delete Modules 
                   
                 navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the sub heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Select the 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 modules 
               
               
                 Module Names 
                 Check Box 
                 Check boxes for module names to be 
               
               
                 Sales, finance 
                   
                 deleted. 
               
               
                 Check Box 
                 Check All 
                 On clicking the “Check All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 check all the check boxes in the HTML 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 Check Box 
                 Clear All 
                 On clicking the “Clear All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 uncheck all the checked check boxes in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the HTML table. 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Delete 
                 To Delete the data this button need to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be clicked 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1619]    1.4.2.3 Front End Validation
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Action/ 
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Module Name 
                 Accepts all 
                 Max length: 50 
               
               
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
                 the alphabets 
                 Mandatory 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and numeric 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                   
                 characters. 
               
               
                 2 
                 Module Id (Entry 
                 Accepts all 
                 Max length: 10 
               
               
                   
                 Field) 
                 the alphabets 
                 Mandatory 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and numeric 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                   
                 characters. 
               
               
                 3 
                 Comments (Entry 
                 Accepts all 
                 Max length: 250 
               
               
                   
                 Field) 
                 the alphabets 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and numeric 
               
               
                   
                   
                 characters. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1622]    1.4.3 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 006 (See FIG. P- 18 )
       User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 007 (See FIG. P- 19 )   User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 008 (See FIG. P- 20 )       
 
         [1625]    1.4.3.1
       User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Group Master       
 
         [1627]    1.4.3.2 Field Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_006 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Create Group 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Group Id 
               
               
                 Group Id 
               
               
                 Group Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Group Name 
               
               
                 Group Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Group 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Group 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 to be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_007 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Search 
                 Image 
                 To provide search 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_007 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Modify Group 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Group Id 
               
               
                 Group Id 
               
               
                 Group Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Group Name 
               
               
                 Group Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Group 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Group 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Update 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 to be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_008 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Element 
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen being 
               
               
                 Delete Group 
                   
                 navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the sub heading for the screen being 
               
               
                 Select the 
                   
                 navigated 
               
               
                 Groups 
               
               
                 Group Names 
                 Check 
                 Check boxes for group names to be deleted. 
               
               
                 Sales, finance 
                 Box 
               
               
                 Check Box 
                 Check All 
                 On clicking the “Check All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 check all the check boxes in the HTML 
               
               
                   
                   
                 table. 
               
               
                 Check Box 
                 Clear All 
                 On clicking the “Clear All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 uncheck all the checked check boxes in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HTML table. 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Delete 
                 To Delete the data this button need to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be clicked 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1628]    1.4.3.3 Front End Validation
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element 
                 Action/ 
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Name 
                 Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Group Name 
                 Accepts all the 
                 Max length: 50 
               
               
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
                 alphabets and numeric 
                 Mandatory 
               
               
                   
                   
                 characters. 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 2 
                 Group Id 
                 Accepts all the 
                 Max length: 10 
               
               
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
                 alphabets and numeric 
                 Mandatory 
               
               
                   
                   
                 characters. 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 3 
                 Comments/ 
                 Accepts all the 
                 Max length: 255 
               
               
                   
                 Description 
                 alphabets and numeric 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                   
                 characters. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1631]    1.4.4 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 009 (See FIG. P- 21 )
       User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 010 (See FIG. P- 22 )   User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 011 (See FIG. P- 23 )       
 
         [1634]    1.4.4.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Application Master 
         [1635]    1.4.4.2 Field Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_009 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Create 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Application 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Application Id 
               
               
                 Application Id 
               
               
                 Application Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Application Name 
               
               
                 Application Name 
               
               
                 Application Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Application Name 
               
               
                 Application 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Application 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Module Name 
               
               
                 Module Name 
               
               
                 Selection Box 
                 Selection Box 
                 Module Name 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 to be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_010 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Search 
                 Gif 
                 To search the application 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_010 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Modify 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Application 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Application Id 
               
               
                 Application Id 
               
               
                 Application Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Application Name 
               
               
                 Application Name 
               
               
                 Application Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Application Name 
               
               
                 Application 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Application 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Update 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need to 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_011 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Element 
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Delete 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Application 
               
               
                 Sub Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the sub heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Select the 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Application 
               
               
                 Application 
                 Check Box 
                 Check boxes for applications names 
               
               
                 Names 
                   
                 to be deleted. 
               
               
                 Sales, Select box 
               
               
                 for Application 
               
               
                 Check Box 
                 Check All 
                 On clicking the “Check All” link 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should check all the check boxes in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HTML table. 
               
               
                 Check Box 
                 Clear All 
                 On clicking the “Clear All” link 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should uncheck all the checked check 
               
               
                   
                   
                 boxes in the HTML table. 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Delete 
                 To Delete the data this button need 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to be clicked 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1636]    1.4.4.3 Front End Validation
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element 
                 Action/ 
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Name 
                 Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Application 
                 Accepts all the 
                 Max length: 50 
               
               
                   
                 Name 
                 alphabets and numeric 
                 Mandatory 
               
               
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
                 characters. 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 2 
                 Application 
                 Accepts all the 
                 Max length: 10 
               
               
                   
                 Id 
                 alphabets and numeric 
                 Mandatory 
               
               
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
                 characters. 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 3 
                 Comments/ 
                 Accepts all the 
                 Max length: 255 
               
               
                   
                 Description 
                 alphabets and numeric 
               
               
                   
                   
                 characters. 
               
               
                 4 
                 Module 
                 Selection Box 
                 Default: Choose One 
               
               
                   
                 Name 
                 validation 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1639]    1.4.5 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 012 (See FIG. P- 24 )
       User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 013 (Sec FIG. P- 25 )   User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 0014 (See FIG. P- 26 )       
 
         [1642]    1.4.5.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Resource Master 
         [1643]    1.4.5.2 Field Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_012 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Create Resource 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for Resource Id 
               
               
                 Resource ID 
               
               
                 Resource ID 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for Resource Name 
               
               
                 Resource Name 
               
               
                 Resource Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for screen url 
               
               
                 Screen URL 
               
               
                 Screen URL 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Resource 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Resource Description 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Resource 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need to 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_012 &amp; Screen 
               
               
                 SECURITY_SCREEN_013 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Search 
                 Gif 
                 To search the resource and application 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_013 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Create Resource 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for Resource Id 
               
               
                 Resource ID 
               
               
                 Resource ID 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for Resource Name 
               
               
                 Resource Name 
               
               
                 Resource Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for screen url 
               
               
                 Screen URL 
               
               
                 Screen URL 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Resource 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Resource Description 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Resource 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need to 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_14 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Delete 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Resources 
               
               
                 Sub Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the sub heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Select the 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Resources 
               
               
                 Resources 
                 Check Box 
                 Check boxes for Resources to be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 deleted. 
               
               
                 Check Box 
                 Check All 
                 On clicking the “Check All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 check all the check boxes in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HTML table. 
               
               
                 Check Box 
                 Clear All 
                 On clicking the “Clear All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 uncheck all the checked check boxes in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the HTML table. 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Delete 
                 To Delete the data this button need to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be clicked 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1644]    1.4.5.3 Front End Validation
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element 
                 Action/ 
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Name 
                 Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Resource 
                 Accepts all the 
                 Max length: 50 
               
               
                   
                 Name 
                 alphabets and numeric 
                 Mandatory 
               
               
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
                 characters. 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 2 
                 Resource Id 
                 Accepts all the 
                 Max length: 10 
               
               
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
                 alphabets and numeric 
                 Mandatory 
               
               
                   
                   
                 characters. 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 3 
                 Screen URL 
                 Accepts all the 
                 Max length: 255 
               
               
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
                 alphabets and numeric 
                 Mandatory 
               
               
                   
                   
                 characters. 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 4 
                 Comments/ 
                 Accepts all the 
                 Max length: 255 
               
               
                   
                 Description 
                 alphabets and numeric 
               
               
                   
                   
                 characters. 
               
               
                 5 
                 Application 
                 Selection Box 
                 Default: Choose One 
               
               
                   
                 Name 
                 validation 
                 “Mandatory” 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1647]    1.4.6 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 015 (See FIG. P- 27 )
       Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 016 (See FIG. P- 28 )   User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 017 (See FIG. P- 29 )       
 
         [1650]    1.4.6.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: User Master 
         [1651]    1.4.6.2 Field Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_015 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Create User 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Id 
               
               
                 Id 
               
               
                 User Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Display Name 
               
               
                 Display Name 
               
               
                 Display Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Name 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 Sub Header First 
                 Text 
                 Text for the First Name 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 First Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header MI 
                 Text 
                 Text for Middle Initial 
               
               
                 Middle Initial 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header Last 
                 Text 
                 Text for last name 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 Last Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the password 
               
               
                 password 
               
               
                 Password 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Phone 
               
               
                 Phone 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header Fax 
                 Text 
                 Text for the fax 
               
               
                 Fax 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header Extn 
                 Text 
                 Text for the ext 
               
               
                 Extn 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header email 
                 Text 
                 Text for the email 
               
               
                 Email 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header Lock 
                 Text 
                 Text for the lock 
               
               
                 Lock 
                 Check Box 
                 Check box for lock field 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 to be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_016 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Search 
                 Gif 
                 To search the user 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_016 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Modify User 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Name 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Id 
               
               
                 Id 
               
               
                 User Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Display Name 
               
               
                 Display Name 
               
               
                 Display Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Name 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 Sub Header First 
                 Text 
                 Text for the First Name 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 First Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header MI 
                 Text 
                 Text for MI 
               
               
                 MI 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header Last 
                 Text 
                 Text for last name 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 Last Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the password 
               
               
                 password 
               
               
                 Password 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Phone 
               
               
                 Phone 
               
               
                 Phone 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header Fax 
                 Text 
                 Text for the fax 
               
               
                 Fax 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header Ext 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Ext 
               
               
                 Ext 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header email 
                 Text 
                 Text for the email 
               
               
                 Email 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Lock 
                 Check Box 
                 Check box for the lock field 
               
               
                 Update 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need to 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_017 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Element 
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Delete User 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the sub heading for the 
               
               
                 Select the User 
                   
                 screen being navigated 
               
               
                 User Names 
                 Check 
                 Check boxes for User names to be deleted. 
               
               
                 Sales. Select 
                 Box 
               
               
                 box for 
               
               
                 Application 
               
               
                 Check Box 
                 Check All 
                 On clicking the “Check All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 check all the check boxes in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HTML table. 
               
               
                 Check Box 
                 Clear All 
                 On clicking the “Clear All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 uncheck all the checked check boxes in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 HTML table. 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Delete 
                 To Delete the data this button need to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be clicked 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1652]    1.4.6.3 Front End Validation
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 1 
                 Display Name 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 Mandatory Max Length: 30 
               
               
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 2 
                 First Name (Entry Field) 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 Mandatory Max Length: 25 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 3 
                 MI (Entry Field) 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 Mandatory Max Length: 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 4 
                 Last Name (Entry Field) 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 Mandatory Max Length: 35 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 5 
                 Password (Entry Field) 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 Mandatory Max Length: 15 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Min Length: 6 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 6 
                 Phone 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 Max Length: 10 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 7 
                 Fax 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 Max Length: 10 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 8 
                 Extn 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 9 
                 Email 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 10 
                 Lock Status 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1655]    1.4.7 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 0018 (See FIG. P- 30 )
       User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 019 (See FIG. P- 31 )   User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 020 (See FIG. P- 32 )       
 
         [1658]    1.4.7.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: User Role Master 
         [1659]    1.4.7.2 Field Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_018 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Create User Role 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Role Id 
               
               
                 Role Id 
               
               
                 User Role Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Role Name 
               
               
                 Role Name 
               
               
                 User Role Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Role Name 
               
               
                 Role Description 
               
               
                 User Role 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 to be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_019 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Search 
                 Gif 
                 To search the user role 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_019 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Modify User Role 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Role Id 
               
               
                 Role Id 
               
               
                 User Role Id 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Role Name 
               
               
                 Role Name 
               
               
                 User Role Name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Role Name 
               
               
                 Role Description 
               
               
                 User Role 
                 Entry Field 
                 Text for the entry field 
               
               
                 Description 
               
               
                 Update 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 to be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_020 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Element 
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Delete User Role 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the sub heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Select the User 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Role 
               
               
                 User Role Names 
                 Check Box 
                 Check boxes for User Role names to 
               
               
                 Sales. finance 
                   
                 be deleted. 
               
               
                 Check Box 
                 Check All 
                 On clicking the “Check All” link 
               
               
                   
                   
                 should check all the check boxes 
               
               
                   
                   
                 in the HTML table. 
               
               
                 Check Box 
                 Clear All 
                 On clicking the “Clear All” link should 
               
               
                   
                   
                 uncheck all the checked check 
               
               
                   
                   
                 boxes in the HTML table. 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Delete 
                 To Delete the data this button need to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 be clicked 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1660]    1.4.7.3 Front End Validation
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 1 
                 User Role Name 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
               
               
                 2 
                 User Role Id 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
                 (Entry Field) 
               
               
                 3 
                 Comments/Description 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 Max length: 255 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1663]    1.4.8 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 021 (See FIG. P- 33 ) 
         [1664]    1.4.8.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Group Access Rights 
         [1665]    1.4.8.2 Field Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_021 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Group Access 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Rights 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Select Group 
               
               
                 Group Name 
                 Selection Box 
                 Selection box for the Group Name 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Application Name 
               
               
                 Select 
               
               
                 Application 
               
               
                 Application 
                 Selection Box 
                 Selection box for the Application Name 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 Select 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To select the current selected Group 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 to assign rights and modules. 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_021 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Group Access 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Rights 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Resource Name 
               
               
                 Resource Name 
               
               
                 Resource Name 
                 Check Boxes 
                 Check boxes 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for Access Rights 
               
               
                 Access Rights 
               
               
                 Combo Box 
                 Combo Box 
                 Combo box for selection of access 
               
               
                   
                   
                 rights. 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need to 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1666]    1.4.8.3 Front End Validation
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 1 
                 Group Name 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 2 
                 Application Name 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                 3 
                 Resource Id 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1669]    1.4.9 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN —022  (See FIG. P- 34 )
       User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 023 (See FIG. P- 35 )       
 
         [1671]    1.4.9.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: User, Role and Group Mapping 
         [1672]    1.4.9.2 Field Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_022 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen being 
               
               
                 User Search 
                   
                 navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Id 
               
               
                 Select User Id 
               
               
                 User Id 
                 Text Box 
                 Text Field for the User Id 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Name 
               
               
                 Select User 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 User Name 
                 Text Box 
                 Text Field for the User Name 
               
               
                 Search 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To search the current selected User id 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_022 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 User Search 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Id 
               
               
                 Select User Id 
               
               
                 User Id 
                 Text Field 
                 Text Field for the User Id 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Name 
               
               
                 Select User 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 User Name 
                 Text Field 
                 Text Field for the User Name 
               
               
                 Search 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To search the current selected User id 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Sub Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the search 
               
               
                 User Search 
                   
                 screen 
               
               
                 Results 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Label 
                 Text for the User Id 
               
               
                 Id 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Label 
                 Text for the User Name 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 Data Row from 
                 User Id 
                 User id from database. To be 
               
               
                 database 
                   
                 displayed in table 
               
               
                 Data Row from 
                 User Name 
                 User name from database. To be 
               
               
                 database 
                   
                 displayed in table 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_023 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 User Role 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Mapping 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Id 
               
               
                 Select User Id 
               
               
                 User Id 
                 Text Label 
                 Text Label for the User Id 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Name 
               
               
                 Select User 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 User Name 
                 Text Label 
                 Text Label for the User Name 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Role 
               
               
                 Select User Role 
               
               
                 Selection box 
                 Selection Box 
                 Selection Box for User Role 
               
               
                 Select 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To select the current selected User id 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen FIG. 33: Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_023 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 User Role 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Mapping 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Id 
               
               
                 Select User Id 
               
               
                 User Id 
                 Text Label 
                 Text Label for the User Id 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Name 
               
               
                 Select User 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 User Name 
                 Text Label 
                 Text Label for the User Name 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Role 
               
               
                 Role 
               
               
                 Text Label 
                 Text Label 
                 Selection Box for User Role 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Groups 
               
               
                 Select the groups 
               
               
                 Check Box 
                 Check Box 
                 Check Box for groups. User can 
               
               
                   
                   
                 select one or more groups. 
               
               
                 Select 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To select the current selected User id 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1673]    1.4.10 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 024 (See FIG. P- 36 )
       User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 025 (See FIG. P- 37 )       
 
         [1675]    1.4.10.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Group Access Rights 
         [1676]    1.4.10.2 Field Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_024 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 User Search 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Id 
               
               
                 Select User Id 
               
               
                 User Id 
                 Text Box 
                 Text Field for the User Id 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Name 
               
               
                 Select User 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 User Name 
                 Text Box 
                 Text Field for the User Name 
               
               
                 Search 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To search the current selected User id 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_024 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 User Search 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Id 
               
               
                 Select User Id 
               
               
                 User Id 
                 Text Field 
                 Text Field for the User Id 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Name 
               
               
                 Select User 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 User Name 
                 Text Field 
                 Text Field for the User Name 
               
               
                 Search 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To search the current selected User 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 id 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Sub Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the search 
               
               
                 User Search 
                   
                 screen 
               
               
                 Results 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Label 
                 Text for the User Id 
               
               
                 Id 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Label 
                 Text for the User Name 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 Data Row from 
                 User Id 
                 User id from database. To be 
               
               
                 database 
                   
                 displayed in table 
               
               
                 Data Row from 
                 User Name 
                 User name from database. To be 
               
               
                 database 
                   
                 displayed in table 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_025 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 User Access 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Rights 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Name 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 User Name 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Name 
               
               
                 Sub Header User 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Id 
               
               
                 ID 
               
               
                 User Id 
                 Text 
                 Text for the User Id 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Module Name 
               
               
                 Module Name 
               
               
                 Selection Box 
                 Selection Box 
                 Selection Box for Module name 
               
               
                 Sub Header Role 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Role Name 
               
               
                 Name 
               
               
                 Selection Box 
                 Selection Box 
                 Selection Box for Role name 
               
               
                 Select 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To select the current selected User 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 assign rights for all the            
               
               
                   
                   
                 application. 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
               
                             indicates data missing or illegible when filed 
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_025 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen being 
               
               
                 User Access 
                   
                 navigated 
               
               
                 Rights 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Resource Name 
               
               
                 Resource Name 
               
               
                 Resource name 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Resource Name 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for Access Rights 
               
               
                 Access Rights 
               
               
                 Combo Box 
                 Combo Box 
                 Combo box for selection of access 
               
               
                   
                   
                 rights. 
               
               
                 Save 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To Save the data this button need 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
                 to be clicked 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1677]    1.4.10.3 Front End Validation
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 User Role 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 “Please choose 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 the User Role” 
               
               
                 2 
                 Module Name 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 “Please choose the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Module name” 
               
               
                 3 
                 Access Rights 
                 BPI_CAS_FSD_COMMON 
                 “Please choose the 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Resource name” 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1680]    1.4.11 User Interface ID: SECURITY_SCREEN — 026 (See FIG. P- 38 ) 
         [1681]    1.4.11.1 User Interface Screen Snap Shot—Screen Name: Configurable Items 
         [1682]    1.4.11.2 Field Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Table for Screen SECURITY_SCREEN_026 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 Main Heading 
                 Text 
                 To give the heading for the screen 
               
               
                 Configure Items 
                   
                 being navigated 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Password Length 
               
               
                 Password Length 
               
               
                 Password Length 
                 Text Box 
                 Text Field for the Password Length 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Password Length 
               
               
                 Password Length 
                   
                 (Minimum) 
               
               
                 (Minimum) 
               
               
                 Password Length 
                 Text Box 
                 Text Field for the Password Length 
               
               
                 (Minimum) 
                   
                 (Minimum) 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Expiry of password 
               
               
                 Expiry of 
               
               
                 password (Max) 
               
               
                 Expiry of 
                 Text Box 
                 Text Field for the Expiry of password 
               
               
                 password 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Expiry of password 
               
               
                 Expiry of 
               
               
                 password (Min) 
               
               
                 Expiry of 
                 Text Box 
                 Text Field for the Prompt Date Period 
               
               
                 password 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Prompt Date Period 
               
               
                 Prompt Date 
               
               
                 Period 
               
               
                 Prompt Date 
                 Text Box 
                 Text Field for the Expiry of password 
               
               
                 Period 
                   
                 Prompt Date Period 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Password Repeat Count 
               
               
                 Password Repeat 
               
               
                 Count 
               
               
                 Password Repeat 
                 Text Box 
                 Text Field for the Password Repeat 
               
               
                 Count 
                   
                 Count 
               
               
                 Sub Header 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Invalid Passwords Count 
               
               
                 Invalid 
               
               
                 Passwords Count 
               
               
                 Invalid 
                 Text Box 
                 Text Field for the Invalid Passwords 
               
               
                 Passwords Count 
                   
                 Count 
               
               
                 Sub Header Lock 
                 Text 
                 Text for the Lock Time 
               
               
                 Time 
               
               
                 Lock Time 
                 Text Box 
                 Text Field for the Lock Time 
               
               
                 Search 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To search the current selected User id 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                 Cancel 
                 Button (HTML 
                 To cancel current operation. 
               
               
                   
                 Button) 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1683]    1.4.11.3 Front End Validation
       Validation Details
           This section provides the front end screen validations along with the associated message—Success/Error Message text   
               
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
                   
                 Action/Validation 
                   
               
               
                 # 
                 Element Name 
                 Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 1 
                 Password Length 
                 Numeric (Integer) 
                 Integer Length max 2 
               
               
                   
                 (Maximum &amp; 
                   
                 For eg Min Value 6 
               
               
                   
                 Minimum) 
                   
                 Max Value 10 
               
               
                 2 
                 Expiry of password 
                 Numeric (Integer) 
                 Integer Length max 2 
               
               
                   
                 (Min) 
                   
                 For eg Min Value 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Max Value 99 
               
               
                 3 
                 Expiry of password 
                 Numeric (Integer) 
                 Integer Length max 2 
               
               
                   
                 (Max) 
                   
                 For eg Min Value 0 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Max Value 99 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Should be greater than 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Expiry of password (Min) 
               
               
                 4 
                 Password Repeat 
                 Numeric (Integer) 
                 Integer Length max 2 
               
               
                   
                 Count 
                   
                 For eg Min Value 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Max Value 10 
               
               
                 5 
                 Invalid Passwords 
                 Numeric (Integer) 
                 Integer Length max 2 
               
               
                   
                 Count 
                   
                 For eg Min Value 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Max Value 10 
               
               
                 6 
                 Lock Time 
                 Numeric (Integer) 
                 Integer Length max 2 
               
               
                   
                 (Minutes) 
                   
                 For eg Min Value 10 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Max Value 36000 
               
               
                 7 
                 Password Length 
                 Numeric (Integer) 
                 Integer Length max 2 
               
               
                   
                 (Minimum) 
                   
                 For eg Min Value 6 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Max Value 10 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Less than maximum length 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 of password 
               
               
                 8 
                 Prompt Date 
                 Numeric (Integer) 
                 Less than maximum limit 
               
               
                   
                 Period for 
                   
                 for expiration date 
               
               
                   
                 expiration 
                   
                 For eg Min Value 1 
               
               
                   
                   
                   
                 Max Value 10 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1686]    1.4.12 User Login
       When the system user logs in into the core administration system the separate ACL will be generated for each user. The ACL will be stored in the User Profile object, which will be stored in the user session. When user request for a particular page controller will check with the security system whether user is having access to the particular page.   When any user requests a particular page in the core administrative system, the controller will ask the security system about the security rights for the application. If user is having rights he will be allowed to perform the current operation.   For e.g. If user request for create carrier master. The carrier master is registered into the system with system with id as 0001. The controller will check the access rights for the carrier master. If the rights for carrier master is write then user will have access to create carrier master as the user rights are higher than requested one. If user is having access rights as read for carrier master then he would not be able to access because it is having lower rights than requested one.       
 
         [1690]    Password Validation
       Password validation to be done as per the requirements specified before. The following items need to be configured as per requirements.       
 
         [1692]    1.5 Business Rules 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Activity 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Delete Rule 
                 For Deleting referential integrity need to be 
               
               
                   
                   
                 considered. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 A group can be deleted if no user is referring to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 group 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Same applies to other hierarchy 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Module 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Application 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Resource 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1693]    1.6 Help Menu
       Help to be provided for all the screens. Help should contain following details.
           Basic Functionality Description   Description about the screen fields.   
               
 
         [1697]    1.7 Process-Data Structure
       This section describes the likely data structure that would contain the data for/by executing the process       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 BPI_MODULES 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Data Element Name 
                 Data Element Type 
                 Constraints 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 MODULE_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 PK Not Null 
               
               
                 MODULE_NAME 
                 Varchar (50) 
                 Not Null 
               
               
                 DESCRIPTION 
                 Varchar (255) 
               
               
                 CREATED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 CREATED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 MODIFIED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 LAST_MODIFIED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 STATUS 
                 NUMBER 
                 1- Active 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0- Inactive 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 BPI GROUPS 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Data Element Name 
                 Data Element Type 
                 Constraints 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 GROUP_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 PK Not Null 
               
               
                 DESCRIPTION 
                 Varchar (255) 
                 Not Null 
               
               
                 GROUP_NAME 
                 Varchar (50) 
               
               
                 CREATED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 CREATED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 MODIFIED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 LAST_MODIFIED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 STATUS 
                 NUMBER 
                 1- Active 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0- Inactive 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 BPI APPLICATIONS 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Data Element Name 
                 Data Element Type 
                 Constraints 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 APPLICATION_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 PK Not Null 
               
               
                 APPLICATION_NAME 
                 Varchar (50) 
                 Not Null 
               
               
                 DESCRIPTION 
                 Varchar (255) 
               
               
                 MODULE_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 FK Refers 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_MODULES 
               
               
                 CREATED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 CREATED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 MODIFIED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 LAST_MODIFIED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 STATUS 
                 NUMBER 
                 1- Active 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0- Inactive 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 BPI RESOURCES 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Data Element 
                   
               
               
                 Data Element Name 
                 Type 
                 Constraints 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 RESOURCE_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 PK Not Null 
               
               
                 RESOURCE_NAME 
                 Varchar (50) 
                 Not Null 
               
               
                 DESCRIPTION 
                 Varchar (255) 
               
               
                 APPLICATION_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 FK Refers 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_APPLICATIONS 
               
               
                 CREATED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 CREATED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 MODIFIED_BY 
                 Varchar(25) 
               
               
                 LAST_MODIFIED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 STATUS 
                 NUMBER 
                 1 Active 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0- Inactive 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 BPI ACL 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Data Element Name 
                 Data Element Type 
                 Constraints 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 ACL_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 PK Not null 
               
               
                 ACL_NAME 
                 Varchar (50) 
                 Not null 
               
               
                 CREATED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 CREATED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 MODIFIED_BY 
                 Varchar(25) 
               
               
                 LAST_MODIFIED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 STATUS 
                 NUMBER 
                 1 Active 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0- Inactive 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 BPI ROLES 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Data Element Name 
                 Data Element Type 
                 Constraints 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 ROLE_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 PK Not null 
               
               
                 ROLE_NAME 
                 Varchar (50) 
                 Not null 
               
               
                 CREATED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 CREATED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 MODIFIED_BY 
                 Varchar(25) 
               
               
                 LAST_MODIFIED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 STATUS 
                 NUMBER 
                 1 Active 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0- Inactive 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 BPI USERS 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Data Element Name 
                 Data Element Type 
                 Constraints 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 USER_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 PK Not null 
               
               
                 PASSWORD 
                 Varchar (30) 
                 Not null 
               
               
                 ADDRESS 1 
                 Varchar (30) 
               
               
                 ADDRESS 2 
                 Varchar (30) 
               
               
                 CITY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 STATE 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 COUNTRY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 PHONE 1 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 PHONE 2 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 PHONE 3 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 CREATED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 CREATED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 MODIFIED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 LAST_MODIFIED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 STATUS 
                 Number 
                 1 Active 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0 Inactive 
               
               
                 PASSWORD_EXPIRY_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 LOCK_STATUS 
                 Number 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 BPI GROUP ACCESS 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Data Element 
                   
               
               
                 Data Element Name 
                 Type 
                 Constraints 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 GROUP_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 Not null Refers 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_GROUPS 
               
               
                 RESOURCE_ID 
                 Varchar (105) 
                 Not null Refers 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_RESOURCES 
               
               
                 APPLICATION_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 Not null Refers 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_APPLICATIONS 
               
               
                 ACL_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 Not null Refers 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_ACL 
               
               
                 CREATED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 CREATED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 MODIFIED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 LAST_MODIFIED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 STATUS 
                 Number 
                 1 Active 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0 Inactive 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 BPI USER ROLES 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Data Element Name 
                 Data Element Type 
                 Constraints 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 USER_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 Not Null Refers 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_USERS 
               
               
                 ROLE_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 Not Null Refers 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_ROLES 
               
               
                 GROUP_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 Not Null Refers 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_USGROUPS 
               
               
                 CREATED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 CREATED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 MODIFIED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 LAST_MODIFIED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 Status 
                 Number 
                 1 Active 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0 Inactive 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 BPI USER ACCESS 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Data 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element 
               
               
                 Data Element Name 
                 Type 
                 Constraints 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 RESOURCE_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 Not Null 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Refers BPI_RESOURCE 
               
               
                 USER_ID 
                 Varchar (25) 
                 Not Null Refers 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_USERS 
               
               
                 ACL_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 Not Null Refers BPI_ACL 
               
               
                 ROLE_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
               
               
                 CREATED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 CREATED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 MODIFIED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 LAST_MODIFIED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 Status 
                 Number 
                 1 Active 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0 Inactive 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 BPI USER PASSWORD HISTORY 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Data Element Name 
                 Data Element Type 
                 Constraints 
               
               
                   
               
               
                 USER_ID 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 Not Null Refers 
               
               
                   
                   
                 BPI_USERS 
               
               
                 PASSWORD 
                 Varchar (10) 
                 Not Null 
               
               
                 CREATED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 CREATED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 MODIFIED_BY 
                 Varchar (25) 
               
               
                 LAST_MODIFIED_DATE 
                 Timestamp 
               
               
                 Status 
                 Number 
                 1 Active 
               
               
                   
                   
                 0 Inactive 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1699]    1.8 Back End Validations
       This subsection provides the field element name and corresponding back end validation if applicable.   Back end validations are those validations where the validations have got to be necessarily done using the database.   As a general rule backend validations should be done for all the validation checks that are being carrier on the front end.       
 
         [1703]    1.9 Non-Functional Requirements
       This subsection corresponds to the requirements that do not relate to the user function. It provides information on the system requirements—Ideally identifies the present problems in the existing system from a non-functional perspective and avoiding the same in the new system       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Non Functional 
                   
               
               
                 Requirement 
                 Details 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Performance 
                 Performance criteria should be established based 
               
               
                   
                 on the data size and the page size. 
               
               
                 System Exception 
                 All system exceptions should be handled grace 
               
               
                   
                 fully throwing a error page with relevant exception 
               
               
                   
                 information and action to be taken for resolving the 
               
               
                   
                 exception 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1705]    1.10 Access Control List
       This section describes the classification of users who can access the process under definition       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 User ID 
                 Job Description 
                 Functionality 
                 Access Level 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Benefit Partners Inc 
     Process Specification 
     Common Functional Features 
     1. Introduction 
       [1707]    1.1. Purpose
       The purpose of this document is to describe the common functional features available across all the modules. This document is identified as Common Functional Features. This document identifies how the user interacts with the system, the data to be captured, the business logic to be implemented, and the output of the process for the common functional features.       
 
         [1709]    1.2. Business Use Case Specification Reference 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Business Use Specification ID 
                 Business Use Case Name 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE 
                 Scope Document 
               
               
                   
                 BPI_SCOPE_ADD 
                 Addendum to scope 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1710]    1.3. Definitions, Acronyms &amp; Abbreviations 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Term 
                 Explanation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       2. Process Identification 
       [1711]    2.1. Background
       Common functional feature is to identify the common functionality across all the modules that have the same usage. This would help in standardization and reuse of the components.       
 
         [1713]    2.2. Process Description
       The objective of the Common Functional Features process is to:
           1) Identify the Common functional features across all the modules:   
               
 
         [1716]    2.3. Process Flow
       Not applicable       
 
       3. User Interface 
       [1718]    3.1. User Interface Screens 
         [1719]    3.1.1. Not Applicable 
         [1720]    3.1.2. Not Applicable 
         [1721]    3.1.3. Element Name, Element Type &amp; Purpose 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Element Type 
                 Purpose 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 First name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter the First name 
               
               
                 Last name 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter the last name 
               
               
                 Middle name (MI) 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter the middle Name 
               
               
                 Suffix 
                 Drop Down List 
                 List the Suffix 
               
               
                 Salutation 
                 Drop Down List 
                 List the Salutation 
               
               
                 Title 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter the Job Title 
               
               
                 Address 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter the first detail about the address 
               
               
                 Suite/Apt. # 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter the suite/Apartment or PO BOX number 
               
               
                 City 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter the name of the city 
               
               
                 State 
                 Drop Down List 
                 List all the States in UAS 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter the ZIP Code 
               
               
                 Phone # 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter the Phone number 
               
               
                 Fax # 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter the FAX number 
               
               
                 Phone Extension 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter extension number 
               
               
                 FAX Extension 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter extension number 
               
               
                 Email Address 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter the email address 
               
               
                 Credit Card Number 
                 Enter the Credit Card 
                 Entry Credit Card number 
               
               
                   
                 Number 
               
               
                 Credit Card Type 
                 Drop Down List 
                 List the type of Credit Card 
               
               
                 (Date) Current Date 
                 Calendar/Entry Field 
                 Entry field to type the date or Calendar to pick the 
               
               
                 (System Date) 
                   
                 date 
               
               
                 (Date) Past Date (1900 
                 Calendar/Entry Field 
                 Entry field to type the date or Calendar to pick the 
               
               
                 to system date) 
                   
                 date 
               
               
                 (Date) Future Date 
                 Calendar/Entry Field 
                 Entry field to type the date or Calendar to pick the 
               
               
                 (System date to 100 Yr. 
                   
                 date 
               
               
                 hence) 
               
               
                 (Date) Default 1 st  of 
                 Calendar/Entry Field 
                 Entry field to type the date or Calendar to pick the 
               
               
                 Following Month (eg. 
                   
                 date 
               
               
                 System date is Dec. 2, 2001 
               
               
                 should default to 
               
               
                 Jan. 1, 2002) 
               
               
                 (Date) Default 1 st  of 
                 Calendar/Entry Field 
                 Entry field to type the date or Calendar to pick the 
               
               
                 the current Month (e.g. 
                   
                 date 
               
               
                 System date is Dec. 2, 2001 
               
               
                 should default to 
               
               
                 Dec. 1, 2001) 
               
               
                 (Date) Default End of 
                 Calendar/Entry Field 
                 Entry field to type the date or Calendar to pick the 
               
               
                 current Month (eg. 
                   
                 date 
               
               
                 System date is Dec. 2, 2001 
               
               
                 should default to 
               
               
                 Dec. 31, 2001) 
               
               
                 (Date) Credit Card 
                 Drop Down List 
                 List all the Months in a year 
               
               
                 Date (should only 
               
               
                 accept future date.) 
               
               
                 Month 
               
               
                 Date) Credit Card 
                 Drop Down List 
                 List the year 25 years ahead 
               
               
                 Date (should only 
               
               
                 accept future date.) 
               
               
                 Year 
               
               
                 Social Security 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter the Social Security number 
               
               
                 Number 
               
               
                 TAX Identification 
                 Entry Field 
                 Enter the Tax Identification Number 
               
               
                 Number 
               
               
                 Mode of 
                 Drop Down List 
                 List Various modes of communication 
               
               
                 Communication 
               
               
                 Browser Back Button 
                 Button 
                 Validate the back button 
               
               
                 Browser Forward 
                 Button 
                 Validate the forward button 
               
               
                 Button 
               
               
                 Refresh Button 
                 Button 
                 Validate Refresh button 
               
               
                 Address Bars 
                 Tool Bars 
                 Hide Address bar 
               
               
                 Link Bar 
                 Tool Bars 
                 Hide Link bar 
               
               
                 Standard Button 
                 Tool bars 
                 Hide standard bars 
               
               
                 Window Close 
                 Browser Window 
                 Validate Close 
               
               
                 Window Minimize 
                 Browser Window 
                 Validate minimize 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1722]    3.1.4. Screen Validations
       Note: Validation provided here are the default validations. However if the module functionality has specified different validations for these element described then that would override the default validations provided here.       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Element Name 
                 Action/Validation Details 
                 Message 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 First name 
                 Entry Field with 40 Character long. 
                   
               
               
                   
                 Can accept only Alpha characters. 
               
               
                   
                 Arnold 
               
               
                 Last name 
                 Entry Field with 40 Character long 
               
               
                   
                 Can accept only Alpha characters. 
               
               
                   
                 Schwarzenegger 
               
               
                 Middle name (MI) 
                 Entry Field with 1 Character long 
               
               
                   
                 Can accept only Alpha characters. 
               
               
                   
                 M. A etc. 
               
               
                 Suffix 
                 List should include Jr., Sr., I., II., 
               
               
                   
                 III., IV., and V. 
               
               
                 Salutation 
                 List should include Mr., Mrs., Ms. 
               
               
                 Title 
                 Entry Field with 20 Character long 
               
               
                   
                 Can accept Alpha and numeric 
               
               
                   
                 character and blank space between 
               
               
                   
                 character (Example Administrator 1) 
               
               
                 Address 
                 Entry Field with 40 Character long 
               
               
                   
                 3013 Douglas Boulevard, 
               
               
                   
                 Can accept free form entry with any 
               
               
                   
                 character. 
               
               
                 Suite/Apt. # 
                 Entry Field with 20 Character long 
               
               
                   
                 Example 200 or 1 D etc. 
               
               
                   
                 Can accept free form entry with any 
               
               
                   
                 character. 
               
               
                 City 
                 Entry Field with 20 Character long 
               
               
                   
                 Alpha only and Blank between 
               
               
                   
                 words allowed 
               
               
                   
                 Roseville, San Jose, San Diego 
               
               
                 State 
                 List all the States in USA in 
               
               
                   
                 abbreviated form as CA, IL, OH, NY 
               
               
                   
                 etc. 
               
               
                 ZIP 
                 Entry Field with 5 Character long 
               
               
                   
                 Should allow maximum and 
               
               
                   
                 minimum of 5 Numbers only. Whole 
               
               
                   
                 Number Field. 
               
               
                 Phone # 
                 Entry Field with 10 Character long 
               
               
                   
                 Should allow maximum and 
               
               
                   
                 minimum of 10 Numbers only. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Number Field. 
               
               
                   
                 3 for Area code, 7 for the number. 
               
               
                 Fax # 
                 Entry Field with 10 Character long 
               
               
                   
                 Should allow maximum and 
               
               
                   
                 minimum of 10 Numbers only. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Number Field. 
               
               
                   
                 3 for Area code, 7 for the number. 
               
               
                 Phone Extension 
                 Entry Field with 5 Character long 
               
               
                   
                 Should allow maximum of 5 and 
               
               
                   
                 minimum of 1. Blanks fields are 
               
               
                   
                 acceptable. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Number Field. 
               
               
                 FAX Extension 
                 Entry Field with 5 Character long 
               
               
                   
                 Should allow maximum of 5 and 
               
               
                   
                 minimum of 1. Blanks fields are 
               
               
                   
                 acceptable. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Number Field. 
               
               
                 Email Address 
                 Entry Field with 40 Character long 
               
               
                   
                 Allow entering more than 40 
               
               
                   
                 character. 
               
               
                   
                 Validate for a Valid Email Address. 
               
               
                 Credit Card 
                 Entry Field with 20 Character long 
               
               
                 Number 
                 Minimum and maximum value 
               
               
                   
                 should be 16. Allow only Whole 
               
               
                   
                 Number. Numeric Field 
               
               
                   
                 For Amex allow 20 as min and max 
               
               
                   
                 value. 
               
               
                 Credit Card Type 
                 List Credit Card type as 
               
               
                   
                 Visa, Master, Discovery, Amex etc 
               
               
                 (Date) Current 
                 Entry Field or Calendar with default 
               
               
                 Date (System Date) 
                 system date in the Entry Field and 
               
               
                   
                 calendar. 
               
               
                 (Date) Past Date 
                 Entry Field or Calendar with default 
               
               
                 (1900 to system 
                 system date − 1 in the Entry Field 
               
               
                 date) 
                 and calendar. Do not allow for 
               
               
                   
                 Current date and future date 
               
               
                 (Date) Future Date 
                 Entry Field or Calendar with default 
               
               
                 (System date to 
                 system date in the Entry Field and 
               
               
                 100 Yr. hence) 
                 calendar. Do not allow for past date 
               
               
                 (Date) Default 1 st   
                 Entry Field or Calendar with default 
               
               
                 of Following 
                 first of the following month date in 
               
               
                 Month (eg. System 
                 the Entry Field and calendar. 
               
               
                 date is Dec. 2, 2001 
               
               
                 should default to 
               
               
                 Jan. 1, 2002) 
               
               
                 (Date) Default 1 st   
                 Entry Field or Calendar with default 
               
               
                 of the current 
                 first of the current month date in the 
               
               
                 Month (e.g. System 
                 Entry Field and calendar. 
               
               
                 date is Dec. 2, 2001 
               
               
                 should default to 
               
               
                 Dec. 1, 2001) 
               
               
                 (Date) Default End 
                 Entry Field or Calendar with default 
               
               
                 of current Month 
                 end of the current month date in the 
               
               
                 (eg. System date is 
                 Entry Field and calendar. 
               
               
                 Dec. 2, 2001 should 
               
               
                 default to 
               
               
                 Dec. 31, 2001) 
               
               
                 (Date) Credit Card 
                 List to show all the months in a year 
               
               
                 Date (should only 
               
               
                 accept future date.) 
               
               
                 Month 
               
               
                 Date) Credit Card 
                 List the years from current year to 
               
               
                 Date (should only 
                 100 years forward hence. 
               
               
                 accept future date.) 
                 Validate The Credit Card month and 
               
               
                 Year 
                 year together. Should not have past 
               
               
                   
                 month as credit card entry. 
               
               
                 Social Security 
                 Entry Field with 9 Character long 
               
               
                 Number 
                 Should allow maximum of 9 and 
               
               
                   
                 minimum of 9. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Number Field. 
               
               
                 TAX Identification 
                 Entry Field with 9 Character long 
               
               
                 Number 
                 Should allow maximum of 9 and 
               
               
                   
                 minimum of 9. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Number Field. 
               
               
                 Mode of 
                 List various modes of 
               
               
                 Communication 
                 Communication like Fax, Phone, 
               
               
                   
                 Email, USPS 
               
               
                 Browser Back 
                 Disable the browser back button and 
               
               
                 Button 
                 hide the back button 
               
               
                 Browser Forward 
                 Disable the browser forward button 
               
               
                 Button 
                 and hide the forward button 
               
               
                 Refresh Button 
                 Disable the browser refresh button 
               
               
                   
                 and hide the refresh button 
               
               
                 Address Bars 
                 Disable the address bar so that user 
               
               
                   
                 cannot type the URL to navigate to 
               
               
                   
                 the respective screen 
               
               
                 Link Bar 
                 Disable the link bar 
               
               
                 Standard Button 
                 Disable the browser standard button 
               
               
                 Window Close 
                 Catch windows close event with 
               
               
                   
                 Java script and show the message. 
               
               
                 Window Minimize 
                 Allow to minimize the window 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1724]    3.1.5. Interface Flow
       N/A       
 
         [1726]    3.1.6. Help Menu 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Element Name 
                 Purpose 
                 Valid Values 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       4. Business Rule Mapping 
       [0000]    
       
         
           
             Not Applicable 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Activity 
                 Rules 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 1. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       5. Data Structures 
       [0000]    
       
         
           
             Not Applicable 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Data Element Name 
                 Data Element Type 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1729]    5.1. Back End Validations
       Not Applicable       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Field Element Name 
                 Back End Validation 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       6. Non-Functional Requirements 
       [0000]    
       
         
           
             Not Applicable 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Non Functional Requirement 
                 Details 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       7. Access Control List 
       [0000]    
       
         
           
             Not Applicable 
           
         
       
     
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
               
               
             
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 User ID 
                 Job Description 
                 Functionality 
                 Access Level